Home

I-PAK VH User Manual

1. End Batch Enable End Batch Functionality Il PAK Windows Setting 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration IV Enable Desktop Turn off Always on Top I Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 Enable I PAK to be Minimized r Config File Format a j f US Letter Format Tse elt C amp 4 Format f jevert to Operator Mode Il PAK System Name C 5 E C Fania Sioi System Name default VE Fu k Il PAK VH User Manual 3 89 Chapter Kil Setup Mode Reference The General Tab window contains the following sections e Job Settings on page 3 90 e End Batch on page 3 90 e 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration on page 3 90 e Menu Settings on page 3 93 l PAK VH Windows Settings on page 3 94 e Config File Format on page 3 94 e Il PAK VH System Name on page 3 94 Job Settings This section allows you to select or change Runtime Inspection Priority This is the runtime priority of the current process The options are Normal High and Realtime Note You must have access rights to change the process setting End Batch Enable End Batch Functionality allows you to automatically save the read only statistics file to the hard drive when you exit Run Mode When Enable End Batch Functionality is enabled disabled by default PAK VH displays the End this Batch dialog box e Click Yes to display the Save Statistics To a Data File As dialog box Enter a file name and click Sav
2. Queue Now 3 34 Il PAK VH User Manual Statistics and Data 25 e Part Image Storage Mode Allows you to select which inspection images are to be stored Store All Images Saves all images in the inspection So O9 c o Q 52 i vy 9 Store No Images Default Saves no images in the inspection Store Failed Images Saves all images in the inspection whenever a part fails Store Passed Images Saves all images in the inspection whenever a part passes When an inspection runs and meets the image storage criteria the Inspection step saves all camera images for that part to memory on the smart camera they can be saved to disk at a later time e Part Image Queue Size Allows you to specify the number of images to be stored Note The total number of images for all inspections cannot exceed 10 Based on Part Image Storage Mode images are stored in a first in first out FIFO queue When the number of images stored reaches the size specified by this parameter the oldest image in the queue is overwritten so that the queue never expands beyond this size The default value is 0 Note After running your inspection open the Retrieve and Save Image As dialog box to set up Image File Name Select the path and file names of the currently stored image files on the smart camera This allows the images to be uploaded and saved on the PC Image File Name
3. Example with Manually Trained Characters Using the TEXT02 TIF image a sample OCVFont was trained by manually placing the training box over the characters All parameters were at the default values The characters L 2 A 0 6 9 3 were trained into the OCVFont When the OCVRuntimeTool was trained the Sobel Edge Enhancement search buffer was the same as above example FIGURE 7 90 Contents of Buffer Il PAK VH User Manual 7 109 Chapter T OCV Reference The Sobel Edge Enhancement templates and the resulting Match were FIGURE 7 91 Resulting Match 99 95 98 98 99 99 99 Comparing these templates to the search buffer you can see that the template characters more closely resemble those in the search area as reflected by the Match values By manually positioning the training boxes we were able to ensure that the proper amount of spacing was available for template training Conclusions e Microscan currently recommends that OCVFont training be performed using manual placement of the training box This is because the training box should be the same size over symbols that are similar in order for the Runtime ID Checking algorithms to work optimally The Automatic Segmentation cannot assure that the boxes around similar characters are the same size Using manual placement with the correct 1 2 pixel border will also help prevent the behavior des
4. a a D im g X gt oO e Chapter T OCV Reference e Polarity Allows the step to be set up to always return Light_On_Dark always return Dark_On_Light or return an automatically determined polarity Default Automatic Step Tips After the OCVFontless Tool has been trained positioning the mouse over the ROI displays a Step Tip This Step Tip provides information and graphical feedback for individual symbols when the mouse is over a symbol area Train information includes the Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the binary template and a bitmap representation of the binary template as shown in Figure 7 45 FIGURE 7 45 Step Tip Example 1 OPA A MOL m LS a When the mouse is not positioned over a particular symbol area the Step Tip displays the name of the OCVFontless Tool as shown in Figure 7 46 7 64 Il PAK VH User Manual a OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 7 46 Step Tip Example 2 rt O D i 2 D x gt O 0 OMA Vrah k OD A i ry When the OCVFontless Tool has been run additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key when the mouse is positioned over the symbol area as shown in Figure 7 47 FIGURE 7 47 Step Tip Example 3 fication N f r IBA JO PAITTI Inspection information includes e The Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the
5. 0 6 9 3 2 Set Read Match 80 on Layout step in the OCVRuntimeTool 3 Train OCVRuntime Tool 4 You will find that the L character is not found even though the same TEXTO2 TIF file is being used The Explanation Training When a character is trained into an OCVFont there are several templates stored for the character One of these templates is a Sobel Edge Enhancement template Il PAK VH User Manual 7 107 Chapter T OCV Reference When the OCVRuntimeTool is trained the ROI being searched for characters is first passed through a Sobel Edge Enhancement Then the Sobel Edge Enhancement templates for each symbol are used in a correlation to determine where the symbols are within the ROI The Read Match value is used to accept reject a found character based on correlation match percentage Correct Character Training When a character is trained it is important to correctly size the training box around the character The Il PAK VH manual describes character training as follows Individual character training requires that the OCVFont box be placed close around a single character in the image leaving a 1 2 pixel border This box should not include any portion of the adjacent characters The minimum recommended character width is 20 pixels The 1 2 pixel border is important because it allows room for proper training of templates Automatic Segmenting Character
6. By default upon entering train mode AutoStep is on To exit AutoStep click Exit AutoStep Mode This puts you in manual train mode When in manual train mode you can click Next which allows you to skip to the next tool The Programmer Supervisor can click Exit Training to Main Setup to exit this menu at any time Train and Tryout Mode With AutoStep off or once all vision tools in a Product have been trained successfully Train and Tryout Mode allows you to tryout the Job This mode allows you to monitor the execution of each step in the Product This allows for debugging and proving the integrity of an inspection before running in production mode With AutoStep off Train and Tryout Mode is active and additional buttons are displayed to the right of the toolbar Below the toolbar is an area for image display Scroll bars are provided to allow you to access all areas of the image Vision tools are displayed graphically over the image and can be selected by clicking on their graphical representations Train and Tryout Toolbar This toolbar enables you to move through the train and tryout process acquire images view live images and tryout the product Refer to Figure 3 15 and the descriptions on page 3 20 through page 3 25 Il PAK VH User Manual 3 19 Chapter Ki Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 15 Train and Tryout Buttons Next Tool Zoomin Try Tool 5 Custom Exit Training Camera Settings Options
7. X gt O Default 100 Range 0 to 100 e Allowed Thickening of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to grow along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction away from the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels Allowed Thinning of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to shrink along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction toward the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels e Individual Symbol Search X Determines the width of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol width to get the search width Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels Il PAK VH User Manual 7 59 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Individual Symbol Search Y Determines the height of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol height to get the search height Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels Test For Character Breaks Enables and disables the checks for character break appearance flaws Default Disabled Enable Tryout Debug Info Enables and disables the display of debug in
8. You cannot communicate with smart cameras listed with red text Generally this means that they are configured to use a different network number than that of your PC FIGURE B 1 Network Overview Dialog Box B Network Overview Standalone DAR E IP Address DHCP Subnet Mask Broadcom Netxtreme 57xx Gigabit Controller Packet Schedu 192 168 254 2 N 255 255 255 0 Change Network Settings gt Model ame IPAddess Status Cycles Failed m Hak Hawk 1 192 168 254 4 Note The Vision HAWK Smart Camera announces its presence on the network by sending out a UDP packet every 5 seconds This is how Visionscape discovers cameras on the network So when you first start Network Overview it may take up to 5 seconds for your smart camera to appear in the list B 6 Il PAK VH User Manual oO v oO o E D m APPENDIX C Demo Mode Demo Mode allows you to display quickly the capabilities of Il PAK VH Demo Mode is password protected It allows I PAK VH to run a saved Job using saved images for a pre set amount of time and then switch to the next desired Job and run it Demo Mode runs automatically until you manually enter Setup Mode Important You need a Visionscape USB drive to run in Demo Mode with a Software System You cannot use 21 CFR Part 11 with Demo Mode Il PAK VH User Manual C 1 Appendix o Demo Mode Copying Job Font and Image Files Before you can use D
9. mm gt lt D amarrer PAK VH Inspection Il PAK VH s primary focus is to inspect measure verify position verify characters and detect flaws on product packaging I PAK VH is adaptive and can be used easily in many industries such as pharmaceuticals consumer packaged goods food and beverage and medical device manufacturing Il PAK VH User Manual 1 1 Chapter Il PAK VH Inspection System Specifications Il PAK VH supports up to four Vision HAWK Smart Cameras connected to a Windows PC Ensure that you review carefully the PC and network requirements below Recommended PC Requirements e CPU Intel ATOM D2550 1 86 GHz Dual Core or greater RAM 4 GB or greater Minimum 1 USB port Two 100BASE T network connections e Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 Hard Drive 250 GB or greater Software Windows 7 Professional 32 Bit SP1 64 Bit recommended 4 0 Windows Experience Index RS 232 Port 1 which is used for user input of Match String Characters and output end of batch Runtime Statistics RS 232 Port 2 which is used for an optional Uninterruptible Power Supply CD R W recommended Screen Resolution Refresh You should set the Refresh Frequency setting Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display etc to a value that maximizes system performance To accomplish this increase the value of Refresh Frequency and use the Test button to make sure that the display is OK Continue th
10. FIGURE 4 1 I PAK VH Run Mode Window Failure Report Change Lot MICROSCAN Run Mode Buttons and Border e Pass Fail Status Border I PAK VH always displays the image with a colored border that indicates the state of the inspection Green pass Red fail Il PAK VH User Manual Run Mode Window e Camera x There is one button for each smart camera up to four smart cameras in the current Product The button contains the name of the device For example in Figure 4 1 the first and only smart camera in this Product is named MyVisionHAWK Click the button to activate and deactivate the image and results display for MyVisionHAWK In a multi camera Job you can toggle the display of the active smart cameras by clicking the different buttons This displays a separate camera view its toolbar its statistics and its fail messages Y re lt D t v ao e 5 Hotkey ALT lt Number of camera gt A Programmer can define the text for a button Advanced Settings gt Product Settings gt Camera x Button Text By default the first camera button reads the name of the smart camera You might want to specify the text for the smart camera to best describe the view that is being displayed by that smart camera For example Date Lot Code be more meaningful in your application Camera views cannot be moved or resized You can enable or disable the ca
11. When the Inspection step in the current Job has been set up to store images based on the part pass fail status you will specify a file destination to which these images should be stored When the Product is run in a loop the Inspection step stores images based on its Part Image Storage Mode setting Base File Path Name Takes a base file name Base File Number Takes a base file number Il PAK VH User Manual 3 35 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference If the Inspection Step was set up to store the last 10 failed images you could enter c fail for the Base File Path Name and 0 for the Base File Number Then the 10 failed images would be saved as c fail_ Snap1_0 tif c fail_ Snap1_1 tif c fail_ Snap1_2 tif c fail_ Snap1_3 tif c Mfail_Snap1_4 tif c fail_ Snap1_5 tif c fail_ Snap1_6 tif c fail_ Snap1_7 tif c fail_ Snap1_8 tif c fail_ Snap1_9 tif When there were two cameras in the inspection the images would be saved as c fail_Snap1_0 tif c fail_Snap2_0 tif c fail_Snap1_1 tif c fail_Snap2_1 tif c fail_Snap1_2 tif c fail_Snap2_2 tif c fail_Snap1_3 tif c fail_Snap2_3 tif c fail_Snap1_4 tif c fail_Snap2_4 tif c fail_Snap1_5 tif c fail_Snap2_5 tif c fail_Snap1_6 tif c fail_Snap2_6 tif c fail_Snap1_7 tif c fail_Snap2_7 tif c fail_Snap1_8 tif c fail_Snap2_8 tif c Mfail_Snap1_9 tif c fail_Snap2_9 tif In these file names Snap1 indicates the first camera and Snap
12. Automatic Identification IntelliText Binarization Binarization Overview OCR segmentation methods are implemented in the binary image domain To handle uneven illumination conditions or ROIs with background variations an advanced statistical method is used by default Note Due to the wide variety of applications and image conditions this automatic parameter selection for the binarization algorithm is not always optimal and can introduce instability For this reason fixed binarization parameters can be used for optimal consistency These parameters are Binary Mean Factor and Binary Dynamic Range Parameter Usage When the Binary Threshold Mode is configured for Fixed Template the Binary Mean Factor and the Binary Dynamic Range parameters are fixed and defined by the associated datum in the tool The recommended procedure for modifying the binarization parameters for optimization is first to modify the mean factor with a midrange value and then tune the dynamic range and mean factor as needed to optimize for the application For the Binarization Mean Factor a high value will result in high background rejection on good contrast symbols but a low value will be needed for lower contrast marks The Binary Dynamic Range should be tuned only after a proper Binarization Mean Factor value has been selected IntelliTtext OCR User Interface in Il PAK VH In Il PAK VH the o
13. Chapter K Setup Mode Reference System Settings The System Settings dialog box allows the Programmer to e Define and configure the Input and Output Channels Define automatic Product ChangeOver activities Resetting statistics Resetting failures Setting the archive path Showing only unique codes in change lot Ignoring extra layout symbols e Define training Session activities Autosave Resetting statistics Resetting failures AutoStep Mode default on off in Training Go directly into Training when you exit Run Mode Train Multiple OCV Tools e Define an End Batch option Enable the 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance options Login capability Configuration Audit trail Login Passwords Expirations Login Prompt on Training Feature These are Programmer level functions For the System Settings dialog box with General tab selected see System Settings General Tab on page 3 89 3 62 Il PAK VH User Manual Advanced Settings 25 The remainder of this section describes e System Settings Communication Tab starting on page 3 63 e System Settings Training and Results Tab starting on page 3 71 So O9 o Q 52 ee oY e System Settings General Tab starting on page 3 89 System Settings Communication Tab FIGURE 3 44 System Settings Dialog Box Communication Tab Selection Input Channel None ka Output Channel None
14. Hard Drive 250 GB or greater Software Windows 7 Professional 32 Bit SP1 64 Bit recommended 4 0 Windows Experience Index RS 232 Port 1 which is used for user input of Match String Characters and output end of batch Runtime Statistics RS 232 Port 2 which is used for an optional Uninterruptible Power Supply CD R W recommended Screen Resolution Refresh You should set the Refresh Frequency setting Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display etc to a value that maximizes system performance To accomplish this increase the value of Refresh Frequency and use the Test button to make sure that the display is OK Continue this process until the optimal Refresh Rate is determined Note Microscan recommends that you connect the Vision HAWK Smart Camera to the PC using dedicated network cards and static IP addresses to minimize problems with disconnections Refer to Appendix B Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC for a description of how to configure your PC and Vision HAWK Smart Cameras to communicate via static IP addresses Note For optimal display on the widest possible variety of monitors your PC s screen resolution must be set to 100 as shown below In Windows 7 navigate to Control Panel gt Appearance and Personalization gt Display ae as Eoma ae J _ eee ice a gt Control Panel Appearance and Personalization Display I Search Con
15. I PAK VH User Interface In order to use Ethernet Input of Layout String you must set the Input Channel and Output Channel to Ethernet in the System Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 7 80 rT 3 D im T X gt O FIGURE 7 80 System Settings Ethernet Selection Input Channel Ethernet v Output Channel Ethernet iv Configure RS232 Ethernet TCP IP DDE Input By default while in Run Mode I PAK VH listens for input through Ethernet Once data has started to be received Il PAK VH exits Run Mode changes the string then returns to Run Mode The Run Mode output is asserted if enabled once I PAK VH is ready to receive triggers Ethernet ChangeLayout Error Debug Any errors that occur are reported over Ethernet via a FAIL message to the host device These errors are also displayed in message boxes within Il PAK VH For example when erroneous data bad data symbol not in layout too many symbols etc is received over Ethernet from a user s host machine the ChangeLayout dialog box stays up on the I PAK VH Run Mode screen everything else from Run Mode is Disabled except for the ChangeLayout dialog box It shows you the recently input data tool name and new layout string Il PAK VH User Manual 7 99 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 7 81 ChangeLayout Error Status Run Mode Change Layout 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCV Font Tool
16. PAK VH requires a continuous uninterrupted connection to all Vision HAWK Smart Cameras Unlike Microscan s AutoVISION software you cannot shut down the software interface while running a job using I PAK VH and Vision HAWK Smart Cameras c 2 _ oO 3 Q mm gt D Each smart camera acts as an asynchronous processing engine In other words each smart camera contains its own processor and lO architecture and is therefore able to capture images process those images and send results via IO RS 232 or Ethernet independent of the PC and of the other smart cameras Each smart camera is fully independent Communications between the I PAK VH user interface and the Vision HAWK are conducted via TCP IP I PAK VH provides communication to external processors via Digital IO TCP IP and RS 232 Note You may see Vision MINI Smart Cameras on the network along with Vision HAWK Smart Cameras However I PAK VH software does not support the Vision MINI Smart Camera Only the Vision HAWK Smart Camera is supported by I PAK VH Il PAK VH User Manual 1 3 Chapter Il PAK VH Inspection Product Specifications Table 1 1 lists the product specifications for Il PAK VH TABLE 1 1 Il PAK VH Product Specifications Feature Description Hardware Supports up to four Vision HAWK Smart Cameras Trigger 1 trigger input and 1 strobe output for each Vision HAWK allowing separate camera triggering VO The IO come
17. The input string did not contain either the name of the OCVFont Tool or the new layout string Change Layout Error The Tool name is not in the Job Check you input syntax An OCVFont Tool with the given name could not be found in the Job Input Symbol Name not found in OCVFont The new layout string contains a Symbol Name that cannot be found in the selected OCVFont Missing 1st colon in layout The input string could not be parsed because it has an incorrect format Missing 2nd colon in layout The input string could not be parsed because it has an incorrect format Number of characters in layout does not match characters sent Wrong Number of Symbols For a given Font Tool the number of characters in the layout string is different from the inputted number of characters Step FontTool Not Found Step Inspection Not Found The FontTool definition is not found in the input string from the host The Inspection definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Snapshot Not Found The Snapshot definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Vision device Not Found The Vision device definition is not found in the input string from the host The Font Tool is not trained Go back to Train and Tryout and train all the tools The OCVFont Tool with the given name is not trained Lot ChangeOver requires the tool to have a layout string before changeo
18. When you click Change All Tool s Code or Change This Tool s Code Il PAK VH checks to make sure that the number of symbols you input is equal to the number of symbols currently in the OCV Tool s layout With Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller enabled you are able to enter fewer symbols than the number in the current layout Il PAK VH software automatically ignores the extra symbol positions Il PAK VH User Manual 3 73 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference Although the OCV Tool ignores the symbols during OCV inspection the AutoFind still uses those symbol positions as templates if they were assigned as templates when the tool was trained If you wish to ignore completely symbol positions at runtime you must ensure that those symbol positions are not used by the AutoFind Results Reporting This section allows you to configure Il PAK VH to output selected inspection results through the RS 232 Communications Port and or to a file on the PC This may be useful when you need a matrix match or read string or a Font Tool s string to be communicated to an external device at runtime in the case of RS 232 Runtime Result or to log inspections at runtime in the case of Save Runtime Results to a File In either case the setup is similar Il PAK VH presents a list of inspection results to upload as part of the Inspection Step These are noted as Select Results to Upload on the Inspection Step s property page Il PAK V
19. e Symbol Length Specifies the exact number of bars that must be present for Visionscape to recognize and decode the Pharmacode symbol e Minimum Bars Sets the minimum number of bars that a Pharmacode symbol must have to be considered valid Bar Width If set to Mixed Visionscape will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars If set to All Narrow all bars will be considered as narrow bars If set to All Wide all bars will be considered as wide bars If set to Fixed Threshold it will use the fixed threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when Visionscape is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars e Direction Specifies the direction in which a symbol can be read e Fixed Threshold Value Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold Defines the minimum difference in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar e Background Color Allows the user to determine if the background color is white black or both UPC e Supplementals Status A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required Il PAK VH User Manual 6 11 Chapter Automatic Identification Visionscape reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN symbols e Separator Status A character can be inserted between the standar
20. 3 46 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings FIGURE 3 32 Create a Product System Settings General Job Settings Menu Settings C Streamline Menus Horma one E Realtime Z Show All Menu Options Advanced Users V Enable Change Lot In Run Mode J Automatic Open Softkeyboard So O9 o a 52 w Q oY End Batch J Enable End Batch Functionality Il PAK Windows Setting 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration IV Enable Desktop Tum off Always on Top I Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 Enable I PAK to be Minimized Ps Trat Config File Format r US Letter Format E C A4 Fomat Set Time nactivit tto Operator Mode Il PAK System Name SHinutes amp 15 Minutes 30 Minutes f 60 Minute System Name fdefault A j ro rou At this point e Clicking Quit Product Creation aborts the product creation during Product Settings and System Settings e Clicking OK takes you to the Step Program Creation dialog boxes Figure 3 33 through Figure 3 36 Step Program Dialog Boxes These dialog boxes are a visual representation of the tools to be programmed and used in the product definition A new product definition displays Camera Inspection and Acquire For this window the glidepoint input device is needed with the touchscreen to support 2 button mouse controls Il PAK VH User Manual 3 47 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 33 Cre
21. A Connect m Physical 1 0 1 4 8 j j j j j j j Virtual 1 0 1 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 Q elelolelololololololololololololololojolojojololojololojojojo 33 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 A Programmer can access an I O Diagnostic tool to set and view the state of physical and virtual I O Once the I O Diagnostic tool is displayed the Programmer must connect to a Vision HAWK Smart Camera by selecting it from the drop down list and clicking on the Connect button The top portion of the window displays the physical I O the bottom portion displays the virtual I O Inputs are indicated as yellow buttons Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Setup Mode Menus Where applicable you can click the I O LED and change the state of the given I O point e Open Event Selector The Event Selector allows you to change how a touchscreen button press is received By default pressing the touchscreen is equivalent to a left mouse click By pressing the Event Selector the next touchscreen press will be read as a right mouse click The Event Selector will show the status of the touchscreen selection based on the button that colored dark blue in its window Lo O9 g Q sv w Q oY Open Softkeyboard The Softkeyboard allows you to enter text by pressing keys of the keyboard displayed in this program The text can be entered via left mouse clicks or touching the key on the touchscreen Ins Home De
22. AutoStep Previous Next Acquire Live Zoom Out Try Al Settings to Main Setup AutoStep This is a Supervisor level function AutoStep enables the Train and Tryout wizard to guide you tool by tool through the retraining process The default is based on System Setting gt AutoStep Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout The default is On To exit AutoStep click Exit AutoStep Mode or change the default setting See the AutoStep Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout setting on page 3 85 Train This is a Supervisor level function Train enables the training of the currently selected tool Once the tool is trained you can go to the Next Tool in the Job definition The Train button is red when the current tool is not trained and turns green once that tool is successfully trained Previous This is a Supervisor level function Previous enables you to return to the previous tool in the Job definition With AutoStep Off right click on Previous to move backward to the previous snapshot in your Job Next This is a Supervisor level function Next enables you to go forward to the next tool in the Job definition if the current tool is trained successfully With AutoStep Off right click on Next to move forward to the next snapshot in your Job Next Camera This is a Supervisor level function Next Camera is displayed when AutoStep is off Clicking Next Camera allows you to move ahead to the next smart camer
23. Automatic Identification EXP JUN 12 98 fail EXP JUN 12 199B fail LXP JUN 12 1998 fail Add anchor character s for string start and end position s SEXP JUN FEB 0 9 2 0 9 4 Match String This datum is the reference string used to match against the tool Output String when the tool is run The match method used is defined by the String Matching Method datum and the output result is provided by the Match Status output datum Unknown Confidence Threshold This datum defines the confidence threshold used to replace detected characters with the character defined by the Unknown Character datum Unknown Character This datum defines the character used to replace detected characters that fail to meet the threshold defined in the Unknown Confidence Threshold datum Scaling Factor This datum is used to change the sampling interval of the ROI By reducing the scaling factor the ROI pixels will be sampled using a bilinear interpolation prior to execution of the tool The IntelliText OCR tool is optimized for detecting characters that are in the range of 25 50 pixels in height For text under high resolution particularly high resolution dot print this can improve detection by reducing scale Because reducing the sampling introduces some loss of information it is preferable to configure the optical setup accordingly Scaling is provided for applications that may have other
24. Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT Usage on page 5 97 for details on the Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT command See RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Usage on page 5 89 for details on the RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT command 3 68 Il PAK VH User Manual Advanced Settings Remote Commands Details and Syntax Retrieve Statistics When I PAK VH receives this command the following statistics are sent to the Output Channel specified Product Name Current Date and Time Inspected string when the Match String for the Symbology Tool or Data Matrix Tool is used or when FontTool text or OCVRunTool text is uploaded Last Run Time Statistics The data is sent in the following format to the RS 232 port as specified in the Output Channel in conjunction with the RS 232 Protocol specified Product product_name lt lf gt lt cr gt Date Time mm dd yyyy hh mm lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters lt lf gt lt cr gt lt If gt lt cr gt P lt lf gt lt cr gt R lt f gt lt cr gt lt eot gt lt If gt lt cr gt Where product_name is the name of the currently selected product mmis the month 01 12 dd is the day 01 31 yyyy is the year i e 2000 hhis the hour 01 12 Il PAK VH User Manual 3 69 25 So o9 c o Q 52 i vy N Chapter Kil Setup Mode Reference mmis the minute 00 59 inspected_characters is a stri
25. FIGURE 7 74 System Settings RS 232 Configure Communication R5232 Settings Comm Port 1 Comm Port 2 r Baud Rate Comm Port 2 not available Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Timeout Seconds 115 Field Delimiter Char Protocol Pak Enclosure Standard fi M Display Changeover Strings Main Comm Port 1 C If the selected RS 232 protocol is Il PAK VH Enclosure Standard Figure 7 74 RS 232 communications are accomplished through COM Port 1 of Il PAK VH With this protocol the default RS 232 setting for this COM Port 1 are Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 These settings may be adjusted to properly configure the communications with the host device If the selected RS 232 protocol is Il PAK VH Selectable Main Port Figure 7 75 as shown in Figure 7 75 you can select the COM Port used by I PAK VH for RS 232 communications Then the RS 232 settings for the selected port may be properly configured for communications with the host device 7 92 Il PAK VH User Manual as Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command FIGURE 7 75 System Settings RS 232 Configure Communication R5232 Settings Comm Port 1 Comm Port 2 i Baud Rate o O D i 2 D x gt O 0 Comm Port 2 not available Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Timeout Seconds Field Delimiter Char Protocol fi Pak
26. Max Residue Blob Only counts the pixels in the largest blob of the residue image and use the value in Final Residue Max Blob Size as the tolerance Both Performs both methods e Final Residue Limit Sets the amount of objectionable residue that is to be deemed passable when Final Residue Method is set to Total Residue Area or Both Final residue calculation is done after the image processing on the residue image that is associated with Maximum Flaw Size If there is little information in a symbol i e a 1 as compared to an L the percentage variation allowed should be reduced An assignment of 0 residue pixel count 0 means that no residue is passable An assignment of 100 residue pixel count symbol size means that objectionable residue as large as the area of the prototype itself is passable rt 3 D i X gt O Il PAK VH User Manual 7 69 Chapter 7 OCV Reference When Residue Limit Units is set to Percentage Default 15 0 meaning 15 variation is acceptable Range 0 0 to 100 0 The value of this property is the smallest percentage of residue pixels relative to the trained On pixel count in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection When Residue Limit Units is set to Pixels Default 15 of the symbol size Range 0 to symbol size The value of this property is the smallest count of residue pixels in the inspected image that makes the sy
27. Sets up different levels of debug graphics at runtime The default Show ROI Only only shows the ROI boxes associated with the OCVFontless Tool and the characters being inspected green for passed red for failed When set to Show None no graphics are shown at runtime Il PAK VH User Manual 7 61 Chapter OCV Reference Show Basic Graphics a number indicating the symbol s position in the layout is shown along with the ROI boxes as shown in Figure 7 42 FIGURE 7 42 Graphics Level Example Show Details residue graphics are displayed green pixels are those that were not there at train time but are in the image at runtime fills while yellow pixels are those that were there at train time but are not there at runtime voids Show Details also displays the blob outline of the characters at train time The AutoThreshold properties page Figure 7 43 of the OCVFontless Tool is used for segmentation of the image during training FIGURE 7 43 AutoThreshold Properties Page Tool Settings d ComputePolarity Fadl g F A g Default Datum Order AutoThreshold Inputs T Auto Thresholding Enabled w g Edge Energy Threshold 20 g Threshold Adjustment 0 fy Threshold 7 62 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFontless Tool Auto Thresholding Enabled Enables and disables the automatic thresholding When enabled a threshold is calculated using the ROI of the step This calculati
28. TABLE 7 1 Usage Hints Use This Tool When You Want To OCVFont Tool Inspect for code quality and correctness Ensure that code quality is always measured against the Font Library created by the Programmer OCVFontless Inspect for code quality only OCVRuntime Inspect for code quality and correctness Inspect on line printing e AutoFind An AutoFind can optionally be used by any of the OCV Tools This step determines the location of the layout at runtime An AutoFind can be set up to use 1 Pin no rotation or 2 Pins rotation The Pins can be set up by selecting which layout positions to use Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts Note Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool on page 2 20 takes you through the process of setting up an inspection using the OCVRuntimeTool and creating a new font When I PAK VH is first loaded there are no fonts on the system Fonts have to be created in order to perform font based OCV inspection Fonts are stored in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder OCVFont files have the extension ocv Il PAK VH User Manual 7 5 Chapter T OCV Reference Note The location of the stored fonts is not modifiable so that all Visionscape applications can locate the fonts in a single folder You can use the LayoutStep of the font based OCV tool to select a font for training and inspection from a list of available fonts on the system Custom Pr
29. The highest match level of the characters successfully decoded oe I o Eg w E lt 5 OCRTF Character Results Contains a vector of the character confidence values for the successfully decoded characters only The results are in the order of the characters in the output string skipping unknown characters IntelliText OCR IntelliText Overview The IntelliText OCR tool provides better character segmentation stability on noisy backgrounds and has a matchcode option that allows regular expressions to be used for matching text that has been read by the system IntelliText OCR can be used on the emulator or Vision HAWK in combination with Il PAK VH Fonts can be trained in AutoVISION only but font files trained in AutoVISION can easily be used in I PAK VH IntelliText OCR improves consistency and readability of a variety of substandard marks such as inkjet marks or marks on noisy backgrounds Significant improvements over standard OCR can be seen in the following areas Improved invariance to background noise and uneven illumination The ability to read rotated OCR text at any angle The ability to handle fixed tilts and slants in characters Characters can be scaled up or down to make them the optimal size for reading The ability to create a variable match string using regular expressions The ability to set character width and height to resolve segmentation issues Il PAK VH User Manual 6 35 Chapter
30. are the vision applications recipes or step by step instructions that the vision system follows to inspect product Typically you would associate one Job per product being inspected and change or retrain the Date Lot Code or Expiration date while leaving everything else the same Il PAK VH s Audit Trail is a centralized chronological time stamped journal file of all PAK VH activities from the automatic start up of l PAK VH as part of the PC Start Up items noting the version of I PAK VH software through user login attempts to every button pushed every retraining action every new layout string and Data Matrix match strings every alarm acknowledged and the Statistics entering and exiting Run Mode Inspection The Audit File records who makes a change and the reason for the change It is available for printout using Adobe Acrobat s PDF format another safeguard to prevent unauthorized modification of the Audit Trail from inside I PAK VH as part of the Il PAK Administrator s role see The Il PAK Administrator on page 5 4 Il PAK VH s Configuration Files are an ASCII representation of the data contained on I PAK VH Job files These are provided for the convenience of our Il PAK VH customers to provide a readable representation of the logic being used in the inspection They are stored on the PC as read only files and are viewable from within l PAK VH as part of the Il PAK Administrator s role Additionally
31. e Reset a User s Password The I PAK Administrator can reset a users s password via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your employees forgets his or her password 5 16 Il PAK VH User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions FIGURE 5 13 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Reset a User s Password p a Reset a User s Password aa LL UserName etre New Password q Re Type N Password peoo pme Reason for Change User Forgot his password after vacatior OK Cancel e Display Login Violations The I PAK Administrator can review the login violations via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your employees is constantly logging in incorrectly or you suspect a security breach FIGURE 5 14 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Display Login Violations Configure Users x 9 11 2015 10 15 AM UserName l Pak dmin Attempted login using password 999999 9 11 2015 11 24 AM UserName programmer Attempted login using password PROGRMMER 10 30 2015 10 41 AM UserName PakAdmin Attempted login using password 999999 11 05 2015 09 29 11 AM UserName Attempted login using password 11 06 2015 02 30 27 PM UserName program Attempted login using password progam 11 06 2015 02 48 31 PM UserName program Attempted login using password progam 11 06 2015 03 26 26 PM UserName program Attempted login using password proram 11 07 2015 01 51 34 PM UserName catcatcat Attempted login
32. rt O D im 2 D x gt O 0 DefaultFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb V Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pet Revert Save Font IV Always Ask To Save Font V Use Selected Font on Exit The right side of the Custom Properties dialog box displays the properties for the selected font When no font is selected no properties are displayed The left side of the Custom Properties dialog box displays the name of the selected font and the names of the symbols currently trained in that font Setting the Training Debug Delay to a non zero value causes the system to display detailed information during the training and scaling of symbols Buttons e Select Font Displays the Font Manager dialog box see Font Manager Dialog Box on page 7 9 and allows for a font to be selected for training or modification e Train Font Initiates the training of an OCVFont see Training Fonts on page 7 10 This is a change from previous Il PAK VH versions where you were required to train the OCVFont using the Train button in Il PAK VH Il PAK VH User Manual Chapter 7 OCV Reference Remove Symbols Displays the Remove Symbols dialog box see Remove Symbol Dialog on page 7 14 and allows for symbols to be easily removed from the selected font AutoFont and Scaling Instructs Il PAK VH to determine automatically the b
33. Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 6 21 Results of Show Histogram for a Character Ml Histogram of Distance values for 0 E x Characte Font Char b A 3 0 002 0 003 0 005 0 006 0 008 0 009 0 011 0 012 0 014 0 015 Total Bin Samples 5 Message FIGURE 6 22 Results of Show Font Histogram m Frequency Histogram for Font x Characte Threshold Font Char fo xi 0 400 a Number of characters over threshold 0 1 2 a 4 5 6 7 8 a Samples MaxDist Message 6 32 Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool Delete Training and Remove from Font The Delete Training feature removes all trained samples for a character from the font This feature is useful if a particular character should be retrained by itself You will be prompted regarding deleting all samples for a character Remove from Font deletes all training for a character and removes it completely from the font You will be prompted regarding excluding the character from the font Training Tips e The camera field of view FOV should be configured so that the characters read by the OCRTrainableFont tool have a character width of 25 pixels or larger e Given an initial set of sample parts divided the samples into two subsets Use one subset for training and the other subset for reading tests e For OCRTrainableFont the image background should be relatively free of noise e Be certain to train using
34. Current Match String for the DataMatrxT ool VisionBoard1 Insp1 Snapshot DMAT ooll New Match String Entry Mode Keyboard OnScreen Keyboard Input Channel Cancel Data Matrix Tool Wildcard Match Character The Data Matrix Tool accepts a wildcard character in the match string By enabling Use Wildcard in Match String on the Data Matrix Tool properties page wildcard processing occurs When disabled no wildcards are allowed in the match string When enabled a character in the match string allows the inspection to pass for any character that appears in the corresponding position of the string read by the Data Matrix Tool Multiple wildcard characters are allowed in the match string By default this setting is disabled 3 26 Il PAK VH User Manual Train and Tryout 25 Match String Fields and Buttons e Current Match String for the Tool Displays the current match string for the Barcode Data Matrix or OCRTrainableFont tool So O9 c o Q 52 i vy 9 e New Match String Entry Mode You can enter a new Match String either with the keyboard or by the input channel for remote downloading of the Match String The Input Channel is configured from the System Settings dialog box to either RS 232 or Ethernet TCP IP Keyboard To enter the new string with the Keyboard e Click Keyboard e Type the new string directly into the Match String dialog box To set the tool s
35. If you require a 230VAC unit please contact APC directly e 98 209181 UPS 120VAC U S with cables Depending on availability actual model numbers may change while functionality remains intact Note After installing the UPS the installer should add the appropriate labels in the appropriate language to the side of the UPS Microscan suggests using the UPS manufacturer s software PowerChute to configure the UPS and monitor the power and PC This software is included in the UPS Please register your software and get support from APC for the UPS and PowerChute Installing UPS Hardware Follow the directions from APC to attach the battery connect an RS 232 cable to your PC and the UPS and plug in your PC and perhaps its monitor if separate into the UPS Installing UPS Software Below are the steps needed to install the PowerChute software These may vary version to version of PowerChute e Connect a CD drive to your I PAK VH system if one is not already installed e Use the PowerChute CD and install the Product using the PowerChute installation instructions Product Installation Windows Agent Not Installed a Windows Server Not Installed E Windows Console Not Installed Mas Linux Agent Located in Linux folder Back Getting Started Guide TANVE wut Exit Release Notes BUSINESS EDITION Most users will install the first option called Windows Agent A 6 Il PAK VH User Manual gt Uninterruptible P
36. Number of characters in layout does not match characters sent Wrong Number of Symbols For a given Font Tool the number of characters in the layout string is different from the inputted number of characters Step FontTool Not Found Step Inspection Not Found The FontTool definition is not found in the input string from the host The Inspection definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Snapshot Not Found The Snapshot definition is not found in the input string from the host Step Vision device Not Found The Vision device definition is not found in the input string from the host The Font Tool is not trained Go back to Train and Tryout and train all the tools The OCVFont Tool with the given name is not trained Lot ChangeOver requires the tool to have a layout string before changeover can occur Il PAK VH User Manual 7 97 as rt 3 D i X gt O Chapter T OCV Reference Ethernet Input of Layout String Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT Usage Prior to sending data the host must ensure there are no inspections taking place or pending Ethernet CHANGELAYOUT Syntax For each FontTool in the Inspection Job there can be an Ethernet input of the Learn Layout string as shown in Table 7 4 By default the colon is the string delimiter The CHANGELAYOUT command string must end with the termination character EOT hex 04 The CH
37. Segmentation so that the system can better perform Runtime ID Checking This means leave its setting in its default position of Off and carefully use symbol boxes of equal size for all special characters like O 0 B 8 D and so on Il PAK VH User Manual 7 49 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Default Enabled Enable Mask Output Enables and disables the creation and output of a mask at runtime This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Enabling this property increases inspection time Default Disabled Mask Number of Dilations Sets the number of expansions that are performed on the output mask This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Default 1 Graphics Level Sets up different levels of debug graphics at runtime The default Show ROI Only will only show the ROI boxes associated with the OCVRuntimeTool and the characters being inspected green for passed red for failed When set to Show None no graphics are shown at runtime When set to Show Basic Graphics a number indicating the symbol s position in the layout is shown along with the ROI boxes as shown in Figure 7 35 FIGURE 7 35 Graphics Level Example 7 50 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVRuntimeTool
38. SettingsButton Selected 11 19 2018 09 24 52 LoginName NONE Action Advanced Settings Create A Product 11 19 2018 09 24 52 LoginN ame MONET Action Advanced Settings Entering System Settings 11 1972018 09 27 10 1 anin ame NANE Section Fyittina Sustem Settinns OK click es Action View Create PDFs Audit File Create PDFs When you click Create PDFs the Reports that are selected checkboxes to the right of the description and to the left of the display will translate the latest reports into PDFs for added security This can include a translation of the encrypted Audit Trail into a human readable PDF of the Audit Trail PDFs are used because they are difficult to modify and provide a snapshot of the batch report details A message box is displayed after the PDFs are created so that you can see the file names and their paths on the hard drive of Il PAK VH The folder where these PDFs live is in a subfolder where I PAK VH is installed and in their own PDF folder Typically this is a path like C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Jobs PDFs Il PAK VH User Manual 5 9 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 Each PDF uses a file name that contains the date time stamp of when you created these PDF reports and the type of report it is For example the Statistics PDF might be called something like C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Jobs PDFs I PAKStats 11 19 2008 10 02_50 pdf You should be able to use
39. and you will not see the screen in Figure 2 23 This starts Il PAK VH the PAK VH Run Mode window is displayed as shown in Figure 2 24 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 21 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 24 I PAK VH Run Mode Window MICROSCAN ingent 5 Peet o Fa Note Steps 1 2 and 3 are only seen the first time that Il PAK VH starts or if the device that should be used in the start up Job cannot be detected 4 Click the Key icon see Figure 2 24 This displays the Password dialog box as shown in Figure 2 25 FIGURE 2 25 Password Dialog Box Password 5 Type 0101 and click Enter This places you in Programmer Mode and displays the Setup Mode window as shown in Figure 2 26 2 22 Il PAK VH User Manual N Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 26 Il PAK VH Setup Mode Window MICROSCAN Sape out Tey 0207 PM F Change Product Train and Tryout Advanced Settings Please click button for desired submenu ff i e m a I gt lt Oo EXPIRATION DATE SEP 2020 6MA0282 Current Tool Inspectiont Partl1 Disabled 6 Click Advanced Settings 7 Click Create a Product Il PAK VH displays the Select a Vision Device dialog box as shown in Figure 2 27 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 23 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 27 Select a Vision Device Dialog Box Vision Devices
40. fy Mask Number of Dilations 0 Es Graphics Level Show ROI Only e Use AutoFind Enables and disables the locator Switching between enabled and disabled requires retraining the OCV Tool so that the appropriate templates can be set up Default Enabled e AutoFind Pin 1 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 1 When set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Il PAK VH User Manual 7 47 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Default 1 use the first symbol Range 1 to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols AutoFind Pin 2 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 2 when the AutoFind is set up as a 2PinFind When set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 999 use the last symbol Range 1 to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols Apply Automatic Min Sharpness Allows the FontSymbols trained and added to the Runtime Font to have a sharpness tolerance automatically calculated for them This automatically calculated tolerance is equal to 65 of th
41. g Individual Symbol Searchx 3 g Individual Symbol SearchY 3 T Test For Character Breaks C Y Runtime ID Checking N i Enable Mask Output Tj fay Mask Number of Dilations 0 e Use AutoFind Enables and disables the locator Switching between enabled and disabled requires retraining the OCV Tool so that the appropriate templates can be set up Default Enabled e AutoFind Pin 1 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 1 When this property is set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When this property is set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 1 meaning use the first symbol Range 1 to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols e AutoFind Pin 2 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 2 when the AutoFind is set up as a 2PinFind When this property is set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When this property is set toa value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 999 use the last symbol Range 1 to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFont Tool as e Max Contrast Difference Sets the maximum percentage difference betwe
42. lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt lt sp gt 0 lt sp gt 2 lt cr gt lt lf gt rt 3 D i X gt O Final Inspection String lt cr gt lt lf gt Then send the inspection string above lt sp gt is a space character which is the separator between symbol names lt cr gt is a decimal 13 lt lf gt is a decimal 10 Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command An extended feature of the OCVFont Tool is the ability to enter a new data string Layout String during Run Mode This allows an automated Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command from an external RS 232 device or an external Ethernet device After training all the symbols in the OCVFont and training an OCVFont Tool you can send a new string to inspect during Run Mode Setup Notes and Precautions You must stop triggering before sending a new inspect string You must stop triggering and not restart it before Runmode IO is active A maximum of one 1 input string is allowed in a single transmission The new string must have the same number of characters as the original layout string and the character positions must be the same The characters must all be the same width The character that the AutoFind uses cannot be substituted This means that there must be at least one character in the string that never changes Il PAK VH User Manual 7 89 Chapter T OCV Reference RS 232 Input of Layout String RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Usage The RS
43. product click OK FIGURE 3 36 Create a Product Save Product Save Product s xj O id Available Products Product Description Job Created Friday June 27 2015 12 33 58 PM Product File Name Cancel Il PAK VH User Manual 3 49 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference The Programmer can add additional Inspections by right clicking on the Device step Right clicking on the Acquire step results in the Insert A Step dialog box being displayed This dialog box displays the names of steps that can be inserted into an Acquire step Once a Device Inspection or Snapshot block has been inserted it can be changed by right clicking on it Left clicking on a primary tool deletes all secondary tools Right clicking on a tool button such as the Symbology Tool shown in Figure 3 34 displays the Insert A Step dialog box with all possible vision tools The Programmer selects a tool and clicks on Insert Before Insert After or Insert Into Clicking OK causes an Insert Into action Right clicking on a secondary tool button displays the Insert A Step dialog box with all possible vision tools The Programmer selects a tool and clicks Insert Before or Insert After Click OK to cause an Insert After action The Programmer can delete any primary or secondary tool at any location by left clicking on the tool The Delete Tool SubToo l dialog box is displayed This will prompt the Programmer to confirm the action
44. symbol width to get the search width Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels e Individual Symbol Search Y Determines the height of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol height to get the search height Il PAK VH User Manual 7 39 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels Test For Character Breaks Enables and disables the checks for character break appearance flaws Default Disabled Runtime ID Checking Enables and disables the tests that determine if the correct symbol is present at runtime During training of an OCVFont the FontSymbols that are added are checked against each other to determine how similar they are When FontSymbols are found to be very similar tests for determining the presence of the correct symbol are set up and stored with the FontSymbols These tests are only performed at runtime when Runtime ID Checking is enabled Default Enabled Enable Mask Output Enables and disables the creation and output of a mask at runtime This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Enabling this property increases inspection time Default Disabled Mask Number of Dilations Sets the number of expansions that are performed on the output mask This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to all
45. 1 2008 8 30 AM When failed images are written to the hard disk Il PAK VH overwrites any images that may already be in the Il PAK VH FailedImages folder It is the Supervisor s or Programmer s responsibility to save any images that might be needed for debugging or other purposes ata later time Il PAK VH User Manual 3 83 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference Image Upload Maximum Rate To better utilize Il PAK VH s CPU usage you can set the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results gt Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second This setting is for the number of images transferred back to the PC per second At runtime the inspected images get transferred back from the smart camera to the PC and are displayed on the Camera views on the Il PAK VH Run Mode interface In earlier software versions from Microscan we tried to display the maximum number of images possible In some cases however especially on slower PCs this flood of images can bog down the PC s CPU and may max out the CPU making the mouse unresponsive For this reason we limit the number of images that are displayed per second By default this is set to 4 You can decrease it to 2 or increase it to 4 8 or Maximum Increasing this setting enables more images to come back to the PC But as you increase this setting you increase CPU usage Decreasing this setting limits the number of images coming
46. 10 20 1 47 Device Status On line Contact Information Smart UPS SC420 Contact Name Server Shutdown System Location Event Refresh vents Refresh Data Log Help Logout A 8 Il PAK VH User Manual Uninterruptible Power Supply Software A xe Under the Server Shutdown selection on the left you will need to configure the settings as 5 follows Click Configure make the adjustments then click Apply so the settings are retained c e a 2s PowerChute PowerCl X i T fe Business Edition m o Le fH Shutdown Sequence Summary 2 gt Smart UPS SC420 Time Required For Shutdown Sequence 59 Minutes Low Battery Signal 2 Minutes Command File Enabled Yes System Settings A e Command File Name C Program Files APC PowerChute Business Edition agent cmdfiles savecounts exe Command File Execution Duration 0 30 Minutes Seconds Events OS Shutdown Duration 1 Minutes Data Log OS Shutdown Type Shutdown Help Enable OS Reboot Yes Logout UPS Turn On Battery Capacity 0 UPS Turn On Delay 0 Minutes Enable SMTP E mail No Enable Logging Yes Configure Shutdown Sequence Description All events that have the shutdown action enabled will use the settings defined here The shutdown sequence is as follows 1 Execute a user defined command file to perform custom actions such as a database shutdown if enabled 2 Begin the OS Shutdown after the Command File Execution Duration has expired 3 Turn the UPS off after t
47. 232 CHANGELAYOUT syntax requires user selectable tool names as input rather than symbol tool names When there are multiple OCVFont Tools Symbology Tools Data Matrix Tools or OCRTrainable Font Tools in the product definition and one or more of the tools is not inserted directly into the Snapshot step the RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Syntax described above may be ambiguous In order to ensure that Il PAK VH uses the correct tool for the setting the Layout String or Match String the tools must be given unique names when the product definition is being created and or edited RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Syntax For each FontTool in the Inspection Job the RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT command can be used to input the Learn Layout string as shown in Table 7 2 By default the colon is the string delimiter The CHANGELAYOUT command can also be used to change the match string of a Symbology Tool Data Matrix Tool or OCRTrainable Font Tool TABLE 7 2 RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Syntax RS 232 CHANGELAYOUT Syntax Comment CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp1 Snapshot1 FontTool1 Input String for Camera 2003 02 1 s Font Tool 1 Date CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp1 Snapshot1 FontTool2 Input String for Camera 251250430999 1 s Font Tool 2 Lot Code CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp2 Snapshot1 FontTool1 Input String for Camera 2003 02 2 s Font Tool 1 Date CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp2 Snapshot1 FontTool2 Input String for Camera 2
48. 53 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 39 Create a Product Wizard Training Image Masking Tool Help M l CROS E A Current Product Access Level Date Time Testi Programmer 11 17 2017 02 40 PM Zoom In i AutoStep 5 Tool p 3 Exit AutoStep z furSPinc i X Inspection1 iff Snapshot1 gt OCVFontless Tool Wait Step The wizard method of training walks the Programmer through each step of the training sequence Wizard training is invoked automatically when the Programmer first enters this window You can disable it via a system setting For more information see the AutoStep Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout setting on page 3 85 For full training and tryout details see AutoStep or Wizard Training Method on page 3 18 Save Product This is a Programmer level function Save Product displays the Save Product dialog box as shown in Figure 3 40 3 54 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings FIGURE 3 40 Save Product Dialog Box Save Product Product Directory fY SMY Avsprod ipakSjobs 3 Z D Som D x Available Products Product Description c e Q ocvfonttool Job Created Mittwoch 18 Juli 2007 14 00 23 Product File Name xx Save Type the Product File Name and click Save PAK VH saves the current product name and Job to disk By default this button is not selected until
49. Archive dialog box the left hand display shows the Jobs from the current I PAK_VH Jobs folder while the right hand display shows the Jobs from the archival path In this example we used a CD for the archival path Note You ll always need to archive and restore both the avp and avpsys files for a product to run in Il PAK VH e To archive a Job from the Current Jobs folder to the Archived Jobs click on the Job name and its associated avpsys file from the left hand list Then click Save gt to copy those files onto the archival path In this case it copies the files from the PAK_VH Jobs directory to the CD To select more than one file at a time hold the Ctrl key while Clicking file names e To restore a Job from the Archived Jobs to the Current Jobs folder simply click on the Job name and its associated avpsys file from the right hand list Then click on lt Restore to copy those files back to the Current Jobs folder In this case it will copy the files from the installation media to the Il PAK _VH Jobs directory There are error messages and prompts to handle overwriting file names etc Il PAK VH User Manual 3 15 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference Archiving OCVFonts Il PAK VH allows you to archive OCVFonts After a valid archive path has been entered on the System Settings screen see System Settings Training and Results Tab on page 3 71 the Archive Restore button on the Product ChangeOver dial
50. Code faaz Inspection1 Snapshotl My OCVFont Tool 2 Jamanze2 Edit Code Change This Tools Code Previous New if Cancel Note OCVFont Tool is the default name assigned to an OCVFont Tool To avoid confusion on the preceding screen you can change this name by going to Advanced gt Edit Tool Set and typing another name in the Job tree FIGURE 3 11 Lot ChangeOver Complete Tool Path SQA1600T 2 Inspection1 Snapshotl My OCVFont Tool 1 SEP2SER Edit Code Change This Tool s Code Change all Tool s Code 0A165007 2 Inspection1 Snapshot My OCVFont Tool2 EMA0282 Edt Code Change This Tools Code M Show Full Path Previous Next Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver x gl Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Change Product If you want to change a Code simply click Edit Code for the specific tool s This allows you to edit the contents of the match or layout string This also enables the Change this Tool s Code and the Change all Tool s Code buttons Lo O9 c g Q sv w Q vy 9 When you want to just change one match or layout string at a time edit the code and click Change this Tool s Code This will change the match or layout string to the contents you just specified PAK VH will display an error message if the number of characters in the new string is not equal to the number of characters in the old string PAK VH will display a message if any of
51. Hardware Selection Run Up to 4 Smart Cameras by Selecting from the List Below and then Clicking Here Available Smart Cameras Press Ctrl Key to Select Multiple Devices Press Shift Key to Select a Range 8 Select a device Then click the button above the device you selected 9 This displays the Product Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 2 28 10 For Camera 1 change Camera Type to match the smart camera currently connected to Camera 1 on the I PAK VH change Trigger Acquire Method to Continuous as shown in Figure 2 28 2 24 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool 2 FIGURE 2 28 Product Settings Dialog Box Cameras Tab 5 2 IPAK H1 I Camera Type VisionHAWK 1280x960 CCD v Trigger Acquire Method rae ie lt Trigger 1 0 none Trigger Polarity High to Low Lighting Exposure Time micro secs 700 Camera Button Text IPAKVH1 11 Click Next This displays the Product Settings dialog box Data Valid tab as shown in Figure 2 29 FIGURE 2 29 Product Settings Dialog Box Data Valid Tab IPAKYH1 Data Valid Duration ms 1 0 12 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the Product Setting dialog box I O tab as shown in Figure 2 30 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 25 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 30 Product Settings I O Tab IO Configuration Fixed 10 Points
52. Interval Counters Click this button to reset the interval counters to zero Il PAK VH User Manual 4 5 Chapter Failure Report Run Mode Reference Exit to Change Lot Click this button Figure 4 5 to display the Lot ChangeOver dialog box you will be prompted to enter a password Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Enable Change Lot in Run Mode must be selected Hotkey ALT C FIGURE 4 5 Exit to Change Lot nase la sample ocvfonttools Change Lot Failure Report PETR Operator Exit to Setup Mode Click this button Figure 4 6 to exit Run Mode and enter Setup Mode You will be prompted to enter a correct Programmer or Supervisor password to get into Setup Mode with that access level This is a Programmer or Supervisor level function Hotkey ALT S FIGURE 4 6 Exit to Setup Mode nase la sample ocvfonttools Change Lot Yam ete Operator Zoom Buttons By default these are hidden Click or touch the screen to make them visible as shown in Figure 4 1 on page 4 2 They provide the ability to zoom in out and to autofit the image to the display area Click the X to hide the toolbar it will fade away automatically after 3 seconds 4 6 Il PAK VH User Manual Run Mode Window Camera Results The Camera Results button toggles the display of the Camera Results information box The default is Off FIGURE 4 7 Camera Results Information Box visio
53. Length Specifies the exact number of characters that Visionscape will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters Visionscape ignores any symbol not having the specified length Interleaved 2 of 5 e Check Character Status An error correcting routine in which the check character is added Il PAK VH User Manual 6 9 Chapter Automatic Identification Check Character Output Status When enabled a check character character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security Symbol Length 1 The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Symbol Length 2 The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it Guard Bar Status Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the presence of guard bars also called bearer bars is required for decoding to take place Range Mode Status When Range Mode is disabled Visionscape checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values then it is rejected as invalid When Range Mode is enabled Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths Any symbol length that does not fall into this range is reje
54. Open the Control Panel and run Add Remove Programs 2 Select PAK VH and click Add Remove to remove the component 3 Finally restart the PC Starting the Il PAK VH Program As part of the Il PAK VH start up sequence a splash screen is displayed and reports the start up sequence as shown in Figure A 1 FIGURE A 1 I PAK VH Splash Screen MICROSCAN VISIONSGAPE I PAK VH Once this is complete the last run Job is downloaded and transfers control to Run Mode awaiting a trigger if one is configured Il PAK VH User Manual A 5 gt xe c co o sE BN Appendix Installation and Software Uninterruptible Power Supply Software Microscan suggests the use of an uninterruptable power supply UPS The UPS protects your vision inspection system from power outages and brown outs The UPS ensures that I PAK VH stays running by providing battery backup for a user specified time then properly shutting down the I PAK VH program saving all batch data Job name counters etc and finally performing a PC shutdown before removing power to the PC Important You may lose inspection counts if you do not use a UPS When power is restored the PC restarts and the Il PAK VH program starts up downloading the last run Job restoring all previous counters and awaiting a trigger if configured to continue inspection Microscan stocks the APC Smart UPS SC 420 620 VA 120VAC It is an external UPS
55. PAK VH supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the Il PAK VH software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK VH D 6 Il PAK VH User Manual w Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool e Recreate Step Datums When clicked this button causes the input and output datum lists in the step to be re created You only need to click this button when a datum is added removed or changed in the script If the script is changed but no input or output datums are changed then this button does not need to be clicked Clicking this button also causes all input datums to be set to their default values and to lose their connections to other step results or parameters xe c oO nn 20 rs ef SS Or T a Datums created by the package script are added to the user interface Input datums are shown as a box with a drop down list button The input datums can be linked to other similar type datums in the Job Clicking the drop down list button causes the Job tree to be displayed allowing you to select the datum to link to the input datum Resource datums are shown as user editable boxes that can be set to a value directly Output datums are not shown in the user interface for this step but can be seen in the Job tree that comes up when linking an input datum Note I PAK VH supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the I
56. Path jsaa2 Inspection Snapshot My OCVFont Tool 1 SEP2008 Edit Code Ct fsaa2 Inspection1 Snapshotl My OCVFont Tool 2 famanze2 Edit Code C Status GK gi Cancel 4 10 Il PAK VH User Manual Run Mode Window If Show Full Path is not checked I PAK VH displays the simple tool name as shown in Figure 4 10 FIGURE 4 10 Simple Tool Names Shown Y 3 lt i hee O v e OCVFont Tool Visons OCVFont Tool Visons Use Previous and Next to display all the tools in the Job To change a Code click Edit Code for the specific tool This allows the contents of the match or layout string to be changed This also enables the Change this Tool s Code and the Change all Tool s Code buttons To change one match or layout string at a time you edit the code and click Change this Tool s Code This changes the match or layout string to the contents specified For OCVFont Tools error checking is performed to verify that the same number of characters are in the new string and to verify that all symbols in the new string are in the OCVFont A status message is displayed after trying to change the lot to indicate status If a Job has multiple tools that have identical match or layout strings you are able to change them all at once by editing the code for any one and then clicking Change all Tool s Code Il PAK VH goes through the Job and changes the matc
57. ROI Data Matrix ECC 200 Data Matrix Non ECC 200 Il PAK VH User Manual 6 3 Chapter Automatic Identification QR Code 2005 Aztec Code Code 39 Code 128 BC412 Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar UPC EAN Code 93 Pharmacode GS1 DataBar Postal Symbologies PDF417 MicroPDF417 Composite DotCode Auto Teach Options Selects the functionality used when the new master pin on a smart camera is used in conjunction with a triggered read to teach the step When set to train step the step is trained whereas when set to learn match string the match string is learned from the decode Graphics Level Selects the amount of graphics displayed at the completion of step execution Show None No graphics are drawn Show ROI Only Only the ROI will be drawn Show Graphics Except ROI Data Matrix locating graphics and decoded text will be displayed but not the ROI Show Graphics ROI and Data Matrix locating graphics and any decoded text will be displayed 6 4 Il PAK VH User Manual Symbology Tool Results e Error Code Reports errors encountered when locating or decoding Status The status is true when a symbol is found and decoded and additional enabled tests pass These additional tests include the match string and GS1 format checking Read Status The read status is true when any symbol is found and decoded regardless of additional tests GS1 Status The GS1 Status is true when
58. Range 0 to 9 e Filter Bright Defects When enabled runtime inspection of the symbol includes a pre processing step for filtering out any bright defects in the image Default Disabled Bright Defect Range Percentage that determines the threshold at which the bright defect filter processes The threshold is calculated by taking this percentage of the range between the binarizing threshold and 255 Default 0 binary threshold is used if Filter Bright Defects is enabled Range 0 to 100 e Output Mask Type Used in conjunction with the DynamicMask step This property allows three selections None Adds nothing the mask Mask Template Only the foreground area of the symbol is added to the mask This is the default Il PAK VH User Manual 7 73 Chapter T OCV Reference Mask ROI The entire area within the symbol s ROI is added to the mask The remainder of this chapter discusses the following e Substitute Ignore on page 7 74 e Keyboard Input of Match String on page 7 77 e External Input of Match String on page 7 81 e Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command on page 7 89 e OCV Tips on page 7 104 e Troubleshooting on page 7 107 Substitute Ignore When training either an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool the Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters dialog box Figure 7 50 is displayed at the end of the learn layout The string of layout characters
59. Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout OCY Training Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontT ools Automatic Training for Multiple OC FontlessT ools r External Communications Timeout jo Seconds r Match String Mismatch Action p g MV Keyboard Input of Match String Transmit Final Inspection String Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results dialog box has options External Input of Match String Match String Mismatch Action and Transmit Final Inspection String Since these are System Settings even if you do a change product to another Job that contains an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool these settings will not change External Input of Match String Checkbox By default External Input of Match String is not checked which means that PAK VH expects no match string input for the OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool When External Input of Match String is enabled checked Il PAK VH expects a match string to be input whenever an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool is trained External Input of Match String data is transferred using the communication method selected on the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Communication dialog box The External Input of Match String feature is only active if the communication method is set to either RS 232 or Ethernet 7 82 Il PAK VH User Manual External Input of Match String Match String Mismatch Action Il PAK VH software allows the Mismatch Act
60. Symbols That Touch ROI E Num of Border Spaces to Add EH Symbol Sorting Sensitivity Single OCV Symbol Step Apply Automatic Min Sharpness Apply Automatic Min Contrast Bj Max Contrast Difference E Allowed Thickening of Symbol E Allowed Thinning of Symbol E Individual Symbol Search X E Individual Symbol Search Y Legibility Only J Test For Character Breaks Enable Tryout Debug Info E Tryout Debug Delay E Selected Symbol Group E Group Min Pixels E Group Max Pixels E Group Legibility E Group Allowed Movement in X E Group Allowed Movement in Y WV a S 999 20 m 1 Normal 50 50 zl Group Properties Appear Here Tool Set Close AutoFind TwoPt Locator AutoThreshold ComputePolarity Boj l Bl AB prame z OCVFontless Tool Inputs Hey aroup Allowed Movementin Y EH Group Residue Limit Units E Group Initial Res Limit EH Group Final Res Method E Group Final Res Limit E Group Final Res Max Blob Size E Group Max Flaw Size Group Appear Flaw Break Test E Group Appear Flaw Break Size Group Sharpness Limit Units E Group Min Allowed Sharpness EH Group Contrast Limit Units fq Group Min Allowed Contrast Group Auto Threshold Enabled E Group Auto Threshold Adjust fq Group Manual Threshold E Group Edge Energy Threshold fi Group Character Expansions J Group Filter Bright Defects E Group Bright Defect Range Apply Symbol Group Settings J
61. The I PAK VH interface allows for special training of the Symbology Tool Data Matrix Tool and OCRTrainableFont Tool when they are used with the Match String Enable checkbox as shown in Figure 3 16 Tool Settings Dialog Box on page 3 21 Match String Typically these tools perform a read at inspection time and report these results Some users want to use a pre determined code on their product and verify that the string read is what they expect This concept is known as Match String With Match String enabled these tools still perform a read at inspection time and compare it internally against the given Match String to decide if the inspection passed or failed When the data read is The same as the Match String this inspection is deemed Pass e Not the same as the Match String this inspection is deemed Fail Il PAK VH User Manual 3 25 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference Training Match String Enabled Tools When training a Symbology Tool a Data Matrix Tool or an OCRTrainableFont Tool with the Match String enabled I PAK VH displays a Match String dialog box as shown in Figure 3 18 This dialog box is displayed immediately after you select one of these tools either by clicking on the tool or by clicking Next or Previous The dialog box displays the current match string for that tool When you train the tool the newly learned string replaces this string FIGURE 3 18 Match String Dialog Box Match String
62. This section describes the following menus e File Menu starting on page 3 3 e Access Level Menu starting on page 3 4 e 21 CFR Part 11 Menu starting on page 3 6 e Calibration Menu starting on page 3 6 e Image Menu starting on page 3 7 e Help Menu starting on page 3 8 File Menu FIGURE 3 2 File Menu File Exit To exit l PAK VH you must be at the Programmer s access level If you are not you will be prompted to enter the Programmer s password Il PAK VH User Manual 3 3 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference Access Level Menu FIGURE 3 3 Access Level Menu Calibration Menu Image v Programmer lt Highest Access Level Supervisor Operator lt g ________ Lowest Access Level Change Password Change Change Lot Password Configure Supervisor Access If you are at a lower access level and are trying to go up to a higher access level you will be prompted for a password If you are trying to go to a lower access level you will be allowed to go to that lower access level without entering a password Programmer Displays the prompt for the Programmer s password Successful entry enables Programmer and Supervisor Level Capabilities The default password for Programmer access level is 0101 This data is saved in the PC s registry Supervisor Displays the prompt for the Supervisor s password Successful entry en
63. Try Al Enter to Main Setup Snapshot1 OC Font Tool Wait Step EXPIRATION DATE Main Menu SEP 2008 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 13 Chapter OCV Reference Remove Symbol Dialog FIGURE 7 12 Remove Symbol Dialog Box Remove Symbol 4 6 9 E J K L P U x The Remove Symbol dialog box deletes symbols from the Custom Properties selected font By selecting a symbol name from the list and clicking Remove Symbol you are able to remove the selected symbol from the font Click Done to return to the Custom Properties Main dialog box Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Dialog FIGURE 7 13 Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Dialog Box Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Available Fonts Symbols DefaultFont 00b wo 7 a eects Scale Scaled Font Help gt gt Done Il PAK VH User Manual Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts as Buttons e Done Returns you to the Custom Properties Main dialog box when you have finished with AutoFont and Scaling e Help Displays or removes help information from the Automatic Font Selection and Scaling dialog box as shown in Figure 7 14 o O D im D x gt O 0 FIGURE 7 14 Help Displayed Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Available Fonts Symbols ow rca Save AutoFont Scale Scaled Font Done Place the currently displayed OCVFon
64. Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool N FIGURE 2 45 Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters ff i e e a I gt lt a M ICROS G A Current Product Access Level Date Time Test2 Programmer 11 19 2008 06 42 AM SEP2008 a Approve Inspect Characters Inspect Chars H Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCYRuntimeTool Wait Step Current Tool OCVRuntimeTool Font Selected NewFont Il PAK VH User Manual 2 37 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials This allows characters to be substituted into the layout or ignored entirely 5 Click Substitute to display the Layout and Font boxes shown in Figure 2 46 FIGURE 2 46 Setup Mode Layout and Font Boxes Statistics and Data Advanced Settings The list of symbol names displayed in the Layout box contains the names of all symbols in the layout in the order in which they appear The Font box contains the name of all symbols in the selected OCVFont The first item in the list is IGN which is used to ignore characters 6 To substitute one symbol for another select the character in the Layout box that you want to substitute for Select the symbol from the Font box that you want to use to replace the layout symbol Click Substitute The Layout box and Inspect Chars are updated 2 38 Il PAK VH User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool N 7 To ignore one of the symbols in the layout exclude it from being inspected at runtime sele
65. Use Input Mask p3 Enable Mask Output E Mask Number of Dilations EH Graphics Level w E Percentage zal 100 000 Total Residue Area 15 000 10 1 Vv 3 Gray Level 0 Gray Level 0 K 0 135 SmE zclick to execute gt SEE Show ROI Only E Close 7 56 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFontless Tool as e Use AutoFind Enables and disables the locator Switching between enabled and disabled requires retraining the OCV Tool so that the appropriate templates can be set up Default Enabled rt 3 D i X gt O eo e AutoFind Pin 1 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 1 When set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 1 meaning use the first symbol Range 1 to n where n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols e AutoFind Pin 2 Index Allows selection of the symbol position that trains the templates for AutoFind Pin 2 when the AutoFind is set up as a 2PinFind When set to a value less than or equal to 1 the first symbol position is used When set to a value greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols the last symbol position is used Default 999 meaning use the last symbol Range 1 to n where
66. WXYZWXYZ 01 Inspection1 Snapshotl OCVFont Tool Show Full Path ad peia nET Esnea S no aSa O aama aenea Cancel FIGURE 7 82 ChangeLayout Error Details Change Layout 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCV Font Tool WXYZWXYZ 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 0CYFont Tool Show Full Path a peia ETEen S o Seat O anaana Cancel You MUST take action by clicking the Cancel button before I PAK VH will resume In this bad data sent state Il PAK VH is declared off line The error message is displayed along with the exact data input and the tools 7 100 Il PAK VH User Manual as Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command Note The Cancel button makes you return to Run Mode but still in an Off Line state as inspections are NOT restarted because the data was invalid You may return to Setup Mode to retrain or try to send another good Ethernet ChangeLayout data to Il PAK VH a a D im g X gt oO e The Ethernet response back is immediate FAIL Ethernet ChangeLayout Success Response When the Lot ChangeOver is successful the Ethernet message OK is sent out and a message box is displayed For example on good Ethernet ChangeLayout data Il PAK VH will display the ChangeLayout dialog box for 5 seconds I PAK VH will make the mouse into an hourglass wait then control goes back to PAK VH The Ethernet response back is immediate OK FIGURE 7 83 Ch
67. When set to Show Details residue graphics are displayed green pixels are those that were not there at train time but are in the image at runtime fills while yellow pixels are those that were there at train time but are not there at runtime voids The LayoutStep for the OCVRuntimeTool selects a Master OCVFont and set up the learn layout process FIGURE 7 36 LayoutStep Properties Page Tool Settings OCVRuntimeT ool AutoFind OnePt Locator al AutoThreshold ComputePolarity zg Default Datum Order v LayoutStep Inputs E Selected Font NewFont E Allowed Overlap During Read 5 fy Min Read Match 65 000 VW Automatic Threshold Adjustment K e Selected Font Allows selection of an OCVFont to use for training and inspections This property is a drop down list containing the names of all OCVFonts that are in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder Allowed Overlap During Read Used during the learn layout process The value of this property specifies the amount of symbol candidate ROI overlap that is allowed When symbol candidates overlap more than the allowed value tests are performed to determine the best candidate at the overlap position The other candidate will not become part of the layout This overlap measurement is in pixels Default 5 pixels Range 0 to 15 pixels e Min Read Match Is a correlation percentage used as a minimum requirement for a symbol to be considered a candidate du
68. X Configure RS232 Ethernet TCP IP Selection This section allows you to define the Input and Output Channel to communicate to a host for download of match string and OCVFont Tool string e Input Channel Choose from None default RS 232 or Ethernet e Output Channel Choose from None default RS 232 or Ethernet Configure This section allows you to configure the Input and Output Channel and contains the following buttons e RS 232 on page 3 64 Il PAK VH User Manual 3 63 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference RS 232 After you click on this button the Configure Communication dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 45 You can use the defaults or customize your Communications ports FIGURE 3 45 Configure Communication Dialog Box RS 232 Settings Configure Communication 5 x RAS232 Settings Comm Port 1 Comm Port 2 Baud Rate 9600 Me Parity None z Comm Port 2 not available Data Bits fe gt Stop Bits hoo H Timeout Seconds ists Field Delimiter Char x I Display Changeover Strings Protocol PAK Selectable Main Port ixg Main Comm Port 1 C 2 Cancel Il PAK VH supports two RS 232 ports They must be configured as COM1 and COM2 If a COM Port is already used by another program it is displayed inside the frame of the port COM Por
69. a test datum that is useful in evaluating match strings Il PAK VH will update this datum result when the Match Test String datum is modified This result is the match result using the current String Matching Method and comparing the Match Test String against the Match String Il PAK VH User Manual 6 47 Chapter Automatic Identification 6 48 Il PAK VH User Manual o 5 D i X gt O CHAPTER 7 OCV Reference This chapter provides Optical Character Verification tool details Il PAK VH User Manual 7 1 Chapter Overview T OCV Reference Il PAK VH has three options for Optical Character Verification OCV each of which has an appropriate use e OCVFont Tool on page 7 36 e OCVRuntimeTool on page 7 45 e OCVFontless Tool on page 7 54 This chapter outlines each of these tools along with their supporting steps OCV Inspection The OCV Tools and their supporting steps inspect codes such as component ID and Date Lot The print may be either pre print or On line Individual printed features are referred to as symbols The OCV inspection methods inspect the quality of the individual printed symbols Quality checks include e Contrast Contrast refers to the difference between symbol and background A contrast value is calculated for the symbol and compared to a user selectable contrast minimum The symbol fails if the calculated value is
70. back to the PC Therefore you may not see every image that the smart camera processes Setting a small number here will result in a sluggish update of the smart camera s images Setting a higher number will result in a more lively update of runtime images Microscan can only suggest settings for this field You need to run your production line at line speeds and judge the best setting for yourself Note You can reliably trust the smart camera s processing if the smart camera reports a Pass signal through the IO then the part is good Likewise a Fail IO signal should cause the part to be rejected You may not see all these failed images if you are running at high production rates parts per minute and depending on the Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second setting Note When using a Job that is inspecting frozen images or images from disk set this to Maximum for the best runtime user interface response Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings Training This section allows you to set the automated saving of the product definition every time the Job is retrained N 5 Z D So X e AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training Enabling this setting automatically saves the product definition after each retraining of the Job This prevents changes from being lost i fe Q 3 Default Selected e Reset Statistics after
71. behavior of the Segment Agent and the FeatExtract Agent as well as the font parameter settings are available on the tool s property page From I PAK VH when an OCRTrainableFont Tool is present in a Job a custom interface can edit fonts for more information see OCR Font Training on page 6 19 The Show Custom Properties button brings up a user interface that can create a new font or incrementally train an existing font The settings on the property page can modify the way in which the OCRTrainableFont Tool functions e If ROI Contains is set to Two or More Characters see the properties shown in Figure 6 1 e If ROI Contains is set to Single Character see the properties shown in Figure 6 2 Il PAK VH User Manual 6 13 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 6 1 OCRTrainableFont Tool Properties Page Tool Settings OCATrainableF ont Tool amp F g PAG Default Datum Order OCRTrainableFont Tool Inputs a InputB uffer Snapshot1 SnapOutputBuffer T Match String Enable C g Match String N A ROI Contains Two or More Characters E Polarity Dark Characters T Adaptive Thresholding fy Threshold g Threshold Bias g Edge Energy Threshold i Discard Boundary Characters kk Allow Overlapped Characters i Allow Segmented Characters iE Min Character Area pixels T Limit Character Width T Limit Character Height Selected Font s fy Set Unknown Characters to T Pass On No Data it Check Character Conf
72. clockwise if shape is rotatable Shift Up Arrow Increases the height of the shape by one pixel Shift Down Arrow Decreases the height of the shape by one pixel Shift Right Arrow Increases the width of the shape by one pixel Shift Left Arrow Decreases the width of the shape by one pixel Control Up Arrow Moves shape up by one tenth of a pixel Control Down Arrow Moves shape down by one tenth of a pixel Control Right Arrow Moves shape to the right by one tenth of a pixel Control Left Arrow Moves shape to the left by one tenth of a pixel Control F Flips shape by 180 if shape is rotatable Control L Rotates shape one tenth of a degree to the left counter clockwise if shape is rotatable Control R Rotates shape one tenth of a degree to the right clockwise if shape is rotatable Control 0 Rotates shape to exactly 0 Il PAK VH User Manual An Il PAK VH Product Scan An I PAK VH Product eh In the Il PAK VH user interface a combination of tools and steps written to accomplish a particular inspection on a given product is referred to as a Product or Job These product definitions are stored on the PC s hard drive ina subdirectory where you installed I PAK VH software called Jobs For example if you install the Il PAK VH software in C Microscan Vscape then when you first run I PAK VH it automatic
73. from the running device and then assert this output to signal your external controller of this error condition Trigger Overrun Occurs when trigger signals are received faster than the smart camera is physically capable of acquiring images Process Overrun Visionscape Devices are capable of acquiring images in the background while an image from a previous trigger signal is still being processed Visionscape will simply acquire the image and store it into a buffer and the inspection will get it to it when it has time However if the trigger rate is too fast you will eventually run out of buffers and you will have nowhere to stash new images This is called a process overrun e Inspection Passed is an output to indicate a good part This Output will be turned ON if the inspection passed all of the criteria set by you it will be turned OFF if your inspection failed 3 60 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings Note When you return to Setup Mode from Run Mode all Inspection Passed outputs are set FALSE e Run Mode This output will turn ON when you switch Il PAK VH to Run Mode and it will turn OFF when you return to Setup Mode This can be checked by an external controller to verify that PAK VH is ready to run So o9 c o a 52 w Q vy 79 HeartBeat By default this output is disabled When enabled at system start up time the HeartBeat output begins its operation by bei
74. from the external device Note Strings must be null terminated A timeout error occurs if no response is received within the time specified in the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results gt External Communications Timeout 7 84 Il PAK VH User Manual as External Input of Match String FIGURE 7 62 External Communications Error Message Timeout External Input of Match String amp Timeout No Match String o O D i 2 D x gt O 0 If a timeout error occurs I PAK VH displays an error message and only the Disapprove button is displayed forcing you to retrain the layout FIGURE 7 63 Training Menu With Only Disapprove Button Partl1 Disabled 27 11 2007 14 54 Current Tool OCVRuntimeTool Font Selected NewFont When a response is received I PAK VH displays the input string FIGURE 7 64 Display of Input String Input Sting ABCDEFG The string is then examined to determine which symbol names are in it If any of the input symbol names are not found in the OCVFont Il PAK VH displays an error message as shown in Figure 7 65 and forces you to retrain by displaying only the Disapprove button FIGURE 7 65 Input of Match String Error Message Symbol Not in Font External Input of Match String x Input Symbol Name Badsymbolname Not Found In OC Font Il PAK VH User Manual 7 85 Chapter T OCV Reference e Ifall symbo
75. functionality Important It is critical that you use an uninterruptible power supply UPS with your I PAK VH to ensure that inspection counts are retained Inspection counts are written to the system registry on the way out of Run Mode In the event of power loss a UPS ensures that your counts are written to the registry and that Il PAK VH and Windows shut down properly Il PAK VH User Manual 4 1 Chapter Overview Run Mode Reference By default when I PAK VH starts up the Run Mode window is displayed as shown in Figure 4 1 This is the main user interface for the Il PAK VH Operator and allows viewing of images inspection counts and results for the currently running product Note You must let Il PAK VH fully download your Job and assert the Run Mode output before giving it triggers The first time I PAK VH starts up you will be prompted to select a smart camera and a sample job will be created and downloaded to that smart camera as described in Running I PAK VH for the First Time on page 1 12 Every time I PAK VH is subsequently launched it will load and download the Job that was running the last time I PAK VH was shut down All important PAK VH data is saved in the Windows registry This data includes the last downloaded Job last statistics and others as needed Run Mode Window Pass Fail Status Border Show Hide Go to Setup Mode Camera x Figure 4 1 shows the I PAK VH Run Mode window
76. group from 307200 to a lower value The Group properties Group on the OCVFontless Tool property page can be set on a group basis Refer to OCVSymbolStep on page 7 66 for more information 9 O D i X gt O Apply Symbol Group Settings Sets the group parameters for the currently selected group to the current values in the group properties e Use Input Mask This property is applicable only when the OCVFontless Tool has a child step that produces a mask buffer as an output When such a child step is inserted into the OCVFontless Tool Use Input Mask is automatically enabled When enabled the OCVFontless Tool must be trained After it is trained the mask pixels are highlighted in red When disabled this property will allow the OCVFontless Tool to retain the child mask generating step but does not apply the mask at runtime Default Disabled e Enable Mask Output Enables and disables the creation and output of a mask at runtime This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Default Disabled e Mask Number of Dilations Sets the number of expansions that are performed on the output mask This property is used in conjunction with the DynamMask Tool to allow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Default Disabled e Graphics Level
77. image data The OCVRuntimeTool expects to find the symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the data from the Runtime Font to verify the quality and correctness of the characters being inspected Because the train image creates templates this code should be of good quality Training Training of the OCVRuntimeTool involves placing and sizing the OCVRuntimeToo l box around the area containing the symbols to be inspected When Train is clicked the ROI is scanned for symbol candidates Symbol candidates are determined by searching for each symbol that is in the selected Master OCVFont chosen through the LayoutStep When all candidates have been found a new OCVFont is created and a new symbol is trained and added to this Runtime Font for each candidate position Il PAK VH User Manual 7 45 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Then the OCVRuntimeTool box is reset based on the bounding rectangle of all symbols found and the values of the search extra properties The AutoFind is trained automatically whenever the OCVRuntimeTool is trained When the AutoFind Search Area Box is moved and or sized it is automatically retrained without requiring retraining of the OCVRuntimeTool Inspection If AutoFind is enabled the pins are located and the OCVRuntimeTool box is repositioned based on the pin locations Each of the symbols found during training is expected to be at the same location within the OCVRuntimeTool box at runtime For
78. images and their results from the smart camera to PAK VH Showing all camera views of product being inspected Displaying Runtime Graphics of vision tools Zooming in and out on inspection images being displayed Updating the video display to show the last inspection failure with its graphics Viewing of the Failure Report of ongoing inspection noting all the failure types and their frequency for this inspection run End of Batch Statistical and Failure information about the inspection On Screen reviewing of Runtime Statistics and Failures Transmitting of Runtime Statistics via RS 232 or TCP IP to another device Ability to save Runtime Statistics to a file Resetting of Statistical Information End of Batch Product Data On Screen reviewing of Product Data Transmitting of Product Data via RS 232 or TCP IP to another device Ability to save the Product definition and Runtime Statistics to a file 1 6 Il PAK VH User Manual Touch Input Software e Customizing of System Settings Ability to set camera triggering method etc Ability to define automated functions after Product ChangeOver e Support of 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance 2 pe S 3 Q I gt lt A Login User Name Access with Password Expiration Feature Configuration File Audit Trail Login option available when retraining a Data Matrix or Symbology Tool in Match Mode and Training a Font Too
79. input image and the corresponding output image for a Cylinder Unwrap Warp The cylinder axis input is set to the output of a BisectLines Meas step which is the line which bisects the left and right edges of the cylinder FIGURE D 4 Input Image to Cylinder Unwrap Operation Example Em File Setup Bun Window Lest po e A l a Loox iea Reval Ah Wa i otimme e Inspection Snapshot Edge Tool RobustLine Fit Edge Tool RobustLine Fit BisectLines Meas CustomVision Tool ImageView Step Il PAK VH User Manual w Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool FIGURE D 5 Output Image to Cylinder Unwrap Operation Example ge c nW 20 rs Z SS Or T a Description CylinderUnwrap Warp allows editing through the CylinderUnwrap Warp properties page as shown in Figure D 6 FIGURE D 6 Cylinder Unwrap Warp Properties Page CustomiVision Tool a Gla Bl Fale Default Datum Order 7 CustomVision Tool Inputs Outputs a InputB uffer Snapshot SnapOutputBuffer LINE CylinderAxis lt Unassigned Es Avail Package Scripts Cylinder_Unwarp Re Parse Package Script lt click to execute gt Recreate Step Datums click to executer g Cylinder Radius 100 000 g DistanceFromCamera 100 000 Ve UseCalibration C yg Status True A CylUnwrapped Image N A Settings e Cylinder Axis An input line datum that is selectable This input line is usually
80. is displayed at the top This dialog box allows characters to be substituted into the layout or ignored entirely from the layout Click Disapprove to return to the Setup Mode Train dialog box and retrain the current tool Click Approve to accept the Inspect Chars and return to the Setup Mode Train screen to train any remaining tools Click Substitute to initiate the Substitute Ignore window and modify the layout string 7 74 Il PAK VH User Manual as Substitute Ignore FIGURE 7 50 Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters Dialog Box o O D i 2 D x gt O fe M ICROS Cc AN Current Product Access Level Date Time Test2 Programmer 11 19 2008 06 42 AM SEP2008 a Approve Inspect Characters Inspect Chars H Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCYRuntimeTool A EXPIRATION DATE jee eima SEP 299S The list of symbol names that is displayed on the left hand side of the Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters dialog box contains the names of all symbols in the layout in the order in which they appear as shown in Figure 7 51 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 75 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 7 51 Setup Mode Approve Inspect Characters Dialog Box Change Product Tian and Tryout Statistics and Data Advanced Settinas SEP2008 Approve Inspect Characters Inspection Snapshot Wait Step The Up and Down buttons scroll through the list to select a symbol name Clicking on a s
81. joejoe with Security Level of Supervisor 10 30 2015 11 16 AM Successful Add New User for nosign with Security Level of Supervisor 10 30 2015 12 42 PM Successful Add New User for 1 with Security Level of Operator 11 04 2015 01 23 35 PM Unsuccessful Add New User for program User Already Exists in DataBase 1104 2015 01 23 47 PM Unsuccessful Add New User for test Password Already In Use 11 04 2015 01 23 56 PM Unsuccessful Add New User for test Passwords Must be at least 6 Characters 1104 2015 01 23 59 PM Successful Add New User for test with Security Level of Operator 11 05 2015 03 40 47 PM Successful Add New User for JaneDoe with Security Level of Operator 11 13 2015 09 04 58Successful Remove User for JaneDoe 11 13 2015 09 05 05Successful Remove User for 1 11 13 2015 09 05 12Successful Remove User for test 11 13 2015 09 07 04Successful Add New User for JaneDoe with Security Level of Operator 11 13 2015 09 17 34Successful Remove User for JoeProg 11 13 2015 09 17 41 Successful Remove User for programmer e Display Audit Trail The I PAK Administrator can review an ASCII translation of the Audit Trail He or she cannot do much with this data it is for reference only If the Il PAK Administrator wanted to archive this data or print this data he or she should see System Settings General Tab starting on page 6 91 FIGURE 5 16 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Display Audit Trail 01 3
82. less than the minimum e Sharpness Sharpness is an indication of symbol border definition or symbol crispness A sharpness value is calculated for the symbol and compared to a user selectable sharpness minimum The symbol fails if the calculated value is less than the minimum Break The current symbol data is compared to the trained symbol data If a break appears in the current data that was not in the trained data the symbol fails e initial Residue Initial residue of the symbol is basically a count of those pixels that differ between the trained template and the current image A binary residue template is created that contains On pixels only where a difference occurs between the current image data and the trained symbol template The sum of the On pixels in this residue template is the initial residue value If this value is greater than the user selectable maximum the symbol fails Refer to Figure 7 1 Note Typically this test is not used in pharmaceutical applications Il PAK VH User Manual OCV Inspection as FIGURE 7 1 Initial Residue Examples A A Template Symbol Initial Residue rt O D i X gt O eo e Final Residue Total Count After performing a set of morphological operations on the residue image the final residue is calculated again as the number of On pixels in the residue image If this value is greater than the user selectable maximum the symbol fai
83. lf gt P2 lt lf gt R2 lt lf gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters3 lt lf gt I3 lt lf gt P3 lt If gt R3 lt lf gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters4 lt lf gt 14 lt lf gt P4 lt lf gt R4 lt If gt lt cr gt If there are no Inspected Characters in that inspection the Inspected Character line of data will not be present Preview Config File This is a Supervisor level function Preview Config File displays the contents of the current Product s Data File Statistics as shown in Figure 3 22 Il PAK VH User Manual 3 39 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 22 Preview Config File Microscan Visionscape I PAK Current Date Time 11 19 2008 07 52 04 Name of I PAK System default Data File for Product Testl gt Vision Device 00T1 lt gt gt OOTL Settings lt lt Digitizer Selected CAM I O 3200 Digitizer Mode Single Board Normal Camera Definitions And Buffer Counts Cameral 648x494 3200 fiz CameraZ 648x494 3200 fiz Camera3 648x494 3200 12 Camerad 648x494 3200 siz Number of Image Buffers 16 Vga Resolution 640 x 480 x 60 Hz Targeting Laser Off GPIO Input Mask GPIO Point 1 Overall Inspection Dwell Percent 0 203 3 Hardware Acceleration True Support File Root Directory C Vscape Jobs gt gt gt Inspectionl Settings lt lt lt Dwell Time ms 5 Use Default Pass Criteria True Criteria for
84. m MICRO sS c AN Current Product Access Level Date Time IT Testl Programmer 11 17 2017 02 40 PM gt n Zoom l 5 Eaa Mem e zog X Inspection1 ai 7 if Snapshot1 eset eset ee ek Se i gt OCvFontless Tool i 1 A Wait St asen i EXPIRATION DATE ISN i Pose oe SSS Se See 5 SeS Sy Dai Sees SEP 2020 6MA0282 22 Click Live to start a continuous live video loop Use this to adjust your f stop and focus your smart camera 23 Click Live again to stop live video 24 Obtain an image that contains some text and or numerical data We will use the OCVFontless Tool and your text Your Setup Mode window should be similar to the one in Figure 2 18 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 15 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 18 Setup Mode OCVFontless Tool Image Masking Tool Help C t Product H MICROSCAN fan oee p T7017 0240 PM Statistics and Data Advanced Settings Exit AutoStep Mode X Inspection1 SI Snapshot1 gt OC Fontless Tool Wait Step pee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee EE ame i EXPIRATION DATE i ON i E S Soe e os SEP 2020 6MA0282 25 The Train button shows red and the OCVFontless Tool is displayed Drag the tool and place it around the appropriate text as shown in Figure 2 19 Drag the AutoFind Tool and place it around the appropriate text as shown in Figure 2 19 Il PAK VH User Manual N Tutorial 1
85. match string to the new match string click OK To leave the current match string unchanged click Cancel OnScreen Keyboard To enter data using the OnScreen Keyboard click OnScreen Keyboard For touch screen users this is useful so that you don t have to open up and use the I PAK VH keyboard Input Channel e RS 232 To enter the new Match String via RS 232 you need to define the Input Channel on the System Settings menu to be RS 232 and define its RS 232 protocol For details on how to choose an RS 232 communications port and how to set your Il PAK VH system s physical communications port refer to RS 232 on page 3 64 e Once the Match String dialog box is displayed Il PAK VH sends out a message on the RS 232 stating it is ready to receive data Waiting for RS 232 Input of Match String for Tool Device Inspection Number Snapshot Toolhame lt lf gt lt cr gt is the message sent out Then Il PAK VH begins waiting for the input of the match string Il PAK VH User Manual 3 27 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference When Il PAK VH does not receive the match string within the specified timeout period then this transaction times out l PAK VH closes the RS 232 port When I PAK VH does receive the match string the string is displayed in the Match String dialog box Click OK to accept this new string or Cancel to revert to the old string Note The RS 232 input of match string must be ter
86. n is greater than or equal to the number of trained symbols e Min Symbol Size in pixels Adjusts the minimum size that a blob must be in order to be considered a symbol Default 20 pixels Range 5 to 256 pixels e Find Symbols That Touch ROI When enabled symbols are trained for blobs that are not fully within the ROI When disabled blobs that are not fully within the ROI are ignored Default Disabled Il PAK VH User Manual 7 57 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Num of Border Spaces to Add Determines how many pixels to allow between actual character pixels and the edge of the box that defines the OCVSymbolStep Default 1 pixels Range 0 to 19 pixels Symbol Sorting Sensitivity Adjusts the sensitivity of the sorting of symbols into rows during training The sorting is based on the positions of the symbols Highest The allowed separation is decreased to 10 of the average height High The allowed separation is decreased to 25 of the average height Normal Default Any two symbols whose top Y positions are separated by more than 50 of the average height of all trained symbols will be considered to be on separate rows Low The allowed separation is increased to 75 of the average height Lowest The allowed separation is increased to 90 of the average height Single OCV Symbol Step When enabled the OCVFontless Tool trains a single OCVSymbolStep that inc
87. not to forget his or her password as it is very difficult to recover the Il PAK Administrator password You will need to contact Microscan to recover a forgotten Il PAK Administrator password The I PAK Administrator should create a user account with the Programmer security level right away so that the Vision System Settings can be adjusted when necessary When an I PAK Administrator creates a user account a listing of user names encrypted user passwords and access levels will be created When entering Setup Mode from Run Mode you will have to enter a user name and user password via the I PAK VH keyboard or a Login dialog box Based on the user name and password entered the appropriate access level will be granted during Setup Mode At all times the current access level is clearly displayed Figure 5 3 An active user reverts back to Operator mode after the user defined no activity limit is reached 5 4 Il PAK VH User Manual The I PAK Administrator 5 FIGURE 5 3 Access Level in Setup Mode and Run Mode Setup MERET TEETE Mode Fie Access Level Calibration Menu Image Help M CRO S C A pol Product E a X IL oO N Run Mode Yisionscape I PAK YH Current Product Setup Change Lot MeeR Operator Any time there is a login violation an entry is made to a secuity log and the Audit Trail files When you create a new user Supervisor or Programmer you must specify
88. rans HEEEWEEE EES EE Timeout fi minute Number of Trained Characters 4 4 4 A A 0 1 5 10 Included Not In Font Automatic Identification Included When the mouse pointer rests over a character a tool tip pops up indicating the number of trained samples for the character In Figure 6 14 the tool tip shows that six samples have been trained for the character A 19 Defocus the lens slightly and repeat steps 11 18 A font should be trained using samples that vary in quality When fewer samples than desired are available the set of samples can be re used several times during training To re use the character set after the first round of training defocus the lens slightly to render the characters a bit fuzzy If the lens is not easily accessible use image processing to change the appearance of the characters This method simulates the variability expected in large sample sets of characters Il PAK VH User Manual 6 27 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 6 15 Defocusing an Image Z Sharp Focus Original Image Defocused Simulate using MeanLP filter Thicker Characters Simulate using GrayMorph Dilate Dark 1 Thinner Characters Simulate using GrayMorph Erode Dark 1 Another alternative to image processing is adjusting the Edge Energy datum for the OCRTF step Changing this parameter is similar to changing focus to produce sharper or
89. requires data input This is available only when I PAK VH is running on a Touch panel PC Il PAK VH User Manual 3 93 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference Il PAK VH Windows Settings This section allows you to configure Il PAK VH to run with other programs on the PC e Enable I PAK_VH to be Minimized Allows the I PAK VH user interface to be minimized while running Inspections still occur and results are transferred back to the I PAK VH interface Default Disabled Note When you change these settings you must restart the Il PAK VH interface since this is a Windows call that goes into effect at start up of the interface e Enable Desktop Allows you to show or hide the PC Desktop When disabled Il PAK VH will trap user keys like Ctrl Esc and the PC s Start button to prevent the Start menu from appearing Alt Tab to prevent the user from leaving the I PAK VH interface and Alt Esc from displaying the TaskBar Il PAK VH does not trap or disallow the Ctrl Alt Del sequence as Microsoft recommends against such action as it would interfere with the PC s security Default Enabled Config File Format This section allows you to configure the file format e US Letter Format By default the file format is set to US Letter about 66 lines page A4 Format Sets the file format to A4 Format about 72 lines page Il PAK VH System Name You can name the I PAK VH system which is a useful feature when yo
90. samples of varying quality The samples should be representative of the character print mark quality expected during production runs of the printed characters e Train frequently A font may be trained at any time e Ifthe value of the RMS error increases significantly after a new training cycle consider deleting recently added samples e Changes should be made to the trained font whenever the smart camera position is moved If the change in camera position or lens focus is minor it may be necessary to add no more than a few characters samples Note that certain characters are more prone to be confused for other characters Examples include B 8 G 6 and numeral 0 letter O During testing confirm that these characters are distinguished from one another accurately Il PAK VH User Manual 6 33 oe we a8 ce F lt 5 Chapter Automatic Identification If the camera lens is inaccessible for defocusing use software methods to simulate variations in character quality Note that each OCRTF step can use multiple trained fonts If training takes longer than a minute try dividing a font into two or more smaller fonts Click Select Font to display the Font Manager dialog box then click Duplicate to create a copy of the font Remove characters from the font copy to reduce the size of the character set A font with characters A Z can be split into fonts with A M and N Z Make sure all required fonts a
91. save the OCVFont 14 Close the Custom Properties dialog box Now you are ready to continue with the Setup Mode Train and Tryout wizard window OCVRuntimeTool Training 1 Inthe left pane select the OCVRuntimeTool Now that the OCVFont has been trained it needs to be selected for use by the OCVRuntimeTool 2 Click Tool Settings Click the Layout Step tab Select the font named NewFont from the Selected Font list and click Close 3 Position the OCVRuntimeTool over the characters to be inspected making the ROI slightly larger than the inspected characters as shown in Figure 2 44 FIGURE 2 44 Positioning the OCVRuntimeTool i cee Next Tool 7 Zoom In AutoStep Previous Next Camera Settings Options Acquire Live ae Inspection1 Snapshot1 m OCVRuntimeTool Wat Step EXPIRATION DA se ik alk anglaise 4 To start the training process click Train As symbols in the OCVFont are found in the image boxes are placed over those positions When all candidate layout positions are found any conflicts two or more symbols found in the same position are resolved using runtime ID checking information Each position of the final layout is then trained as a symbol in a new font the Runtime font The Approve Inspect Characters window is displayed at the end of the Train learn layout with the string of Inspect Chars as shown in Figure 2 45 Il PAK VH User Manual
92. script files renders them unsupported and non validated by Il PAK VH e Recreate Step Datums When clicked this button causes the input and output datum lists in the step to be re created You only need to click this button when a datum is added removed or changed in the script If the script is changed but no input or output datums are changed then this button does not need to be clicked Clicking this button also causes all input datums to be set to their default values and to lose their connections to other step results or parameters Datums created by the package script are added to the user interface Input datums are shown as a box with a drop down list button The input datums can be linked to other similar type datums in the Job Clicking the drop down list button causes the Job tree to be displayed allowing you to select the datum to link to the input datum Resource datums are shown as user editable boxes that can be set to a value directly Output datums are not shown in the user interface for this step but can be seen in the Job tree that comes up when linking an input datum Note I PAK VH supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the Il PAK VH software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK VH Il PAK VH User Manual D 3 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques FailCode The FailCode script allows you to encode the
93. starts up and loads the last Product AVP file being used from the previous run of I PAK VH Each VisionSystemStep in the Job is queried for its SystemLastSavedAs value This tells the software which Visionscape Devices were being used by the Job the last time it was saved to disk c 2 _ iS 3 Q I gt p Then I PAK VH attempts to discover each of the devices named in the Job Smart cameras broadcast messages on the network every five seconds to announce their presence The underlying Visionscape architecture receives these messages and discovers what devices are available on the network A list is maintained of all the devices that have been discovered and I PAK VH checks this list to see if each device in the Job is present e Ifthe device is present Il PAK VH moves to the next stage of the start up process e Ifthe device is not present a message in the Splash screen tells you that PAK VH is waiting for the device to be discovered Typically smart cameras may not be discovered for up to 5 seconds Once discovered Il PAK VH moves to the next stage of the start up process Note If after 10 seconds the device has not been discovered you will see a dialog box that offers you three choices Select a different Device Clicking this button allows you to connect the VisionSystem Step to a different device A dialog box is displayed listing the available devices Load a Different Pr
94. step to be set up to always return Light_On_Dark always return Dark_On_Light or return an automatically determined polarity Default Automatic DefaultSymb Tab The DefaultSymb tab of the OCVFont sets default parameters that any FontSymbol trained and added to the OCVFont receives FontSymbol A FontSymbol is a collection of template images settings and tolerances that inspect a character or logo at runtime FontSymbols are created during the training of an OCVFont They are used by the OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool steps to learn the layout at train time and inspect the layout at runtime FontSymbols are trained when they are added to an OC VFont Il PAK VH User Manual 7 27 Chapter T OCV Reference FIGURE 7 25 FontSymbol Properties Page 0 pla eS a ale Num of ON Pixels in Template 147 Polarity Dark on Light 7 Legibility 25 0 Allowed Movement in Xx 50 Allowed Movement in Y 50 Residue Limit Units Percentage x Initial Residue Limit 100 0 Final Residue Method Total ResidueArea Final Residue Limit 15 0 Final Residue Max Blob Size 10 Maximum Flaw Size 1 IV Appearance Flaw Break Test Min Appear Flaw Break Size 2 Sharpness Limit Units arylevel sti Minimum Allowed Sharpness Doo R Contrast Limit Units rayev tsi Y Minimum Allowed Contrast DoS I Auto Threshold Enabled Auto Threshold Adjustment 0 Man
95. tab displays the current settings for that OCVFont s LayoutStep FIGURE 7 22 LayoutStep Properties Page OCVFont LayoutStep AutoT hreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Min Symbol Size lt in pixels gt 10 e Automatic Segmentation When enabled the training of the OCVFont causes the image to be segmented using blob analysis A dialog box is displayed asking for a unique name to give the FontSymbol before training the FontSymbol for each position found Default Disabled e Min Symbol Size lt in pixels gt Adjusts the minimum size that a blob must be in order to be considered a symbol Default 10 pixels Range 5 to 256 pixels e Num Border Spaces to Add Determines how many pixels to allow between actual character pixels and the edge of the box that defines the FontSymbol Default 1 pixel Range 0 to 19 pixels AutoThreshold Tab The AutoThreshold tab of the OCVFont is part of the LayoutStep that is used for automatic segmentation of the image when enabled as shown in Figure 7 23 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 25 as rt 3 D i X gt O Chapter T OCV Reference FIGURE 7 23 AutoThreshold Properties Page OCVFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Edge Eney Theo Threshold 135 e Auto Thresholding Enabled Enables and disables automatic thresholding When enabled a threshold is c
96. the symbol data To calculate the contrast value the average gray level value of the background pixels is subtracted from the average gray level of the foreground pixels Whenever this property has a value of 0 no contrast checks are performed 9 5 D i X gt O eo Default 0 Range 0 to 256 Gray Level or 0 to 100 Percentage e Auto Threshold Enabled Enables or disables the automatic calculation of a threshold for binarizing the image at both train and run time When enabled the calculated threshold is displayed in the Manual Threshold property When disabled no calculation is done The threshold used for binarizing is whatever value is in the Manual Threshold property The Edge Energy Threshold and Threshold Adjustment properties are not used when disabled Default Enabled e Auto Threshold Adjustment Offsets or biases the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto Threshold Enabled is enabled Default 0 Range 64 to 64 e Manual Threshold Displays the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto Threshold Enabled is enabled When Auto Threshold Enabled is disabled the value of this property is the threshold that is used for binarizing the image Default 135 Range 0 to 255 e Edge Energy Threshold Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This is only used when Auto Threshold Enabled is enabled Default 20 Ran
97. the bisecting line of the right and left edges of the cylinder The point within the ROI where the image is correct i e the point of no distortion should lie along the cylinder axis e Re Parse Package Scripts This button causes the package script to be parsed when clicked Whenever any changes to the script are made this button needs to be clicked to make these changes take effect Il PAK VH User Manual D 9 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques Recreate Step Datums This button causes the input and output datum lists in the step to be recreated This button only needs to be clicked when a datum is either added removed or changed in the script If the script is changed but no input or output datums are changed then this button does not need to be clicked Clicking this button also causes all input datums to be set to their default values and lose their connections to other step results or parameters Datums created by the package script are added to the user interface Input datums are shown as a box with a drop down list button The input datums can be linked to other similar type datums in the Job Clicking the drop down list button causes the Job Tree to be displayed allowing you to select the datum to link to the input datum Resource datums are shown as user editable boxes that can be set to a value directly Output datums are not shown in the user interface for this step but can be seen in the Job Tree that co
98. the l PAK Administrator can reconcile between two of these files to note detailed changes of all Job settings Il PAK VH s Statistics Files are an ASCII representation of the last inspection results These are summaries and contain the Inspection total pass and failed as well as the inspection string when applicable and the last login name and the timestamp of the last run of the inspection These are provided for the convenience of our Il PAK VH customers to provide a readable representation of the data results from the inspection They are stored on the PC as read only files and are viewable printable and exportable from I PAK VH as part of the Statistics Data SubMenu The data contained within these files is recorded automatically in the Audit Trail Il PAK VH User Manual Access Levels The I PAK VH access levels Setup Mode are shown in Figure 5 1 FIGURE 5 1 Access Levels in Setup Mode Access Levels 5 Calibration Menu Image _ q t A x LL 1S N v Programmer lt j Highest Access Level Supervisor Operator gj__ ___ __ _ _ Lowest Access Level Change Password Change Change Lot Password Configure Supervisor Access lt This becomes active after Enabling 21 you enable 21 CFR Part 11 CFR Part 11 A Programmer can use the following procedure to enable 21 CFR Part 11 1 2 3 4 5 Exit Run Mode Cli
99. this timestamp to your advantage and verify that the timestamp of the file name is close to the timestamp contained in the file itself For example in Figure 5 5 you can see that the Statistics Current Date Time is 11 19 2008 10 02 50 So the PDFs were created three seconds after this file was created FIGURE 5 5 Creating PDFs for End of Batch Reports Statistics IV Microscan Visionscape I PAK YH 4 0 0 RunTime Statistics File for Product Test01 Current Date Time 11 19 2015 10 02 50 Config File IV Data File for Product Test Visionscape PAK VH V4 0 0 Page 1 Microscan Visionscape I PAK YH 4 0 0 Current Date Time 1119 2015 10 02 46 Name of Il PAK YH System default Data File for Product Test01 gt Vision Device VHO1 lt isionscape I PAK_ H x bod Creating PDFs J et es eee PAK mizga PAKStalls udit Trail Iv 5 10 Il PAK VH User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions Print When you click Print the Reports that are selected checkboxes to the right of the description and to the left of the display will be sent to your printer Note Make sure you have set up previously a network or local printer PAK VH will look for the printer defined on the system t a x IL oO N Media Depending on your plant s SOP and IT you can archive to be a USB stick an external CD RW drive or a network path In the examples and discussion below subs
100. to run Any tools that the current tool depends on for execution are also run Runtime debug graphics are displayed over the image Debug information is displayed in the status bar below the image This selection uses the triggering mechanism you defined in the Tryout options Be sure to provide a trigger if one is defined in the product Try All This is a Supervisor level function Try All causes all tools in the Job definition to run Runtime debug graphics are displayed over the image Debug information is displayed in the Status Bar below the image Clicking Try All changes the caption to Try Stop Clicking Try Stop stops the tryout of the program and returns the caption to Try All This selection uses the triggering mechanism you defined in the Tryout options Be sure to provide a trigger if one is defined in the product Custom Settings The OCVFont Tool OCVRuntimeTool Trajectory Step and OCRTrainableFont Tool require a Custom Settings dialog box for proper setup and training In Train and Tryout e When the Trajectory Step is selected the Custom Settings button appears in the toolbar For more information about using the custom settings for the Trajectory Step see Chapter 1 of the Visionscape Tools Reference e When the OCRTrainableFont Tool is selected the Font Folder button appears in the toolbar For more information about using the custom settings for the OCRTrainableFont tool see Chapter 9 of the Visionscape Tools Refe
101. using password hathathat 1107 2015 01 55 16 PM UserName program Attempted login using password catcatcat 11 07 2015 01 56 58 PM UserName PakAdmin Attempted login using password hathathat 11 07 2015 01 57 34 PM UserName PakAdmin Attempted login using password hathathat 11 08 2015 09 49 32 AM UserName program Attempted login using password 098765 11 08 2015 09 50 00 AM UserName program Attempted login using password 784325 11 11 2015 03 36 09 PM UserName progam Attempted login using password program 11 13 2015 08 53 27UserName program Attempted login using password porgram 11 13 2015 09 00 49UserName operator Attempted login using password operator 11 13 2015 09 06 32UserNameJaneDoe Attempted login using password JaneDoe z e Display User Changes The I PAK Administrator can review the user change log via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your employees is constantly changing his or her password or you suspect a security breach Il PAK VH User Manual 5 17 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 FIGURE 5 15 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Display User Changes Configure Users 7 24 2015 02 25 PM Successful Add New User for JoeProg with Security Level of Programmer 9 11 2015 10 15 AM Successful Add New User for programmer with Security Level of Programmer 10 30 2015 10 41 AM Successful Add New User for program with Security Level of Programmer 10 30 2015 11 11 AM Successful Add New User for
102. window 12 Click Run Mode This returns you to Operator Mode and displays the Run Mode window as shown in Figure 2 48 Your Job will run in the Camera 1 View window in a continuous mode FIGURE 2 48 Run Mode MICROSCAN Setup allure Report Change Lot Inspect 110 Passi 1o Fali o z EXPIRATION DATE SE 6MA0282 mM iD insane 8284M 2 40 Il PAK VH User Manual N Next Steps Next Steps You have now successfully created set up and stored an I PAK VH program trained the tools and executed both a tryout and continuous inspection in runtime a io fe 5 I gt x pa This tutorial highlights the basic functionality of PAK VH and provides a foundation for properly operating the product You are ready to go into full operation using I PAK VH Il PAK VH User Manual 2 41 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials 2 42 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 So o9 c o a 52 i vy amater Setup Mode Reference This chapter describes I PAK VH setup functionality Il PAK VH User Manual 3 1 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference Overview You enter Setup Mode by entering correctly either the Programmer s default password 0101 or the Supervisor s default password 1010 from Run Mode In Setup Mode you create and program Jobs retrain tools and review end of batch results The Setup Mode window is displayed in F
103. you click on it The product description text can be up to 1000 characters This allows each product definition to have a unique description Note If you want to add a new line in the product description field you must press Ctrl Enter to have the new line appear if you press Enter by itself you will immediately save the product Note There is a special Il PAK VH feature available for our advanced Programmers when using the Product Name ByPass When doing a Product ChangeOver the product named bypass avp only appears in the list if the current access level is Programmer This allows for customer specific Jobs to be run by Programmers For example the ByPass product could be set up to bypass the I PAK VH vision processing and allow a line to clear old product before beginning the inspection of new product Il PAK VH User Manual 3 55 Chapter Ki Setup Mode Reference Product Settings Product Settings displays the Product Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 and Figure 3 43 The Product Settings dialog box allows the Programmer to define the Triggering Method Data Valid Camera button identifiers and I O These are Programmer level functions Cameras Tab This tab allows you to specify on a per camera basis the Trigger method Lighting and Exposure Settings and Camera Button Text FIGURE 3 41 Product Settings Dialog Box Cameras Tab IPAKVisionHA
104. 1 2015 10 05 43 LoginName ipakAdmin Action End of Batch Reset Audit File F ipak jobs AuditT rail AuditT rail enc Audit File Removed New Audit File beginning 01 31 2015 10 05 43 Visionscape ipakStart of Audit Trail 01 31 2015 10 05 46 LoginName ipakAdmin Action End of Batch View 01 31 2015 10 05 50 LoginName ipakAdmin Action Exiting End of Batch 01 31 2015 10 06 44 LoginName ipakAdmin Action Entering End of Batch End of Batch Reports Button Selected 01 31 2015 10 06 44 LoginName ipakAdmin Action End of Batch View 01 31 2015 10 07 12 LoginName ipakAdmin Action Exiting End of Batch 02 03 2015 10 57 49 LoginName NONE Action Starting ipak Running ipak Startup No One is Logged In Yet 02 03 2015 10 57 55 LoginName NONE Action Enter Run Mode Reverting to Operator Current Product InewTest ipak Startup No One is Logged In Yet 02 03 2015 10 58 16 LoginName NP Action Login Attempted and Succeeded Retuming to Setup Mode from RunMode Visionscape ipak RunTime Statistics File for Product newTest 5 18 Il PAK VH User Manual Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Concern Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Concern From the numerous audits Microscan has hosted through the years there are certain questions that keep being asked regarding to how I PAK VH is technically compliant Here are some of these questions and our answers How do l activate 21 CFR Part 11 By default Il PA
105. 19 5 t a X IL N Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 e When there is a failed login attempt the time and date the user name and the password entered are recorded to a security log and the Audit Trail e After a user definable number 1 to 10 of failed login attempts the user name is suspended from the authorized user list Only the Il PAK Administrator is able to Restore a User to restore this user account The suspension of the user is noted on the security log file When you create a new user Supervisor or Programmer you must specify whether or not that user is authorized to do retraining By default this setting is disabled no signature authority Existing users will be set to NOT have this Signature Authority feature and therefore will NOT be able to approve training Any existing users in your user group must get a new user name and enable this Signature Authority feature to approve training The Signature Authority function has been expanded so that when person 1 trains the OCV tools or match strings for the Barcode or Data Matrix tools Il PAK VH checks to make sure that user has signature authority in addition to continuing to check for a valid user name password and security level How can I prevent my users from getting to the desktop Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Enable Desktop allows or prevents users from getting to the desktop By default this setting is enabled
106. 2 indicates the second camera A similar file naming scheme results from an inspection with three or four cameras The Base File Number can be greater than zero 0 making it easy to identify stored images from different batch runs Update Inspection Step s with Current Settings When you first enable the Part Image Queue on this screen you should click this button to set your new values into the Job Then you can return to Run Mode and images will be stored in the Part Queue on the smart camera e Upload Images from Part Queue Now If you have already enabled the Part Queue on the smart camera and wish to upload the images click this button and uploaded images will be saved to file for you 3 36 Il PAK VH User Manual Transmit Statistics This is a Supervisor level function Transmit Statistics sends the following statistics to another device through a user specified RS 232 or Ethernet TCP IP port Statistics and Data 25 So o9 c o a 52 ae Product Name Current date and time Inspected string When the Match String for the Symbology Tool or Data Matrix Tool is used or when the FontTool text or OCVRunTool text is uploaded Last Runtime Statistics Transmit Statistics sends this data in the following formats RS 232 Protocol and Syntax The RS 232 protocol and syntax for a transmission of statistics is as follows RS 232 Protocol The RS 232 default baud rat
107. 51250430999 2 s Font Tool 2 Lot Code 7 90 Il PAK VH User Manual as Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command For each good data string received I PAK VH acknowledges the input with the following OK lt EOT gt When bad data is received I PAK VH alerts the external RS 232 device with the following rt 3 D i X gt O FAIL lt EOT gt If bad data is received inspections may not restart Look at the Il PAK VH User Interface to see if intervention clicking on the Cancel button is required Then you can either re send correct information or go to Setup Mode to retrain manually Once data has started to be received Il PAK VH exits Run Mode changes the string then returns to Run Mode I O 16 Run Setup is asserted once l PAK VH is ready to receive triggers Any errors that occur are displayed in message boxes within Il PAK VH Il PAK VH User Interface In order to use the RS 232 Input of Layout String you must set the Input Channel and Output Channel to RS 232 in the System Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 7 73 FIGURE 7 73 System Settings RS 232 Selection Input Channel RS 232 a Output Channel RS 232 Configure RS 232 Ethernet TCP IP DDE Input Clicking RS 232 brings up the Configure Communications dialog box for RS 232 as shown in Figure 7 74 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 91 Chapter T OCV Reference
108. 7 FontSymbol 7 27 AutoFind 7 35 Training 7 35 OCVFont Tool 7 36 Training 7 37 Inspection 7 37 Step Tip 7 43 OCVRuntimeTool 7 45 Training 7 45 Inspection 7 46 Step Tips 7 52 OCVFontless Tool 7 54 Training 7 54 Inspection 7 55 Step Tips 7 64 OCVSymbolStep 7 66 Substitute Ignore 7 74 Character Substitution 7 77 Ignoring a Character 7 77 Finishing Up 7 77 Il PAK VH User Manual vii Contents APPENDIX A Keyboard Input of Match String 7 77 Enabling Keyboard Input of Match String 7 78 OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool Training 7 78 Keyboard Input Protocol 7 81 External Input of Match String 7 81 Enabling External Input of Match String 7 81 External Input of Match String Checkbox 7 82 Match String Mismatch Action 7 83 Transmit Final Layout String 7 83 OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool Training 7 83 Transmit Final Inspection String 7 87 External Input of Match String Protocol 7 88 Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command 7 89 Setup Notes and Precautions 7 89 RS 232 Input of Layout String 7 90 Ethernet Input of Layout String 7 98 OCV Tips 7 104 OCVFont 7 104 OCVRuntimeTool 7 105 Converting Jobs with Embedded OCVFonts 7 106 Troubleshooting 7 107 Training Font Based Tools Read Match 7 107 Installation and Software A 1 System Specifications A 2 Recommended PC Requirements A 2 Installing the Software A 3 Installing Visionscape Software A 3 Installing Il PAK VH Software A 4 Software Upgrades 21 CFR Part 11 Usage A 5 Unin
109. AK VH loads the first product in the selected product list and runs it for the time set in the Demonstration Mode Parameters dialog box Note For a new product not associated with a device you will be prompted to specify a device This is only for the first time Once the product is associated with a given device you do not have to choose a device again Once the time limit for a product has been reached I PAK VH automatically stops the product enters Setup Mode changes to the next product in the list and returns to Run Mode This cycle continues indefinitely until you manually exit Run Mode Il PAK VH User Manual C 5 Appendix o Demo Mode Disabling Demo Mode Each of these methods will disable Demo Mode The first method is to change to a different user mode User Supervisor or Programmer If any password other than 78743366 is entered Demo Mode is disabled and the button removed from the Advanced Settings menu The second method can be used if you are in Demo Mode and I PAK VH is currently in Setup Mode In this scenario you can enter the Advanced Settings menu click Demo Mode which displays the Demo Mode Parameters dialog box and uncheck the Enable Demonstration Mode checkbox This prevents Demo Mode from being activated when Run Mode is clicked This option will not remove the Demo Mode button from the Advanced Settings menu The Demo Mode button is only removed when you change to a different user mod
110. ANGELAYOUT command can also be used to change the match string of a Symbology Tool Data Matrix Tool or OCRTrainableFont Tool TABLE 7 4 Ethernet Input Syntax Ethernet Input Syntax Comment CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp1 Snapshot1 FontTool1 Input String for Camera 2003 02 lt EOT gt 1 s Font Tool 1 Date CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp1 Snapshot1 FontTool2 Input String for Camera 251250430999 lt EOT gt 1 s Font Tool 2 Lot Code CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp2 Snapshot1 FontTool1 Input String for Camera 2003 02 lt EOT gt 2 s Font Tool 1 Date CHANGELAYOUT VisionDevice1 Insp2 Snapshot1 FontTool2 Input String for Camera 251250430999 lt EOT gt 2 s Font Tool 2 Lot Code Note A maximum of one 1 input string is allowed in a single transmission The Ethernet Input Syntax requires user selectable tool names as input rather than symbolic tool names When there are multiple OCVFont Tools Symbology Tools Data Matrix Tools or OCRTrainableFont Tools in the product definition and one or more of the tools is not inserted directly into the Snapshot Step the Ethernet Input Syntax described above may be ambiguous In order to ensure that I PAK VH uses the correct tools for setting the Layout String or Match String the tools must be given unique names when the product definition is being created or edited Il PAK VH User Manual as Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command
111. ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command Note The Cancel button makes you return to Run Mode but still in an Off Line state as inspections are NOT restarted because the data was invalid You may return to Setup Mode to retrain or try to send another good Ethernet ChangeLayout data to I PAK VH rt O Z D im D x gt O 0 The RS 232 response back is immediate FAIL RS 232 ChangeLayout Success Response When the Lot ChangeOver is successful the RS 232 message OK is sent out and a message box is displayed For example on good RS 232 ChangeLayout data Il PAK VH will display the ChangeLayout dialog box for 5 seconds Il PAK VH will make the mouse into an hourglass wait then control goes back to Il PAK VH The RS 232 response back is immediate OK FIGURE 7 78 ChangeLayout RS 232 Success Run Mode Change Layout 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCVFont Tool MARO1 01 Inspection1 Snapshotl OC Font Tool MARI Show Full Path Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver Il PAK VH User Manual 7 95 Chapter T OCV Reference FIGURE 7 79 ChangeLayout RS 232 Successful Details Change Layout 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 0C Font Tool MARO1 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 0CYFont Tool MARO Show Full Path Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver ChangeLayout Debug Whether good or erroneous data is sent to Il PAK VH these debug windows help users by providing a
112. Click OK to delete Click Cancel to abort this action This process continues until the Programmer has completed the selection of tools in this Product build Click OK The Programmer is prompted to name the Product Click OK to save the Product and the Product name associated with this Product During Product creation in the System Settings gt General dialog box if Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver is checked the appropriate dialog box is displayed Special Features of Tools and Steps in Job Creation The Visionscape Toolset is the basis for the I PAK VH Toolset However Il PAK VH has its own rules which differ from Visionscape and Job creation and implementation which also differ from Visionscape On the next page are some of the features unique to I PAK VH and their implementation details 3 50 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings e Visionscape uses a Job file that consists only of an avp file Il PAK VH uses an avp file and an avpsys file to store many other details about its Job If you try to open a Visionscape Job in PAK VH you will receive an error message from the software saying that it cannot find the associated avpsys file So O9 c o Q 52 i vy The tool limit for insertion in the flowchart view of product creation is six primary tools and six secondary tools in each parent tool If the Programmer needs more than these six tools he or she can click Advanced Settin
113. Default 50 pixels any movement is allowed Range 0 to 50 pixels The maximum of 50 pixels comes from the parent OCVTool setting Individual Symbol Search Y which limits the search range in Y to a maximum of 50 pixels in either direction e Residue Limit Units Inputs the residue limits in either a maximum pixel count value or a percentage value percentage value is based on the number of On pixels in the trained template When the value of this property changes the values of Initial Residue Limit and Final Residue Limit are changed to match the selected units Default Percentage e Initial Residue Limit Provides a quick check of the character quality and correctness The initial residue calculation is done before any image processing is performed on the residue image When the system looks at the symbol being inspected it determines the residue of the symbol which is a count of those pixels that differ between the trained template and the current image Based on the value of this property the system determines if the residue is within tolerances If it is not within tolerances the symbol fails Otherwise the system continues on with the rest of the inspection procedure When Residue Limit Units is set to Percentage Il PAK VH User Manual 7 29 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Default 100 0 Range 0 0 to 100 0 The value of this property is the smallest percentage of residue pixels relative to the trained On pi
114. EEN Next Tool Exit Training AutoStep Previous Next Carers Settings Options Acquire Live an twa a to Main Setup Inspection Snapshot OC Fontless Tool OC Fontless Tool OC Fontless Tool eters 12345678 e External Input of Match String Enabling this setting allows an external device computer etc to specify the intended inspection string for an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool The necessary information is sent from the external device to Il PAK VH External Confirmation is accomplished through a communications handshake between I PAK VH and the external device The communications can be accomplished through RS 232 or Ethernet Il PAK VH User Manual 3 87 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference Note Enabling External Input of Match String mode automatically disables the ignore and substitute character functionality of Il PAK VH See External Input of Match String Checkbox on page 5 81 for more information External Communications Timeout Setting this field determines the amount of time that the communications handshake waits Match String Mismatch Action Defines the action that Il PAK VH takes in the event that the string input from the external device does not match the string learned when the tool was trained The possible selections and their meaning are Use Input String Default Il PAK VH uses the input string as the inspection string Use Learned String Il
115. Failure Report Change Lot Lo O09 o Q sv w Q oY N Date Time 12 20 48 7 Aug El Indicates the Newest and Last Failed Image is Displayed Inspect 7060 Pass Failure Image 1 10 Indicates the Oldest and First Failed Image is Displayed Saving the Images to Disk When the Supervisor or Programmer returns to Setup Mode with Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup enabled the queue of failed images gets saved to the system s hard drive At startup the Il PAK VH software creates the folder Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH FailedImages if it does not already exist FIGURE 3 60 Contents of Failed Images Folder i C scape I Pak File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q ex Q amp o Search Folders E Address Citvscape l PaklFailedimages Name _ mB Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_01 tiF i Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_02 tif 5 Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_03 tif Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_04 tiF Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_05 tif Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_06 tif i Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_07 tif Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_08 tif 5 Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_09 tiF 5 Image_Snapshot1_BufOut_10 tif Size 314 KB 314 KB 314 KB 314 KB 314 KB 314 KB 314 KB 314 KB 314 KB 314 KB Date Modified 741 2008 8 30 AM 7 1 2008 8 30 AM 7 1 2008 8 30 AM 7 1 2008 8 30 AM 7 1 2008 8 30 AM 7 1 2008 8 30 AM 7 1 2008 8 30 AM 7 1 2008 8 30 AM 741 2008 8 30 AM 7
116. Figure 6 18 FIGURE 6 18 Training Statistics for All Characters Character Data Std Dev A00 0 000 Character Related Features FIGURE 6 19 Character Features Menu Gopy Delete Show Character Array for 0 Show StdDey Array For 0 Show Histogram for 0 Show Font Histogram Delete Training for 0 Remove 0 from Font This menu is displayed when you right click on a character in the Graphical View Show Character Array and Show StdDev Array You can display constants for each character by selecting Show Character Array or Show StdDev Array as shown in Figure 6 20 These displays are useful for low level debugging and font testing only These displays may not be helpful for an Operator 6 30 Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 6 20 Results of Show Character Array and Show StdDev Array Standard Dey Array for 0 x Character Char m a 20 7 226 O B J aag i 1 0 pope e Pe ae an 1 0 ae e e A 15 pore pe tae we 182 moor ie i a i PP Pe fe ft ee eee Show Histogram and Show Font Histogram You can display a histogram for a character see Figure 6 21 or show font histogram information see Figure 6 22 Character Array for 0 Character fom S fal i 186 148 i a aaa i 207 Pr PP i 207 Pr Pr er i 189 Py Pr i Il PAK VH User Manual 6 31 SE e a Eg E 1
117. General gt Set Number of Failed Login Attempts allows a Programmer to define the number of login failure attempts By default this value is 5 the range is 1 to 10 For more information see Set Number of Failed Login Attempts on page 6 95 If get an alarm on I PAK VH how will know someone saw it For Alarms Overruns you are required to acknowledge alarms with a login of Supervisor or higher to click OK This transaction is recorded to the Audit Trail file What is the date format used inside the Part 11 files The date format used inside Part 11 files is mm dd yyyy hh mm ss 24 hour format with leading zeros added for months dates less than 10 What if Il PAK VH runs out of hard drive space Il PAK VH always checks the available disk space before writing the following to disk e The Job e The Audit Trail file e The Statistics files e The Configuration files e Images 5 22 Il PAK VH User Manual Ta SE e Io o a5 ce F lt 5 amarrer Automatic Identification This chapter describes I PAK VH s automatic identification functionality Il PAK VH User Manual 6 1 Chapter Automatic Identification Symbology Tool Other Steps Used None Theory of Operation The Symbology Tool locates and decodes both 1D and 2D encoded symbols It searches the specified ROI looking for an enabled symbology type and attempts to decode it If successful it will continue to process the R
118. H selects certain results our users are most interested in automatically These can easily be seen on the Run Mode Display Results window To use these features verify that any inspection results you might need are selected on the Inspection Step s property page in the Select Results to Upload field and enable an RS 232 port on the System Settings gt Communication dialog box e Enable RS 232 Runtime Results By default this selection is disabled until you enable an RS 232 port Once a port is established you can select this option Exit the Advanced SubMenu and go to the Statistics and Data SubMenu You will notice an additional button available on the Statistics and Data SubMenu called RS 232 Results as shown in Figure 3 51 FIGURE 3 51 Updated Statistics SubMenu for RS 232 Results Clear Statistics Save Save z Preview lf jane l 5 Save Transmit RS 232 Preview i Clos Hee cani Images Statistics Results eae Statistics i Statistics Click RS 232 Results and go into the dialog box see Figure 3 52 3 74 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings FIGURE 3 52 Tool Results to Output Select the Specific Inspection Results to Output over R Tool Results to Output o 5 Z D Som D x Inspection Snapshot FontT coll Text Inspection Snapshot1 Assign5 Out Inspection Snapshotl Assign4 Out Inspection Snapshot FontT ool2 Text Inspection Snapshot1 Assig
119. Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller MV Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout Archive Path e e a Go directly between RunMode and Training Results Reporting OCY Training g Automatic Training for Multiple OC FontT ools I Save Runtime Results to a File l Enable OCY Failure Tracking r Automatic Training for Multiple OCYFontlessTools r External Communications Timeout 160 Seconds IV Enable Failed Image Queue 2 Match String Mismatch Action Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Number of Images in Queue r I Keyboard Input of Match String Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second C Maximum 2 4 Cc 8 14 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box General tab as shown in Figure 2 12 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 11 N ff i e 5 a I gt lt an Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 12 System Settings Dialog Box General Tab FJob Settings Runtime Inspection Priority Realtime b End Batch J Enable End Batch Functionality 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 F Enable Configuration File Audit Trail J Enable User Logins for Training Approval Set Passwords to Expire Set Time Limit for System Inactivity Revert to Operator Mode C SWMinutes 15Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minute Set Number of Failed Login Att
120. In None v Out 1 Data Valid Inspection 1 y Out 2 Inspection 1 Passed s me e 13 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box Communication tab as shown in Figure 2 31 FIGURE 2 31 System Settings Dialog Box Communication Tab Selection Input Channel None 7 Output Channel None r Configure RS232 Ethernet TCP IP 14 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box Training and Results tab as shown in Figure 2 32 2 26 Il PAK VH User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 32 System Settings Dialog Box Training and Results Tab Communication Training and Results General Product ChangeO ver Activities Training IV Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver MV AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training F Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot IV Reset Statistics after re training I Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller MV Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout Archive Path m ee 7 Go directly between RunMode and Training Results Reporting OCY Training E F Automatic Training for Multiple OC FontT ools I Save Runtime Results to a File I Enable OCY Failure Tracking r Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT ools r External Communications Timeout 160 Seconds IV Enable Failed Image Queue Match St
121. Inspection If AutoFind is enabled the pins are located and the OCVFont Tool box is re positioned based on the pin locations Each symbol found during training is expected to be at the same location within the OCVFont Tool box at runtime For each symbol position there are several ways that an inspection can fail The symbol cannot be located The symbol can fail because the sharpness value is out of tolerance The symbol can fail because the contrast value is out of tolerance The symbol can fail because a break larger than the user specified size appears in the character The symbol failed an ID Test It could not be determined that the correct symbol was present The symbol can fail the initial residue check The symbol can fail the final residue check either or both methods This residue analysis allows for detection of the following Symbol has become thicker or thinner Symbol has holes or missing features Symbol holes are filled in Symbol contains additional or stray markings Il PAK VH User Manual 7 37 Chapter T OCV Reference FIGURE 7 27 OCVFont Tool Properties Page Tool Settings OCVFont Tool AutoFind OnePt Locator LayoutStep AutoThreshold Comp 4 gt Sle Bl Sl ABD prtom z OCVFont Tool Inputs Ve Use AutoFind Wd fq AutoFind Pin 1 Index 1 fq AutoFind Pin 2 Index 999 fy Max Contrast Difference 100 E Allowed Thickening of Symbol 0 ay Allowed Thinning of Symbol 0
122. Inspection Pass Busy Signal I0 lt Unassigned gt Minimum Busy Signal Duration ms 0 Data File for Product Testl Visionscape I PAK Page 1 Preview Statistics This is a Supervisor level function Preview Statistics displays the dialog box shown in Figure 3 23 which displays the current runtime statistics FIGURE 3 23 I PAK VH Dialog Box Preview Statistics isionscape I PAK e Product Test01 J Date Time 11 19 2008 10 00 29 Inspection1 Inspected Characters Snapshot1 BarCode Tool Text 011311234567890617010615104123456 Snapshot1 DataMatrix Tool Text 17 010615 10 4123456 01 13112345678906 I1 136 Pi 136 Ri 0 OCV Tracking You must enable System Settings gt Training and Results gt Enable OCV Failure Tracking for the OCV Tracking button to be visible When you click OCV Tracking the OCV Failure Tracking dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 24 It lists all of the OCV tools that are in the current product definition 3 40 Il PAK VH User Manual Statistics and Data 25 FIGURE 3 24 OCV Failure Tracking Dialog Box OCV Failure Tracking OCY Symbol Failures o O D i x i xe ie Q Insp1 Snapshot1 FontT ool1 50 Save Data to File e The Previous and Next buttons cycle through the available OCV Tools when there are more than four in the product definition e The Save Data to File b
123. K VH User Manual Symbology Tool e GS1 Format Enable When set to enabled GS1 validation checking will be done on decoded symbols Symbols that fail this check will cause a GS1 status failure and set the GS1 Format text output datum indicating the error Symbols that pass the check will provide formatted GS1 text and convert the identified application fields into output datums see example below SE e we a8 Fe ae 25 lt 5 A Decoded Text 0100614141999996175012311012348C21SC50 A GS1 Format Text 01 00614141999996 1 7 501231 10 1 2348C 21 SC50 PT Center Point 994 000 607 500 SS Angle 0 000 DEL Height 227 000 BL Width 226 000 amp Symbol Results lt Click to Display Values gt A GS1_AppIDO1 00614141999996 A GS1_ApplD17 501231 A GS1_AppID10 1234BC A GS1_AppID21 SC50 N Solution Partner e Match String The entered string will be compared against each decoded string during each run when match string is enabled This datum will be filled in after a successful train only when enable match string is enabled while training e Timeout ms Maximum time the tool spends searching for a symbol When a symbol is not found and decoded by this time this step fails and the program execution continues e Max Symbol Count This sets the maximum number of symbols that can be decoded within a single ROI e Enabled Symbols Only enabled symbols will be located within the
124. K VH does not activate Part 11 functionality as a factory setting As an off the shelf product not all of our users are required to use Part 11 To enable Part 11 see Enabling 21 CFR Part 11 on page 5 3 The activation state enabled or disabled of Part 11 is displayed lower right corner in the status bar of Setup mode as shown in Figure 5 17 FIGURE 5 17 21 CFR Part 11 Enabled SwsSYS01 Partl1 Enabled 6 25 2018 10 12 4M What are the Password Schemes and Restrictions Passwords have restrictions based on the 21 CFR Part 11 guidelines Il PAK VH has implemented the following password specific rules e Passwords must be at least six characters in length and no longer than 10 characters e Passwords are changeable through the Configure Part 11 Users dialog box You can change your own password only The I PAK Administrator can change any user s password e Passwords are encrypted when stored e Passwords are hidden when typed into the login box e Microscan recommends that passwords be changed every 30 days Enforcement of this is left to the end user as your own SOP You can use Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Set Passwords To Expire to aid in this e Users entering new passwords are required to enter unique passwords No two users can have the same password When changing your password you cannot change it to what it currently is set to Il PAK VH User Manual 5
125. MICROSCAN Il PAK VH User Manual v4 0 0 March 2015 84 100017 02 Rev A Copyright 2015 Microscan Systems Inc Tel 1 425 226 5700 800 762 1149 Fax 1 425 226 8250 All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used We state herein that we are using the names to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download Center on our web site at www microscan com Technical Support For technical support e mail helpdesk microscan com Warranty For current warranty information see www microscan com warranty Microscan Systems Inc United States Corporate Headquarters 1 425 226 5700 800 762 1149 United States Northeast Technology Center 1 603 598 8400 800 468 9503 European Headquarters 31 172 423360 Asia Pacific Headquarters 65 6846 1214 Contents PREFACE Welcome xi Purpose of this Manual xi Manual Conventions xi Validation xii 21 CFR Part 11 xii Installation Media xii CHAPTER 1 Il
126. Mode This is a Programmer level function Close Advanced quits the Advanced Settings Toolbar and returns you to the main I PAK VH Setup Mode window Use the Run Mode button when you want to leave Setup Mode after performing a Product ChangeOver configuring or retraining a Job and return to Run Mode with your access level reset to Operator At this time the inspection Job is downloaded to the smart camera s Windows Registry information is updated with the name of this Job This provides recovery in the event of a power loss and enables I PAK VH to recover to Run Mode running this last Product Run Mode can be accessed by any user Il PAK Administrator Programmer Supervisor or Operator All tools must be trained before you can run your product in Run Mode The Run Mode button is grayed out until all tools in the current Job are trained Troubleshooting Shutting Down I PAK VH The I PAK VH program should be shut down before disconnecting connecting or reconfiguring the smart cameras If PAK VH is running when the cameras are disconnected and reconnected Setup Mode may not properly display images in which case it will be necessary to shut down the I PAK VH application and then restart it Il PAK VH User Manual 3 97 Chapter Ki Setup Mode Reference 3 98 Il PAK VH User Manual Y 3 c D e ea v e c 5 CHAPTER 4 Run Mode Reference This chapter describes I PAK VH Run Mode
127. O 1000 MT Desktop Adapter Details Configure This connection uses the following items r VPN connection or set up a router or access point M 0 Client for Microsoft Networks Activity M JB JAI GigE Vision Fiter Driver M fE QoS Packet Scheduler p or VPN network connection Sq M 8 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks M Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 Bytes 4 IPA Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 rk computers or change sharing settings M Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper I O Driver M Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Properties Le Install ae P roubleshooting information 2 Description 3 Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks _ i B 2 Il PAK VH User Manual u Setting the PC to Use a Static IP Address t O In the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window select Use the E T following IP address and set the desired static IP address for the PC as shown below 7 o 5 Cc Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties P c z General e Cc of O You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP addr
128. OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 19 Fontless FontTool Position Fie AccessLevel Calibration Menu Image Help Ci t Product A L Dat Time MICROSCAN fuent Produc Peete Te Change Product Train and Tryout Statistics and Data 2 8 fe E mm gt G 26 Click Train and Tryout The Train button shows green This indicates a successful train 27 Click Next The Next button text will change to Finish 28 Click Finish Click Options This displays the Options dialog box as shown in Figure 2 20 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 17 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 20 Options Dialog Box CMM x m Control Options MV Do Acquire M Show 1 0 Results I Triggered 1 0 or Sensor Loop Delay Coe 29 Click to select Loop and click OK 30 Click Try All This places the Job in a continuous loop allowing you to observe your recently created Job 31 Click Try Stop and then click Exit Training to Main Setup This returns you to the Setup Mode main window 32 Click Run Mode This returns you to Operator Mode and displays the Run Mode window as shown in Figure 2 21 2 18 Il PAK VH User Manual N Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 21 Run Mode Window With Job Running Visionscape I PAK VH MICROSCAN ff A Sn fe e I gt lt an nasm 227 PM Your Job will run in the Camera 1 View wi
129. OCVRuntimeTool has been run doing a Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key and moving the mouse inside the OCVRuntimeTool ROI but not over the symbols as shown in Figure 7 40 FIGURE 7 40 Step Tip Example 4 OCVFontless Tool An OCVFontless Tool does not require an OCVFont Instead it determines the location of characters in the FOV using a blob analysis technique Then it stores training data for each character location as an OCVSymbolStep The OCVFontless Tool expects to find the symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the trained data to verify the quality of the characters being inspected Training Training the OCVFontless Tool involves placing and sizing the OCVFontless Tool box around the area containing the symbols to be inspected When Train is clicked the ROI is scanned for symbol candidates A symbol candidate is a group of connected pixels that have foreground polarity Each symbol candidate that contains enough pixels as defined by the Min Symbol Size in pixels parameter is trained and stored as an OCVSymbolStep 7 54 Il PAK VH User Manual Then the OCVFontless Tool box is reset based on the bounding rectangle of all symbols found and the values of the search extra properties The AutoFind is trained automatically whenever the OCVFontless Tool is trained When the AutoFind Search Area Box is moved and or sized it is auto
130. OI until the ROI is completely traversed the maximum symbol count has been met or the advanced timeout feature has been reached The symbology tool can be trained to optimize performance for the symbology type decoded Once trained the tool will only read the symbology trained and depending on the symbology may also discriminate other specifications for performance For this reason training is only recommended for tools that will be used to read symbols of the same symbology size and polarity Settings e Train String Only After configuring the symbology tool and setting its match string enabled to enabled when you select the train button in train and tryout only the match string field will be updated None of the other parameters will be modified However you will remain in a trained state e Match String Enable When enabled the match string will be compared against the decoded string of a symbol during a run to determine if the step is run successfully The result datum will be true if a symbol is successfully decoded and the decoded string matches the match string value when this box is checked During training the decoded string from the training symbol will be placed in the match string value box only when this property is enabled e Use WildCard in Match String When enabled can be used in the match string as a placeholder wildcard match and any character will be considered a match for that position Il PA
131. PAK VH Inspection 1 1 System Specifications 1 2 Recommended PC Requirements 1 2 Vision HAWK Communications 1 3 Product Specifications 1 4 Functional Specifications 1 5 Touch Input Software 1 7 Supported Camera 1 7 User Interface 1 7 Storing Inspection Results 1 7 Moving and Sizing Tools 1 8 An I PAK VH Product 1 9 Scan for Sequence Steps Using Outputs 1 9 Software Systems 1 10 Il PAK VH Start Up Procedure Typical 1 11 Running I PAK VH for the First Time 1 12 Il PAK VH Shutdown Procedure 1 14 Il PAK VH User Manual iii Contents CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 Il PAK VH Tutorials 2 1 Setup Mode and Run Mode 2 2 Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool 2 3 Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool 2 20 Setting Up the Tool Set 2 20 Font Training 2 32 OCVRuntimeTool Training 2 36 Next Steps 2 41 Setup Mode Reference 3 1 Overview 3 2 Setup Mode Menus 3 3 File Menu 3 3 Access Level Menu 3 4 21 CFR Part 11 Menu 3 6 Calibration Menu 3 6 Image Menu 3 7 Help Menu 3 8 Change Product 3 10 Change Lot Feature 3 11 Location of Jobs Folder 3 13 Archiving and Restoring Products 3 14 Train and Tryout 3 17 AutoStep or Wizard Training Method 3 18 AutoStep Off 3 19 Train and Tryout Mode 3 19 Train and Tryout Toolbar 3 19 Automatically Setting Tool Settings 3 25 Special Training of Tools 3 25 Statistics and Data 3 32 Clear Statistics 3 32 Save Stats File 3 33 Save Config File 3 33 Save Images 3 33 Transmit Statistics 3 37 Pre
132. PAK VH ignores the input string and set the string found during training as the inspection string Retry by Learning I PAK VH forces you to retrain the tool and allows the string to be entered again Retry by Input Il PAK VH allows the string to be entered again Note The Match String Mismatch Action selected is applied to any OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool in the current Job Refer to Match String Mismatch Action on page 5 82 for more information Keyboard Input of Match String Enabling this setting allows you to specify the intended inspection string for an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool This is accomplished by displaying an input box into which you can type the necessary information Note Refer to Keyboard Input of Match String on page 5 76 for more information Transmit Final Inspection String Enabling this setting allows Il PAK VH to send out the final inspection string after training an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings Note Refer to Transmit Final Inspection String on page 5 86 for more information So O9 o a 52 w Q oY N System Settings General Tab FIGURE 3 62 System Settings Dialog Box General Tab Job Settings Menu Settings C Streamline Menus See eet Realtime Show All Menu Options Advanced Users IV Enable Change Lot In Run Mode J Automatic Open Softkeyboard
133. Part 11 Should you forget your 21 CFR Part 11 password you ll need to contact your I PAK Administrator to suspend your existing user name and create a new user name and password For more information about 21 CFR Part 11 and passwords see Reset a User s Password on page 3 16 End Batch When running with the End Batch option On I PAK VH prompts you for a response to save the End Batch results e No Il PAK VH just returns to Setup Mode and awaits further action from you e Yes I PAK VH begins to automatically save the read only statistics file to the hard drive and prompts you for a file name as you return to Setup Mode e Cancelling out of this End Batch saving statistics file option is allowed Regardless of how you respond you get an End Batch Successful message and the batch results are stored in the Statistics menus 4 14 Il PAK VH User Manual t a X LL 1 N cuaprers 21 CFR Part 11 Il PAK VH is 21 CFR Part 11 technically compliant This chapter describes components access levels how to enable 21 CFR Part 11 customer responsibilities 21 CFR Part 11 functions and common 21 CFR Part 11 areas of concern Il PAK VH User Manual 5 1 Chapter Components 21 CFR Part 11 Il PAK VH s technical 21 CFR Part 11 compliance has the following components Il PAK VH Jobs are stored on the PC as binary files you cannot edit them except from within Il PAK VH These Jobs
134. Select Results to Upload in the Inspection properties page e Value Inspection results associated with the Requested Result items described above Each camera view contains an image display area showing the smart camera s FOV Zoom control and scroll bars are provided to allow you to access all areas of the image The inspected images appear in the image area with tool graphics optionally overlaid Each of the Camera Views contains a toolbar that displays the current Runtime Inspection statistics for that smart camera This read only informational includes Number of parts Inspected Number of parts Passed Number of parts Failed and the inspection time of the last part inspected The inspection time does not include image acquisition Under this main counter toolbar is another toolbar representing Interval Counters These provide an inspection based set of interval counters for Total Inspected Passed and Failed There is also a Reset button on each Inspection window At the start of Run Mode these interval counters are set to zero Per inspection result the interval counters are updated When Reset is clicked the interval counters are reset to zero The maximum value for any counter that can be displayed and retained in the registry is e Inspected 10 characters up to 2 147 483 648 e Pass 10 characters up to 2 147 483 648 e Fail 10 characters up to 2 147 483 648 Note On the way out of Run Mode counters
135. Selectable Main Port fia Display Changeover Strings Main Comm Pot 1 C Cancel RS 232 ChangeLayout Error Debug Any errors that occur are reported over RS 232 via a FAIL message to the host device These errors are also displayed in message boxes within Il PAK VH For example when erroneous data bad data symbol not in layout too many symbols etc is received over RS 232 from a customer s host machine the ChangeLayout dialog box stays on up on the I PAK VH Run Mode screen everything else from Run Mode is Disabled except for the ChangeLayout dialog box It shows you the recently input data tool name and new layout string Il PAK VH User Manual 7 93 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 7 76 ChangeLayout RS 232 Error Status Run Mode Change Layout 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCY Font Tool WXZ 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 0CYFont Tool wxz Show Full Path aeee ni NOT Reasi SSE Y ARDA Cancel FIGURE 7 77 ChangeLayout RS 232 Error Details Change Layout 01 Inspection1 Snapshot1 OCVFont Tool WXZ O1 Inspection1 Snapshot OC Font Tool WZ Show Full Path ati pei aE TER SS Y APOD Cancel You MUST take action by clicking the Cancel button before I PAK VH will resume In this bad data sent state Il PAK VH is declared off line the error message is displayed along with the exact data input and the tools 7 94 Il PAK VH User Manual as Lot
136. This property is a drop down list containing the names of all OCVFonts that are in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder Il PAK VH User Manual 7 41 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Allowed Overlap During Read Used during the learn layout process The value of this property specifies the amount of symbol candidate ROI overlap that is allowed When symbol candidates overlap more than the allowed value tests are performed to determine the best candidate at the overlap position The other candidate will not become part of the layout This overlap measurement is in pixels Default 5 pixels Range 0 to 15 pixels Min Read Match Is a correlation percentage used as a minimum requirement for a symbol to be considered a candidate during the learn layout process Default 65 Range 0 to 100 Note When characters are not being read during Learn Layout decrease this property to 60 Avoid settings below 55 Automatic Threshold Adjustment Enables and disables the automatic threshold adjustment feature When enabled the best match location during the learn layout process calculates an adjustment to the threshold used to create binary images at runtime This calculated value is set in the Threshold Adjustment property AutoThreshold tab The AutoThreshold tab of the OCVFont Tool belongs to the LayoutStep and is used only at runtime The only property used is Threshold Adjustment which serves as a global adjustme
137. Training When the Automatic Segment option is used to train characters the system locates blobs within the ROI A bounding box for each blob is used to train the symbols The Num Border Spaces to Add property of the OCVFont s LayoutStep can be used to increase the size of the box used to train the symbols This Automatic Segment method of training OCVFonts is not necessarily the optimal method for training characters In particular the 1 2 pixel border requirement may not be met Example with Automatic Segment Using the TEXT02 TIF image a sample OCVFont was trained using automatic segmentation with all parameters at the default values The characters L 2 A 0 6 9 3 were trained into the OCVFont When the OCVRuntimeTool was trained the Sobel Edge Enhancement search buffer was 7 108 Il PAK VH User Manual Troubleshooting FIGURE 7 88 Contents of Buffer O g 2 D Z gt O Oo The Sobel Edge Enhancement templates and the resulting Match were FIGURE 7 89 Resulting Match 83 85 89 90 89 93 80 When you look closely at the template images and compare them to the search buffer you can see that the template images are missing some data This is because the Automatic Segment boxes were not big enough when the characters were trained It is this missing data that causes the match to go down even when training on the same image
138. Upload Max Rate Per Second click to select Maximum e Click OK and then click Close Advanced 4 Run the product and verify that the counters increment and that the images update 5 Repeat this procedure for each product that will be run in Demo Mode Demo Mode Jobs Before entering Demo Mode you can create several products that show the functionality that you want to demonstrate These products should be configured so that they Load Images from File instead of Acquire from Camera You can modify this when you train the selected product When the current step is the Snapshot click Tool Settings and then click the Acquire tab The Tool Settings dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure C 1 which shows how one of the demo Jobs has been configured FIGURE C 1 Load Images From File Tool Settings i Snapshot Blob Tool Blob1 Fail Counter Blob Tool Blob2 F4 gt Fy A B Fale Default Datum Order Acquire Inputs E Picture Mode Load Images from File ES File List c demo_ima blister_1 tif c demo_ima blister_2 tif c demo_ima blister_3 tif Il PAK VH User Manual C 3 Appendix K Demo Mode Enabling Demo Mode To access Demo Mode exit Run Mode using the password 78743366 After this password is entered you enter Setup Mode with the Programmer access level To enable Demo Mode 1 From Setup Mode click Advanced Settings You will see the Demo Mode button displa
139. VisionDevice Snapshot Name symbolic name result lt delimiter gt Where lt Delimiter gt is one of these user defined symbols comma pound sign or asterisk Each grouping of results is terminated with a lt CR gt carriage return Note Sometimes inspection results reported are in the form of arrays or lists Data will be reported in full PAK VH will not parse or interpret data results At Runtime I PAK VH will write these inspection results to the file after every results upload The default file name is InspectionResults dat and its path is the directory where I PAK VH was started e Enable OCV Failure Tracking When checked enables the failure tracking for every OCV tool in the product definition file OCVResultsDm Upload Il PAK VH User Manual 3 79 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference When OCV Failure Tracking is enabled for each OCV tool in the current product Il PAK VH automatically selects the OCVResultsDm from the Inspection step s list of results to be uploaded When OCV Failure Tracking is disabled Il PAK VH ensures that this inspection result is not selected for upload The OCVResultsDm holds all of the pass fail information for each symbol in the OCV tool At runtime this datum will be parsed in order that a grid of pass fail counts and failure types for each symbol can be filled Types of symbol failures are Correlation Failure Sharpness Failure Contrast Failur
140. WK1 Camera Type VisionHAWK 1280960 CCD gt Trigger 1 0 Digtl 101 o gt Trigger Polarity High gt Low v Lighting a a Trigger Acquire Method Exposure Time micro secs 2000 Camera Button Text IPAKYVH1 e Camera Type Vision HAWK e Trigger Acquire Method The Programmer can select either of these methods lO Triggered Default Select this option when you want your inspections to run only after an external trigger signal has been received on a pre defined Digital Input point on the IO board Note When I O Triggered is selected the Trigger I O option is displayed with a default of Digital 1 01 When I O Triggered is not selected Trigger I O is grayed out disabled 3 56 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings Continuous When you select this option your inspections will run in a continuous loop and will not wait for a trigger signal For debug purposes only and never a Production mode setting The default is not selected e Trigger I O When the Programmer selects a Trigger Acquire Method of I O Triggered this list will contain all Digital IO points configured currently as inputs as well as virtual IO points Default Digital I O 1 Range Any valid physical input point or virtual I O point e Trigger Polarity When the Programmer selects a Trigger Acquire Method of I O Triggered Trigger Polarity is designated Default High to Low e L
141. a s view and to its tools in your Job 3 20 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Train and Tryout Tool Settings This is a Programmer level function Tool Settings displays the Tool Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 3 16 This shows the training and inspection parameters relative to the selected tool Lo O09 o Q sv w Q oY N FIGURE 3 16 Tool Settings Dialog Box Tool Settings OCVFont Tool AutoFind OnePt Locator NewFont LayoutS 4 a 9 g P rey Default Datum Order OCVFont Tool Inputs Ve Use AutoFind wi g AutoFind Pin 1 Index 1 g AutoFind Pin 2 Index 999 fay Max Contrast Difference 100 g Individual Symbol Search X 3 fH Individual Symbol Search Y 3 Ve Test For Character Breaks CI i Runtime ID Checking wi H Graphics Level Show ROI Only Options This is a Supervisor level function Options displays the Tryout Options dialog box as shown in Figure 3 17 This dialog box allows the Supervisor to temporarily disable the Trigger for Tryout Mode only You can verify that the tool is running properly by viewing the graphics and examining data along the Status Bar Click OK if you make any changes to this dialog box Il PAK VH User Manual 3 21 Chapter Ki Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 17 Options Dialog Box Tryout Options x r Control Options J Do Acquire M Show 1 0 Results I Triggered 1 0 or Sensor Loop Delay Cancel Control O
142. a of the prototype itself is passable When Residue Limit Units is set to Percentage Default 15 0 meaning a 15 variation is acceptable Range 0 0 to 100 0 The value of this property is the smallest percentage of residue pixels relative to the trained On pixel count in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection Il PAK VH User Manual as FontSymbol When Residue Limit Units is set to Pixels Default 15 of the symbol size Range 0 to symbol size The value of this property is the smallest count of residue pixels in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection rt 3 D i X gt O Note Determining the proper value for Final Residue Limit is a subjective decision the higher the quality of the character symbol desired the lower the Final Residue Limit should be e Final Residue Max Blob Size Used when Final Residue Method is set to Max Residue Blob or Both A blob analysis is performed on the residue image and the largest blob is found If this blob has an area that is greater than the value of this property the symbol fails the inspection Default 10 Range 1 to 512 Maximum Flaw Size Represents the maximum width in pixels that a discrepancy is allowed to be before it is considered objectionable The larger the number assigned the larger a discrepancy is allowed before causing the symbol inspection to fail Default 1 pi
143. a to determine the pixel value that separates a light from a dark pixel Otherwise the value given in the Threshold setting is used By default Adaptive Thresholding is enabled Allow Overlapped Characters Two or More Characters When this option is checked the boundaries of the characters found by the tool can overlap This is useful for fonts that allow the tops of uppercase characters to extend over the next lowercase character in a row Default Enabled Allow Segmented Characters Two or More Characters Character Fills Entire ROI Single Character When this option is checked the tool will combine adjacent disconnected parts when searching for a character s boundary This should be enabled when locating dot matrix characters Default Disabled Uses the ROI perimeter as the character s bounding box Use this option when two characters touch each other because the tool will not separate contiguous segments Ensure that the ROI fits tightly around the character Default Disabled Check Character Confidence Single Character Two or More Characters When enabled the confidence level found by the font reading process for each character will be checked against a user input level See Minimum Confidence description Default Enabled Collect All Character Segments Single Character When this option is checked the tool combines all segments in the ROI into a single character The ROI can fit loo
144. ables Supervisor Level Capabilities The default password for Supervisor access level is 1010 This data is saved in the PC s registry Operator Immediately places I PAK VH into Operator level Change Password Displays a dialog box for a new password for the currently enabled access level Note Passwords must use numeric symbols Change Change Lot Password Allows the Programmer to change the Change Lot password default is 1101 to something else This is active only if the access level is Programmer For Supervisor access Changing Lot at Run Time is activated 3 4 Il PAK VH User Manual Setup Mode Menus e 21 CFR Part 11 Administrator For complete information see Chapter 3 21 CFR Part 11 e Configure Supervisor Access This command is available to Programmers to configure the tasks a Supervisor can perform When you do not have Programmer level access this menu item is disabled When a Programmer selects this item the Configure Supervisor Access dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 4 FIGURE 3 4 Configure Supervisor Access Supervisor Access Level Setup Select the Advanced Supervisor Activities Font Training Changing Tool Settings Changing Product Settings Changing System Settings Editing Tool Set Job View Launching Windows Explorer Saving Product Definition Calibrating Shutting Down Il PAK E a a a a a a xl Changing Lot at Run Time The P
145. after this first time startup Il PAK VH will not allow you to go back into Run Mode until all tools are trained You should understand that I PAK VH will never allow you to go back into Run Mode if there are untrained tools in your job Il PAK VH User Manual 1 13 Chapter Il PAK VH Inspection Il PAK VH Shutdown Procedure To properly shut down Il PAK VH exit Run Mode by entering the Programmer password Then close I PAK VH by selecting File gt Exit Next via the PC s Start button shutdown the PC When the PC has completed shutting down turn off the UPS if present Il PAK VH User Manual N a 9 fe 5 I gt x m amarrer l PAK VH Tutorials This chapter guides you through two tutorials e A basic I PAK VH tutorial Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool Amore advanced tutorial using Font tools Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool This chapter serves only as a guide Your results may vary Ensure that the Vision HAWK Smart Camera and I PAK VH software have been properly installed and configured Il PAK VH User Manual 2 1 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials Setup Mode and Run Mode Il PAK VH incorporates two primary functional states Run Mode and Setup Mode Security access is restricted by the current user access level selected Setup Mode Setup Mode allows a Supervisor to perform a Product ChangeOver retrain a Job and view and reset end of batch statistics Setup Mode allows a P
146. al output datums and a script file written in the Perl programming language The Perl Package Script determines the number and type of inputs and outputs The Perl Package Script controls the functionality of the CustomVision Tool CustomVision Tools can perform vision operations because they require a buffer to be input to the Perl Package Script The Custom Vision Tool supports the following scripts e none on page D 6 e Cylinder_UnWarp on page D 7 e Dynamic_Binarize on page D 11 e FailCode on page D 14 e FindRotated on page D 14 Il PAK VH User Manual D 5 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques none The none script is the default Perl Package Script used by a CustomVision Tool when inserted into a Job This script has no functionality FIGURE D 3 The none Script Custom Step Avail Package Scripts none v Re Parse Package Script Recreate Step Datums Avail Package Scripts This property allows selection of a Perl Package Script for the step to use You can select none Cylinder_UnWarp on page D 7 Dynamic_Binarize on page D 11 FailCode on page D 14 FindRotated on page D 14 Re Parse Package Script When clicked this button causes the package script to be parsed Whenever any changes to the script files are made this button needs to be clicked to make these changes take effect Note I
147. alculated using the ROI of the step This calculation uses edge detection to determine foreground and background information The calculated threshold is displayed in the Threshold property When disabled no calculation is done The threshold used by the step is whatever value is in the Threshold property The Edge Energy Threshold and Threshold Adjustment properties are not used when Auto is disabled Default Enabled e Edge Energy Threshold Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This property is only used when Auto Thresholding Enabled is enabled Default 20 Range 0 to 255 e Threshold Adjustment Offsets or biases the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto is enabled Default bias 0 Range 64 to 64 e Threshold Displays the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto is enabled When Auto is disabled the value of this property is the threshold that is used by the step Default 135 Range 0 to 255 7 26 Il PAK VH User Manual as FontSymbol ComputePolarity Tab The ComputePolarity tab of the OCVFont is part of the LayoutStep that is used for automatic segmentation of the image when enabled as shown in Figure 7 24 rt O c D im 2 x gt O eo FIGURE 7 24 ComputePolarity Properties Page OCVFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Polarity e Polarity Allows the
148. ally creates the Jobs folder as follows c 2 _ iS 3 Q mm gt lt D C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Jobs Il PAK VH software performs special functions to make using the Visionscape device easier In the case of Font Tools and Data Matrix Tools where many users are often interested in verifying the inspection strings just read Il PAK VH automatically adds steps to your Job to get this information out of the Visionscape device and on to the PC user interface for Sequence Steps Using Outputs Another useful automatic feature of Il PAK VH is Scan for Sequence Steps Using Outputs which checks the logic so that when a snapshot step fails e g camera unplugged the outputs used in sequence steps are set to false This prevents an inspection from passing when monitoring sequence step outputs when the snapshot fails Il PAK VH User Manual 1 9 Chapter Il PAK VH Inspection Software Systems Software Systems simulate actual Visionscape hardware They support the Load Images from File mode when acquiring images A Software System can only get and set virtual IO Jobs that run on a Software System run locally on the PC using its CPU and memory A USB drive is required to run Jobs on a Software System fully otherwise the Jobs can be loaded or modified and run on a Software System but they cannot be saved Although a software system is capable of loading a Job that was created for any Visionscape D
149. angeLayout Successful Lot ChangeOver Tool Path VisionSystem Inspection1 Snapshotl OCVFont Tool GMA0222 Edit Code M Show Full Path Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver Il PAK VH User Manual 7 101 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 7 84 ChangeLayout Successful Details Lot ChangeOver Tool Path VisionSystem Inspection1 Snapshot OCVFont Tool GMA0222 Edit Code NV Show Full Path Status Success Font Tool Lot ChangeOver ChangeLayout Debug Whether good or erroneous data is sent to Il PAK VH these debug windows help users by providing an Ethernet debugging tool that allows Programmers to verify that string s are sent using correct formatting l PAK VH tries to specify the exact syntax error if any of the input Il PAK VH displays and highlight errors on the I PAK VH screen for a longer period of time so that you know that a ChangeLayout error has occurred This causes user intervention to acknowledge the bad data When I PAK VH displays the Change Lot screen users can clearly see the newly entered strings to further provide debug assistance 7 102 Il PAK VH User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command Ethernet ChangeLayout Error Messages In the event of data errors the error messages shown in Table 7 5 are displayed TABLE 7 5 Ethernet Error Messages Error Message Change Layout Error Missing the Tool Name or the Layout Meaning
150. anges the file will be corrupt and I PAK VH will not read it in without error The Jobs are backed up automatically within Il PAK VH so even if the file gets corrupted you can easily recover How safe are the Configuration and Statistics files from being compromised In addition to the read only property for the support files Configuration and Statistics files Il PAK VH hides these files This offers a more secure method of saving support files that will prevent editing records The data contained in the Statistics file is completely free from editing because it is written into the encrypted Audit Trail Additionally these files can be made into Acrobat Reader PDFs that can be stored on the local drive or archived to another drive network or CD Can this data be saved to a non editable format The Audit Trail the Configuration file and the Statistic file can be made into Acrobat Reader PDFs that can be stored on the local drive or archived to another drive network or CD How do I know who made the last batch or change The Configuration Data and Statistics files are updated to include the last login name and timestamp to the files This Statistics information is written to the Audit Trail file as well including that login data Il PAK VH User Manual 5 21 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 My company wants the number of login failures to be 3 but Il PAK VH defaults to 5 What can do Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt
151. approved and the training sequence ends External Input of Match String Protocol The I PAK VH OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool use a standard communications protocol in communicating with an external device Header Line Protocol The header line of data has the following form VisionDevice Insp Snapshot FontTool lt cr gt lt lf gt e VisionDevice The is replaced by the actual device number such as 1 inside the Il PAK VH system This is the symbolic name of the VisionDevice Insp The is replaced by the actual Inspection number from the Job such as 1 This is the symbolic name of the Inspection Snapshot The is replaced by the actual snapshot number from the Job such as 1 This is the symbolic name of the snapshot e FontTool The is replaced by the actual FontTool number from the Job such as 1 This is the symbolic name of the FontTool Note When OCVRuntimeTool is used FontTool is replaced with OCVRunTool Input Line Protocol The prompt for input line has the following form Input Line N lt cr gt lt lf gt where Nis the line number for the string to be received 7 88 Il PAK VH User Manual Input and Output Inspection String Protocol The input and output inspection string has the following form Transmit Final Layout String Protocol The Transmit Final Layout String first sends the line as Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command 1 lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt
152. archival and restoration of its product definition files Refer to your CD RW hardware documentation for installation and operation instructions A 10 Il PAK VH User Manual appennxe Connecting Smart Cameras toaPC This section describes how to connect smart cameras to a PC and how to configure network properties Il PAK VH User Manual B 1 u Eo Em YH D2 So oS F SG OO Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC Setting the PC to Use a Static IP Address e Open Windows Control Panel and navigate to Network and Internet gt Network and Sharing Center e In the Network and Sharing Center click the Local Area Connection 1 In the Local Area Connection Status window click Properties 2 e In the Local Area Connection Properties window select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and click Properties 3 ACEA GO gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center X 4 Search Control Pane p Control Panel H ontrol Panel Home 4 P 5 View your basic network information and set up connections c See full map 4 Local Area Connection Status E Tr x 4 General Unidentified network Internet Connection pp Connect or disconnect M ji j x IPv4 Connectivity Local Area Connection Properties IPv6 Connectivity hae Access type No Internet access 1 Media State z Connections W Local Area Connection Connect using Duration Speed amp Intel R PR
153. are written to the PC registry to preserve their values Therefore it is imperative that customers use a UPS with an I PAK VH system to avoid losing the counters if a power interruption should occur while Il PAK VH is in Run Mode Interval counters are not saved with the Job or to the registry 4 8 Il PAK VH User Manual Run Mode Window Runtime Change Lot Change Lot functionality allows a Programmer or Supervisor to quickly change the Data Matrix Tool match string the Symbology Tool match string the OCRTrainableFont Tool match string and the OCVFont Tool layout string without retraining the tools in the Job When you click Change Lot a prompt for a password is displayed If a valid password is entered the Change Lot dialog box is displayed At this point all inspections are stopped and the I PAK VH enters an off line state You should be sure that your production line is stopped when you are performing a Change Lot operation Once complete all inspections will be restarted and I PAK VH will be back On Line Y 3 c D tan en v e c 5 Password 21 CFR Part 11 Access If 21 CFR Part 11 is active you are prompted for user name and password You must enter a valid user name with the correct password to access the Change Lot dialog box If System Settings gt General gt Enable User Logins for Training Approvals is enabled the user name entered must have training authority When Ena
154. ate a Product Acquire Right click on Acquire 1 A screen similar to the one in Figure 3 34 is displayed FIGURE 3 34 Create a Product Step Program Insert A Step Insert A Step pew Sem IntelliT ext OCR Tool TwoPt Locator IntersectLines Meas VarAssign Step LeastS quaresCircle Fit Vector Tool LeastS quaresLine Fit VectorGroup Tool Loop Step Verify AIMDPM ISO29158 MearLP Filter Verify 15015415 Tool OCR Tool Verify 15015416 Tool OCATrainableFont Tool Wait Step OCVFont Tool OC Fontless Tool OCVRuntimeT ool OnePt Locator Projection Tool Pt to Line Distance Rect Warp RobustCircle Fit RobustLine Fit Sequence Step Sobel Filter Symbology Tool Template Find ThreePt Locator Tolerance Meas Trajectory Step Highlight a step in the Insert A Step dialog box and click OK A screen similar to the one in Figure 3 35 is displayed 3 48 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings FIGURE 3 35 Create a Product OCVFontless Tool Added Acquire 1 OCVFontless Tool Wait Step Camera 1 Click OK So O09 o Q 52 ee oY N e Ifyou are finished adding tools to the product click OK A screen similar to the one in Figure 3 36 is displayed e Ifyou want to add more tools right click on Acquire or the last tool you entered to re display the Insert A Step dialog box Continue adding tools as needed When you are finished adding tools to the
155. ather than the Custom Vision Tool See FailCode starting on page D 4 FindRotated The FindRotated script allows you to run the correlation algorithm over a range of angles allowing you to find features that will rotate by more than 5 from the trained orientation The Template Find step in Visionscape runs the correlation algorithm but typically can only find features that will rotate by no more than 5 Using FindRotated FindRotated is used in the same way that the Template Find step is used You will be provided with two ROls e The first ROI represents the template you wish to train on e The second ROI represents the search area the area within which you will search for the template You must train this step before you can use it Insert a Custom Vision tool into your Job and then select the Find Rotated script You should see two ROIs in your image that look something like the ones in Figure D 10 and Figure D 11 Il PAK VH User Manual Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool w FIGURE D 10 Two ROIs ge c nw 20 rs Z SS Or T a Template ROI amp 2A0693 AY FIND 9811 AA CHO3980 i KOREA Unfortunately the ROIs are not labeled so it is confusing to understand which of the ROIs is used for the Template and which is used for the search area We have labeled the ROIs in Figure D 10 If we wanted to train the tool to find the KOREA text in our sample i
156. ay select any or all of these inspection results to be saved to a file Save Runtime Results to a File affects inspection time and system throughput The fewer items that are saved the more efficient Il PAK VH will be If the trigger method is set to continuous or the inspection is triggered at high rates the flood of inspection results can bog down the PC s resources making the mouse unresponsive After this product s tools are trained you can go into Run Mode Using a program such as Notepad you can verify the inspection results are being output from I PAK VH to the file specified as shown in Figure 3 56 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings FIGURE 3 56 Sample Save Results Output P InspectionResults dat Notepad File Edit Format Yiew Help Hawk SnapshotOCVFontLess OCV Results O Status Hawk Snapshot OCVFontLess OCY Results 1 xLoc Hawk Snapshot OCVFontLess OCV Results 2 YLoc Hawk Snapshot OCVFontLess OCV Results 3 xOffset Hawk Snapshot OCVFontLess OCV Results 4 YOffset Hawk Snapshot OCVFontLess OCV Results 5 Corr Match Hawk Snapshot OCVF ontLess OCV Results 6 Sharpness Hawk Snapshot OCVF ontLess OCV Results Sharp Hawk Snapshot OCVFontLess OCV Results 8 Contrast Hawk Snapshot OCVF ontLess OCY Results 9 Contrast Hawk Snapshot OCVF ontLess OCV Results 10 Num Breaks Zo O09 o Q sv w Q oY N The format of these inspection results is
157. ay value Threshold Offset An offset that will be applied to the calculated binary threshold e Polarity Determines the polarity of the pixels in the output buffer e Method Selects whether you want the threshold to be based on the average or the median gray value Results e Average Calculated average gray value RunLoThr When polarity is set to Bright this will hold the actual threshold that was used to binarize the image in other words it will be the average or median gray value the Offset value When polarity is set to Dark this will always be 0 RunHiThr When polarity is set to Dark this will hold the actual threshold that was used to binarize the image in other words it will be the average or median gray value the Offset value When polarity is set to Bright this will always be 255 Il PAK VH User Manual D 13 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques e Median The calculated median gray value e ComputedGray This is the computed gray value that was combined with the offset value to produce the threshold In other words if the selected Method was Average this will be equivalent to the Average output datum and if the selected Method was Median this will be equivalent to the Median output datum FailCode The FailCode script does not draw any graphics nor does it need an ROI so it is best used with the Custom Step r
158. be accepted Increasing this value has a rapid effect This number should not be set greater than 2 7 104 Il PAK VH User Manual as OCV Tips OCVRuntimeTool The OCVRuntimeTool is the vision step that actually performs the inspection of a code e Individual Symbol Search X Increasing these values allows individual characters to move more in relation to one another rt 3 D i X gt O e Individual Symbol Search Y Increasing these values allows individual characters to move more in relation to one another Layout Step Allowed Overlap During Read Increasing this value from the default value of 5 allows characters to be identified during the train step when their character boxes overlap e Min Read Match Decreasing the 65 default value allows characters to be identified at train time when they vary significantly from what was trained into the font library Il PAK VH User Manual 7 105 Chapter OCV Reference Converting Jobs with Embedded OCVFonts FIGURE 7 85 Converting Jobs with Embedded OCVFonts Change Product Current Product Test2 Available Products Product Description OldF onttoolJob Job Created Mittwoch 22 August 2007 08 20 38 mySample Change Lot Cancel Jobs created with Version 2 3 or earlier that contain font based OCV tools are updated to use the new OCVFont method when those Jobs are read into Il PAK VH Wh
159. ble User Logins for Training Approvals is e Off Operators can Change Lot in Run Mode e On Operators cannot Change Lot in Run Mode Password Standard Access If 21 CFR Part 11 is not active you are prompted to enter either the current Supervisor password or the current Programmer password You must enter a valid password to access the Change Lot dialog box Il PAK VH provides a unique default password 1101 that allows an Operator who does not have Supervisor or Programmer access to use the Change Lot function This allows the Operator to perform a Change Lot but does not allow the Operator to enter Setup Mode Il PAK VH User Manual 4 9 Chapter Run Mode Reference Change Lot Dialog Box The Run Mode Change Lot dialog box is the same as the Setup Mode Change Lot dialog box If there are no Data Matrix Tools Symbology Tools OCVFont Tools or OCRTrainableFont Tools in the product definition the Change Lot dialog box is displayed empty with none of the tool or string fields filled in Figure 4 8 Otherwise the dialog box displays the tools names and the associated match or layout strings Figure 4 9 FIGURE 4 8 Lot ChangeOver Empty Lot ChangeOver Tool Path r Status No tool available to change lot ial If Show Full Path is checked I PAK VH displays the full path to the tools as shown in Figure 4 9 FIGURE 4 9 Full Path to Tools Shown Lot ChangeOver A Tool
160. bol from the symbol list This symbol will determine the best font It is important to select a complex uniquely shaped character For example a 5 would be better than a 0 or a 1 The character should appear in the current image and be crisply formed and printed i e no smudges or blurring Positioning the OCVFont Shape The OCVFont shape of the currently selected font sets up the automatic font selection and scaling process This shape needs to be positioned and sized around a character in the current image that matches the character selected in the symbol list It is important that the shape be positioned and sized very tightly over the selected character do not leave any border This ensures that the system will not mistake any part of other characters as being part of the selected character Note You may find it easier if the trained symbol shapes are not displayed Click Done and uncheck Show Trained Symbol Shapes see Figure 7 9 Tabs for Each Added Symbol on page 7 12 Il PAK VH User Manual as Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts Performing the Automatic Font Selection and Scaling FIGURE 7 15 Ready to Perform Automatic Font Selection and Scaling i iv Q 3 a D im x gt oO e Meeting Your Label ID Available Fonts 87A901 Once a character has been selected and the OCVFont shape has been correctly sized and positioned around that character in the i
161. caling feature is useful when you already know which font needs to be used but the FOV has changed Font scaling allows re sampling of all FontSymbol train data to match the current FOV A scaled version of the OCVFont will be created and the name of the scaled OCVFont will reflect the change in width and height used to perform the scaling By default scaled OCVFonts are stored in the Job file as part of the associated font based tool These scaled OC VFonts can be stored on the disk using the Save Scaled Font button rt 3 D i X gt O Choosing a Symbol Choose the OCVFont that needs scaling from the font list Select a symbol from the symbol list This symbol will determine the changes in width and height that are needed to perform the font scaling The character should appear in the current image and be crisply formed and printed i e no smudges or blurring Positioning the OCVFont Shape The OCVFont shape of the currently selected font sets up the font scaling process This shape needs to be positioned and sized around a character in the current image that matches the character selected in the symbol list It is important that the shape be positioned and sized very tightly over the selected character do not leave any border This ensures that the system will correctly calculate the changes in width and height Note You may find it easier if the trained symbol shapes are not displayed Click Done and unche
162. camera is calibrated its data is saved in the avp file Open Calibration and Save Calibration are a means to extract the calibration data into a file and reload it into a different program For complete information regarding Calibration see Chapter 2 of the Visionscape Tools Reference PDF format installed with Visionscape and available in your PC s C Microscan Vscape Documentation folder Lo O9 g Q 58 w Q oY Image Menu FIGURE 3 6 Image Menu e Open When Open is selected the Open Image dialog box is displayed From here you can open a previously saved I PAK VH image This may be useful for retraining tools or debugging an application with a frozen image e Save When Save is selected the Save Image dialog box is displayed From here you can save an I PAK VH image to your hard drive This may be useful in storing a golden training image or for debugging purposes Il PAK VH User Manual 3 7 Chapter Ki Setup Mode Reference Help Menu FIGURE 3 7 Help Menu I O Debug Open Softkeyboard Visionscape I PAK YH User Manual About visionscape I PAK YH I O Debug This graphical representation is available only in Setup Mode and only at the Programmer access level When I O Debug is selected the Il PAK VH I O Debug diagnostic tool is displayed as shown in Figure 3 8 FIGURE 3 8 I O Debug Diagnostic Display CT O Display x Hawk
163. ck Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General Click to select Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 Type a reason in the Reason for Change dialog box and click OK Click OK again When I PAK VH returns to Setup Mode the 21 CFR Part 11 menu is displayed as shown in Figure 5 2 FIGURE 5 2 21 CFR Part 11 Menu 21 CFR Part1 End of Batch Reports Reconcile Configuration Files Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Il PAK VH User Manual 5 3 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 The I PAK Administrator After 21 CFR Part 11 is enabled the traditional Il PAK VH Programmer and Supervisor passwords will not be used Instead User Login and Passwords will be used Plus the concept of an Il PAK Administrator is introduced An Il PAK Administrator is responsible for creating user accounts and granting access levels to those users Notice also that the 21 CFR Part 11 Administrator menu item becomes active Il PAK Administrator mode allows the I PAK Administrator to define valid users their passwords and their security levels The I PAK Administrator is your Configuration Manager He or she is not a Programmer not a Supervisor and not an Operator Il PAK Administrator User Name I PAKAdmin Il PAK Administrator Password 999999 The I PAK Administrator password is stored in the PC s registry settings and is changeable through the I PAK VH interface Note The I PAK Administrator should be careful
164. ck Show Trained Symbol Shapes see Figure 7 9 Tabs for Each Added Symbol on page 7 12 Performing the Font Scaling Once a character has been selected and the OCVFont shape has been correctly sized and positioned around that character the system is ready to perform the font scaling Click Scale to start the process The system compares the trained width of the selected FontSymbol with the width of the OCVFont box and calculates the required change in width to scale the FontSymbol in X Then the system compares the trained height of the selected FontSymbol with the height of the OCVFont box and calculates the required change in height to scale the FontSymbol in Y Then a new OCVFont is created and given the name of the source OCVFont with the Il PAK VH User Manual 7 19 Chapter OCVFont T OCV Reference addition of the change in width and change in height values For example OldFont_2_ 5 indicates that the OCVFont named OldFont was scaled by increasing the width of the symbols by 2 and decreasing the height of the symbols by 5 Each symbol that is in the source OCVFont is then scaled and added to the new OCVFont When the Train Debug Delay property on the Custom Properties Main dialog box is set to a non zero value the scaled templates and other FontSymbol training details are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen An OCVFont step is a container of one or more FontSymbol steps It trains a
165. cribed in this document e The Auto Segmentation training of OCVFonts is useful for quick demos or to quickly prove out an inspection scenario While the behavior described may cause confusion at train time when using a frozen image the Runtime inspections remain intact The runtime inspections do not use the Sobel Edge Enhancement templates e The default value for Num of Border Spaces to Add may need to be increased to 2 This would give the Automatic Segmentation characters more border space with which to train the characters While this would probably help with the Read Match increasing the border space may cause some symbol overlap in cases where the symbols are close together Microscan recommends manual training of the OCVFont 7 110 Il PAK VH User Manual gt xe c To o BE BN APPENDIX A Installation and Software This section describes how to install Il PAK VH Software and how to integrate an uninterruptible power supply in your application Il PAK VH User Manual A 1 Appendix AW installation and Software System Specifications Il PAK VH supports up to four Vision HAWK Smart Cameras connected to a Windows PC Ensure that you review carefully the PC and network requirements below Recommended PC Requirements e CPU Intel ATOM D2550 1 86 GHz Dual Core or greater RAM 4 GB or greater Minimum 1 USB port Two 100BASE T network connections e Screen Resolution 1024 x 768
166. ct the symbol to be ignored from the Layout box Select IGN from the Font box Click Substitute The symbol is removed from the Layout box and Inspect Chars If you wish to retrain the tool with the OCVRuntimeTool selected click Train Tool in the Setup Mode Train window You can adjust the properties of the tool and retrain until you achieve the desired layout string ff i je I gt lt E 8 Once you are satisfied with the layout shown in the Inspect Chars string click Approve to return to the Setup Mode Train and Tryout wizard window 9 Position the AutoFind box for the OCVRuntimeTool over the area of the image in which the characters are allowed to move rotate This completes the training of the OCVRuntimeTool 10 Click Try All to verify the inspection as shown in Figure 2 47 FIGURE 2 47 Setup Mode Try All ty Next Tool 3 A z Zoomin Try Tool von Previous Net NOM 20 Options rae Led A Miren V snapshot V ocvRuntimeToo Wat Step 0 0 A 233272 linputs Wait time 100 msecs Outputs Last wait period 100 124 msecs 5 26AM Cument Tool OCVRuniimeTool Font Selected NewFont Patt Disabled This runs the Job once allowing you to observe your recently created Job Il PAK VH User Manual 2 39 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials 11 Click Exit Training to Main Setup This returns you to the Setup Mode main
167. cted as an invalid symbol Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range PDF417 Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled Visionscape will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Symbol Length When enabled the PDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read Visionscape will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Codeword Collection Allows the user to determine whether Visionscape will attempt to decode the PDF417 symbol only from the information provided in a single image or in multiple images Il PAK VH User Manual Symbology Tool MicroPDF417 e Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled Visionscape will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid oe we Eg w E lt 5 e Symbol Length When enabled the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read Visionscape will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Pharmacode e Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled Visionscape will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid
168. d UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required e Separator Character Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character e Supplementals Type Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both e EAN Status When enabled outputs EAN Status along with symbol data Enabled by default e UPC E as UPC A Status When disabled Visionscape will output the version E symbols in their encoded 6 character format When enabled Visionscape will format the symbol as either a 12 character UPC A symbol or an EAN 13 symbol depending on the state of the EAN status parameter This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification OCRTrainableFont Tool This tool reads labels and marks and returns string results Any mark and label symbol can be trained incrementally at the time it is first seen or offline Characters and symbols can have any shape or size as long as they can be mapped to an ASCII character There are no limits on the number of characters however character sets must be combined in groups of at most 45 Each set of 45 characters constitutes a single font Execution time is proportional to the number of fonts that read the input mark or label At the Step level the OCRTrainableFont Tool encapsulates the user interface elements to configure the Segment Agent th
169. directory called JobsBackup that is located within your Jobs directory For example this automatic backup directory will be C Microscan Vscape l PAK _VH Jobs JobsBackup In the event of a PC disk error you can recover the avp and avpsys files for your products minus your last edits The file is suffixed with a 1 to further designate that these file copies are one revision behind the current product definition Archiving and Restoring Products Through the I PAK VH interface you can archive and restore products from a CD RW USB device or network drive In the examples and text throughout this document substitute the name of your media for the term CD RW Setting Archival Pathname In the System Settings menu in the Product ChangeOver Activities dialog box you need to specify the path of the archive location For example when using a CD or USB device this path might be D Job Archive Dialog Box When you go to the Product ChangeOver dialog box you ll notice the Archive Restore button Click this button to display the Job Archive dialog box as shown in Figure 3 12 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Change Product FIGURE 3 12 Job Archive Dialog Box Archive Example Job Archive Type So O9 o Q 52 w Q v y N Current Jobs Archived Jobs la castingdmdoal tif castingdmobliquering tif castingwithdm tif lt Restore clinaoodB tif Select All OK In this Job
170. duct dialog box lists pre existing Jobs from the Jobs directory The Supervisor can select from these pre programmed Products by scrolling the list selecting the Product and clicking OK 3 10 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Change Product Once selected the product is read in from disk and all devices used by the product must be discovered and taken control of for a description of this process see I PAK VH Start up Procedure Typical on page 1 11 Once loaded the new Product name replaces all occurrences of the previously displayed Product name on all windows menus and dialog boxes Any changes to the former Job that were not saved are discarded So o9 c o a 52 i vy 9 The product description text up to 1000 characters is stored with the product definition in the avpsys file This allows each product definition to have a unique description The Supervisor can perform a Change Lot by clicking Change Lot The Supervisor can archive or restore pre programmed Products from a specified archive path such as a CD RW or network path by clicking the Archive Restore button Click Cancel to exit without changing the Product This remainder of this section describes the following e Change Lot Feature starting on page 3 11 e Location of Jobs Folder starting on page 3 13 e Archiving and Restoring Products starting on page 3 14 Change Lot Feature From the Change Product dialog box the Super
171. duct in Figure 3 38 3 52 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings FIGURE 3 38 Inspection Without Snapshot E Inspection 1 Acquire 1 Cami So O9 o a 52 ee oY N Camera Inspection 1 No Snapshot All other aspects of Product creation remain the same Inserting steps into the inspection is accomplished by right clicking on the associated button Train and Tryout Inspections containing no snapshots are selectable from the item list of the Train and Tryout dialog box You can select these steps and use the Tool Settings button to modify the settings for these Inspection steps and any child steps Run Mode Upon entering Run Mode all inspections steps are started Reports are available only for those Inspection steps that contain snapshots Results for inspections that do not contain snapshots are not available for display Upon returning to Setup Mode all Inspection steps are stopped I O Il PAK VH makes no special provisions for setting up Data Valid or Inspection Passed for Inspection steps that do not contain snapshots If these I O points are required set them up manually using the Job Editor in Train and Tryout mode Continue Product Creation by Training the Tools After naming the Product the Programmer will be transferred automatically to the automated training for these vision tools Wizard Training as shown in Figure 3 39 Il PAK VH User Manual 3
172. e The third method is to close and restart Il PAK VH C 6 Il PAK VH User Manual w Ee c oO nn 2o rs 2E SS Or T a appennxo Perl Gems Tips and Techniques Custom Steps and CustomVision Tools allow new steps and tools to be used in Visionscape using Perl an interpreted script language These steps are now available in Il PAK VH with a limited set of Il PAK VH supported Perl language Package Scripts Only the steps illustrated are supported Note PAK VH supports Package Scripts as they are distributed with Il PAK VH software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK VH Il PAK VH User Manual D 1 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool Il PAK VH software allows a Custom Step or CustomVision Tool to be inserted anywhere in a Product Definition The CustomVision Tool has a built in Input Datum for accessing a buffer Input Buffer on which to perform a vision operation The Custom Step does not support an Input Buffer and can only be used for non vision operations Properties Pages Each Perl Package Script has a unique Properties Page You can change the values of the input datums required by the script Every script results in a minimum set of common properties These properties are the only properties of the none script Custom Step The Custom Step consists of opt
173. e PAK VH saves the counters in the PC registry e Click No to simply enter Setup Mode 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration This section allows you to set the 21 CFR Part 11 compliance features for user access control logins and creating an audit trail For complete information about 21 CFR Part 11 see Chapter 3 3 90 Il PAK VH User Manual Advanced Settings 25 Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 Enabling this setting disables the traditional Programmer and Supervisor modes and replaces it with the Il PAK Administrator mode Then an I PAK Administrator defines valid users their passwords and their security levels So O9 c o Q 52 w Q vy The I PAK Administrator is your Configuration Manager He or she is not a Programmer not a Supervisor and not an Operator Il PAK Administrator User Name I PAKAdmin Il PAK Administrator Password 999999 The I PAK Administrator must create the valid user accounts before users can begin using the feature Default Off e Enable Configuration File Audit Trail When this setting is enabled each time the Job definition file is saved to disk a new read only configuration file is saved to the archive directory i e C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Jobs ConfigurationArchives This configuration file is marked with the user name date and time Old configuration files will not be overwritten You can determine changes by looking at sequential configuration f
174. e Using Learned String If the Match String Mismatch Action setting is set to Retry by Learning the Il PAK VH displays the message Retrain the Tool and displays only the Disapprove button This forces you to retrain the tool and allows the string to be entered again rt O D i X gt O FIGURE 7 70 Mismatch Action Retrain the Tool Message Retrain the Tooll If the Match String Mismatch Action setting is set to Retry by Input Il PAK VH displays the message Retry Input and displays only the Input Match String button This forces you to try to input the string again FIGURE 7 71 Mismatch Action Retry Input Message Retry Input If there are no mismatches I PAK VH sets the inspection string to the learned string and displays a message Successful Input FIGURE 7 72 Successful Match String Input Successful Input Transmit Final Inspection String If the Transmit Final Inspection String functionality is enabled the inspection string is sent to the external device First the header line is sent to the device to indicate which tool is sending the string Then the line Final Inspection String is sent followed by the actual inspection string Il PAK VH User Manual 7 87 Chapter T OCV Reference If the tool is an OCVRuntimeTool the runtime OCVFont is trained based on the inspection string When a string is successfully input the layout is automatically
175. e Appearance Flaw Break Failure Initial Residue Failure Final Residue Failure Max Blob Residue Failure B8 ID Test Failure Quad ID Test Failure Break ID Test Failure X Offset Failure Y Offset Failure Setup Mode Viewing of Failures With OCV Failure Tracking enabled a new button OCV Tracking is displayed on the toolbar of the Statistics and Data screen For complete information about OCV Tracking see OCV Tracking on page 3 40 Run Mode Viewing of Failures With OCV Failure Tracking enabled a new button OCV Result Tracking is displayed on the Failure Report dialog box as shown in Figure 3 57 FIGURE 3 57 OCV Result Tracking Button Displayed Snapshot FontTooll Fail Counter 211 000 Snapshot AutoFind1 Fail Counter 212 000 Snapshot FontT ool2 Fail Counter 0 000 Snapshotl BCRT ooll Fail Counter 0 000 OCY Result Tracking When you click this button the OCV Failure Tracking dialog box is displayed This dialog box is the same as the Setup Mode dialog box except that it does not allow saving the data to a file see Figure 3 24 OCV Failure Tracking Dialog Box on page 3 41 3 80 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings Loading New Jobs When a new Job is loaded and OCV Failure Tracking is enabled any existing Individual Results dialog boxes are removed from Il PAK VH Then the Job is scanned for OCV tools For each OCV tool found the OCVResultsDm is selected for
176. e FOV Once the layout is learned the OCVRuntimeTool creates a new OCVFont called a Runtime Font by training a new FontSymbol at each layout position using the current image data The OCVRuntimeTool expects to find the symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the data from the Runtime Font to verify the quality of the characters being inspected The OCVRuntimeTool compensates for day to day changes in On line print and helps minimize false rejects The OCVRuntimeTool can be used when inspecting Date Lot codes OCVFontlessTool An OCVFontless Tool does not require an OCVFont Instead it determines the location of characters in the FOV 7 4 Il PAK VH User Manual using a blob analysis technique It then stores training data for each character location as an OCVSymbolStep The OCVFontless Tool expects to find the symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the trained data to verify the quality of the characters being inspected The OCVFontless Tool checks symbol quality and not symbol correctness The OCVFontless Tool can be used on Date Lot codes when only symbol quality is a concern Do not use the OCVFontless Tool to inspect Component ID codes Table 7 1 as Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts rT 3 a D i X gt O contains usage hints Note When placing the ROI around the code to inspect be sure to leave quiet zone area on either side of the code
177. e FeatExtract Agent the classifier inputs Font files and confidence thresholds It also allows the learning of new fonts Font files are stored into text files and will be installed in a Fonts directory at install time inside the Microscan Vscape Jobs directory A font file consists of the following files Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool e A fontname nnd file contains runtime data necessary for OCR to read labels and marks using that Font e A fontname nna file contains the data necessary to incrementally train a font oe we Eg w F lt 5 e A fontname nnc file contains the data defining the Font alphabet ASCII characters and statistics information necessary to support confidence levels By default a special Font called new i e new nnd is always available and is necessary both for creating new fonts and for use at runtime by the OCR tool itself The OCRTrainableFont Tool provides both runtime and training capability for the OCR algorithm e Runtime The tool is responsible for reading a mark or label within an ROI using one or more Fonts and reporting results including the string read and confidence levels for each character read e Training The tool allows the creation of new fonts and allows training and incremental training of existing fonts Theory of Operation When an OCRTrainableFont Tool is inserted into a Visionscape Job the settings that control the
178. e Fit RobustLine Fit Sequence Step Sobel Filter Symbology Tool Template Find ThreePt Locator Tolerance Meas Trajectory Step ff i je a mm gt lt aa TwoPt Locator VarAssign Step Vector Tool VectorGroup Tool Verify AIMDPM ISO29158 Verify 15015415 Tool Verify 1S015416 Tool Wait Step Step 18 Step 17 Cancel 17 Click to select OCVFontless Tool and click OK 18 Right click on Acquire 1 Click to select Wait Step and click OK This displays the Product Creation dialog box shown in Figure 2 15 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 13 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 15 Product Creation OCVFontless Tool Acquire 1 OCYFontless Tool wait Step Camera 1 19 Click OK This returns you to the dialog box shown in Figure 2 13 Product Creation Acquire 1 on page 2 12 20 Click OK This displays the Save Product dialog box as shown in Figure 2 16 FIGURE 2 16 Save Product Dialog Box Save Product x Product Directory Available Products Product Description Job Created Friday June 27 2015 12 33 58 PM Product File Name Cancel 21 Type Test1 and click Save This displays the Setup Mode Training window as shown in Figure 2 17 Il PAK VH User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool 2 ao FIGURE 2 17 Setup Mode Training 5 it I PAK gt Image Masking Tool Help
179. e active 6 8 Il PAK VH User Manual Symbology Tool e Output Format Allows you to set Code 128 Output Format to Standard or Application e Application Record Separator Status When enabled an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN output formatting applies oe we Eg Pe 25 lt 5 e Application Record Separator Character This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output e Application Record Brackets Status If an EAN conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output e Application Record Padding Status This feature causes Visionscape to pad variable length application fields with leading zeroes This is not done for the last field of a symbol Composite e Separator Status Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Separates the linear and the composite component e Separator Character Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character GS1 DataBar e DataBar Expanded Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled Visionscape will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check character If disabled any length would be considered valid e DataBar Expanded Symbol
180. e found characters are included 15 Repeat steps 11 14 to include numerous character samples in the font As characters are included graphics appear in the image for each character FIGURE 6 10 Graphics for Each Character UC rr Taingsteront oo PED Mh P8572 16 Click Acquire New Image to clear the image graphics The custom editor is updated to indicate all of the included characters as shown in Figure 6 11 6 24 Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 6 11 Custom Editor Updated Properties OCRTrainableFont Tool xj Font Font Name Sample_Font m Characters Not trained Created 6 13 2007 Alle jle EFE LLM Select Font Niol fell tsimmi DZ m Text or Character to Include oj llela ele lelle lee PIAA IALIKIL Iie ooe ow tr Lollo lle laL edoae ranns AREEHOORSSOO Ce Number of Trained Characters 4 A 4 A 0 1 5 10 Included Not In Font SE e a Eg E 1 Included 67890 5 samples included 17 Click Learn to train the font using the included characters You may stop training if desired You may train at any time as you include characters 18 When training is complete click Save Font or Revert as shown in Figure 6 12 The time required for training increases as more samples are added The default timeout is 1 minute select shorter or longer training periods from the Ti
181. e is 9600 No Parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit Any of these can be changed using the System Setting dialog box Communications tab RS 232 Syntax for a Single Camera Job Product product_name lt lf gt lt cr gt Date Time mm dd yyyy hh mm ss lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters lt lf gt lt cr gt l lt If gt lt cr gt P lt lf gt lt cr gt R lt lf gt lt cr gt lt eot gt lt lf gt lt cr gt Note EOT is the end of text character chr 4 or Ctrl D in HyperTerminal LF is the LineFeed character chr 10 CR is the Carriage Return character chr 13 A dialog box is displayed to the Supervisor indicating statistics have been sent Il PAK VH User Manual 3 37 Chapter Kil Setup Mode Reference If there are no Inspected Characters in the Job the third line of data will not be present RS 232 Syntax for a Multi Camera Job Each Inspection Step has the following format Complete data is terminated by the lt eot gt lt lf gt lt cr gt Product product_name lt lf gt lt cr gt Date Time mm dd yyyy hh mm ss lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters1 lt lf gt lt cr gt 11 lt If gt lt cr gt P1 lt lf gt lt cr gt R1 lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters2 lt lf gt lt cr gt 2 lt If gt lt cr gt P2 lt lf gt lt cr gt R2 lt lf gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters3 lt lf
182. e of the best matching OCVFont and whether or not it requires scaling to match the current image as shown in Figure 7 16 FIGURE 7 16 Name of Best Matching OCVFont Automatic Font Selection The best font is NewFont which requires scaling Scale and select font now The dialog box also asks if the chosen font should be automatically selected into the current font based OCV Tool e No Results in no scaling being done to the best matching OCVFont e Yes Results in the OCVFont being scaled and the resulting scaled font will become the selected font of the OCV Tool FIGURE 7 17 Scaled_6_10_NewFont Embedded in OCVFont Tool OCVFont Tool AutoFind OnePt Locator LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity Scaled 6 10 NewFont LayoutStep DefautSymb 1 4 4 gt I Apply Automatic Min Sharpness I Apply Automatic Min Contrast M Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pet 90 Symbol Names For Training Choosing Yes will cause the scaled font to be created and inserted into the OCV Tool requiring that the OCV Tool be trained The scaled OCVFont will now be used when training the OCV Tool If none of the OCVFonts were able to match the current image data with at least a 20 score then no best font is found and an error message is displayed Il PAK VH User Manual as Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts Font Scaling The Scale Button The font s
183. e residue image When the system looks at the symbol being inspected it determines the residue of the symbol which is a count of those pixels that differ between the trained template and the current image Based on the value of this property the system determines if the residue is within tolerances If it is not within tolerances the symbol fails Otherwise the system continues on with the rest of the inspection procedure 7 68 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFontless Tool as When Residue Limit Units is set to Percentage Default 100 0 Range 0 0 to 100 0 The value of this property is the smallest percentage of residue pixels relative to the trained On pixel count in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection When Residue Limit Units is set to Pixels Default symbol size Range 0 to symbol size The value of this property is the smallest count of residue pixels in the inspected image that makes the symbol fail the inspection This property is good for catching smudges that are aesthetically poor but would pass after all inspection operations are performed on it A value of 100 or symbol size means initial residue is ignored e Final Residue Method Selects between three algorithms for final residue analysis Total Residue Area This is the default This choice counts all On pixels in the residue image and use the value in Final Residue Limit pixel or percent as the tolerance
184. e sharpness value calculated using the trained template Default Disabled Apply Automatic Min Contrast Allows the FontSymbols trained and added to the Runtime Font to have a contrast tolerance automatically calculated for them This automatically calculated tolerance is equal to 50 of the contrast value calculated using the trained template Default Disabled Allowed Thickening of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to grow along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction away from the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels Allowed Thinning of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to shrink along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction toward the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels 7 48 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVRuntimeTool as e Max Contrast Difference Sets the maximum percentage difference between the calculated contrast values for symbols being inspected by the tool When set to 100 any contrast difference is acceptable If no contrast calculations are performed for the inspected symbols the calculated percent difference is 0 Otherwise the small
185. e simply Snapshot Steps on any target in the system but they are arranged according to the hardware camera on a target system 3 6 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Setup Mode Menus e Open Calibration Reloads calibration data from an existing file When reloading data calibration data is read from the file into the corresponding Snapshot on a one to one basis If the number of Snapshots does not equal the number of calibration data objects in the file then as many Snapshot steps that can receive calibration data do so e Save Calibration Saves calibration data to a separate file When saving data calibration data from each Snapshot Step in every target is saved in one file with a cal extension e Save Calibration as Text Writes the entire calibration World tree to disk as a text file e Calibrate Starts the calibration process on Snapshot x of Camera y e Display Calibrated Results Enables or disables the display of the calibrated measurement results at Runtime in calibrated units Different Snapshot Steps which use the same smart camera are considered different views of the camera and can be calibrated individually or as a group The different camera menus under Calibrate list the names of each Snapshot in the corresponding target When you click one of these menus the Calibration Wizard from the Calibration Manager control is displayed and you can calibrate the camera view When the smart
186. each symbol position there are several ways that an inspection can fail e The symbol cannot be located The symbol can fail because the sharpness value is out of tolerance The symbol can fail because the contrast value is out of tolerance The symbol can fail because a break larger than the user specified size appears in the character The symbol failed an ID Test It could not be determined that the correct symbol was present The symbol can fail the initial residue check The symbol can fail the final residue check either or both methods This residue analysis allows for detection of the following Symbol has become thicker or thinner Symbol has holes or missing features Symbol holes are filled in Symbol contains additional or stray markings 7 46 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVRuntimeTool 7 FIGURE 7 34 OCVRuntimeTool Properties Page 2 9 5 A 5 0 OCVRuntimeT ool AutoFind OnePt Locator LayoutStep AutoT hreshold E ow X a j A g Fale Default Datum Order 2 OCVRuntimeTool Inputs T Use AutoFind vi g AutoFind Pin 1 Index 1 g AutoFind Pin 2 Index 999 i Apply Automatic Min Sharpness L i Apply Automatic Min Contrast J7 fay Max Contrast Difference 100 g Allowed Thickening of Symbol 0 g Allowed Thinning of Symbol 0 g Individual Symbol Search x 3 fay Individual Symbol Search Y 3 y4 Test For Character Breaks C T Runtime ID Checking w T Enable Mask Output T
187. emo Mode you need to copy Job Font and image files to other locations 1 Copy the Job avp avpsys files From C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Demo To C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Jobs After copying these files select all of the AVP and AVPSYS files in this directory Right click on any file and select Properties Turn Off Uncheck the Read Only attribute Click the OK button Copy the font ocv files From C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Demo To C Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts After copying these files select all of the OCV files in this directory Right click on any file and select Properties Turn Off Uncheck the Read Only attribute Click the OK button Create the C demo_img folder Copy the image tif files From C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Demo To C demo_img Check Jobs Before Running Demo Mode Before using Demo Mode use Change Product to load the Job A Device Error dialog box may be displayed Click the Select a Different Device button and choose the smart camera that should run this Job If the Save Product dialog box appears click the Yes button You need to disable Enable Failed Image Queue and set the image upload rate before you use Demo Mode a Go to Setup Mode Il PAK VH User Manual Demo Mode Jobs b Click Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results c Uncheck Enable Failed Image Queue v oO o D m d For Image
188. emplate 0 055 td Binarization Mean Factor ce i i obo Binarization Dynamic Range k M 1 000 Scaling Factor a Match String Binary Threshold Mode FixedTemplate gt 2 gt 0 055 Binarization Mean Factor 1 LO 0 500 Binarization Dynamic Range j y 1 000 Scaling Factor Scaling Decrease Usage Example 1 Consider the following large dot mark The mark has good contrast and does not require binarization optimization but it does fail segmentation This particular mark is 130 pixels high causing the text segmentation to identify entire characters improperly By reducing the scaling to 0 5 proper segmentation becomes possible The 0 5 scaling reduces the height to 65 pixels and segmentation is successful although ideally this symbol would be captured at a lower resolution for optimal performance Bit 3 pmb rsh i o Stes i R aag wwe iw pple 8 Lay 6 42 Il PAK VH User Manual IntelliText OCR Example 2 Consider the following large mark with image noise and a wide dynamic change across the ROI The automatic binarization selection works well but the low signal to noise ratio on the left side of the mark causes the C to fail This could be optimized by fixing the binarization SE e a ce F lt 3 As this mark is approximately 80
189. empt it eet Sst aus Geet Pat ioe feat S00 fs IV Enable Saving Stats and Config Files from Stats Menu J Use OnScreen Keypad instead of PE Keyboard Menu Settings Streamline Menus Show All Menu Options Advanced Users nable Change Lot In Run Mode Automatic Open Softkeyboard Il PAK Windows Setting IV Enable Desktop Turn off Always on Top J Enable I PAK to be Minimized r Config File Format US Letter Format C amp 4 Format Il PAK System Name System Name default Observe the default settings All options must be available for training and tryout during this tutorial 15 Make sure Show All Menu Options Advanced Users Figure 2 12 is selected Click OK This displays the Acquire1 window as shown in Figure 2 13 FIGURE 2 13 Product Creation Acquire 1 IPAKVH1 Inspection 1 Acquire 1 Cami 2 12 Il PAK VH User Manual 16 Right click on Acquire 1 This displays the Insert A Step dialog box as shown in Figure 2 14 FIGURE 2 14 Insert A Step Dialog Box Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool N Blob Tool Color Thresholding Filter IntelliT ext OCR Tool IntersectLines Meas LeastS quaresCircle Fit LeastS quaresLine Fit Loop Step MeanLP Filter OCR Tool OCRTrainableFont Tool OC Font Tool OCVFontless Tool OC RuntimeT ool OnePt Locator Projection T ool Pt to Line Distance Rect Warp RobustCircl
190. empty IV Enable Failed Image Queue Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup 3 a Number of Images in Queue Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second C Maximum 2 4 cs Training lt I AutoS ave Product Definition after Re Training 4 Reset Statistics after re training lt I Reset Failures after re training Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout I Go directly between RunMode and Training C Show One Tool at a time in Train and Tryout OCY Training Automatic Training for Multiple OCYFontT ools Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT ools External Communications Timeout 60 Seconds Match String Mismatch Action Use Input Sting ES V Keyboard Input of Match String Transmit Final Inspection String By default the Keyboard Input of Match String checkbox item is not checked which means that I PAK VH expects no keyboard match string input for the OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool When enabled checked Il PAK VH expects a match string to be input by the keyboard whenever an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool is trained OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool Training The I PAK VH OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool use the Keyboard Input of Match String when enabled in the training sequence 7 78 Il PAK VH User Manual Keyboard Input of Match String a When Keyboard Input of Match String is enabled OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool training is uncha
191. en the calculated contrast values for symbols being inspected by the tool When set to 100 any contrast difference is acceptable If no contrast calculations are performed for the inspected symbols the calculated percent difference is 0 Otherwise the smallest contrast from the inspected symbols is divided by the largest contrast from the inspected symbols This value is then subtracted from 1 to get the percentage difference If the calculated the difference is larger than the value of Max Contrast Difference the inspection fails rt 3 D i X gt O eo Default 100 Range 0 to 100 e Allowed Thickening of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to grow along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction away from the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels Allowed Thinning of Symbol Determines the number of pixels that a symbol is allowed to shrink along its perimeter Residue will be ignored if it is found in the region between the edge of the symbol and the set number of pixels away from the edge in the direction toward the center of the symbol Default 0 pixels Range 0 to 10 pixels e Individual Symbol Search X Determines the width of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the
192. en the old Job is read in any OCVFonts found in an existing OCVFontFolder are saved to the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder using the font name found in the Job If a font with that name already exists you are asked whether or not to overwrite the existing font FIGURE 7 86 Overwrite Existing Font Dialog Box Saving Fonts x Overwrite Existing Font OCVFont2 Click Cancel to Skip Saving This Font No Cancel e Clicking Cancel causes the font to not be saved e Clicking Yes causes the font being read to overwrite the existing one e Clicking No causes a prompt to appear so that you can enter a unique name for the font being saved 7 106 Il PAK VH User Manual Troubleshooting FIGURE 7 87 Enter a Unique Name Dialog Box Dialog x Enter a Unique Name For This Font N O D i 2 x gt O 0 When the old Job is read in any font based OCV tool found is modified so that the LayoutStep s Select Font property has the correct font chosen This allows old Jobs to be loaded and run without requiring a retrain of the font based OCV tools Troubleshooting Training Font Based Tools Read Match To reproduce the behavior Visionscape 4 0 0 was used We believe that this behavior is consistent across all versions of Visionscape The Behavior 1 First train the OCVFont In the example given the TEXT02 TIF was used to train characters L 2 A
193. ent from the external device to I PAK VH The communications can be accomplished through RS 232 or Ethernet Note Enabling Match String mode automatically disables the ignore and substitute character functionality of PAK VH The OCVFontless Tool does not support the Match String feature Enabling External Input of Match String Il PAK VH software allows the External Input of Match String feature and related functionality to be enabled By default these features are disabled Il PAK VH User Manual Chapter T OCV Reference FIGURE 7 59 Enabling External Input Feature Product ChangeO ver Activities V Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver V Reset Failures on Product ChangeOver Archive Path ly MV_NASHUA deviws370 prod Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot I Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Results Reporting Enabled RS 232 Runtime Results Save Runtime Results to a File Enable OC Failure Tracking MV Report RS 232 ERROR when Inspection Result is empty MV Enable Failed Image Queue Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup 3 a Number of Images in Queue Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second C Maximum 2 4 C8 Training MV AutoS ave Product Definition after Re Training IV Reset Statistics after re training IV Reset Failures after re training F Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout Go directly between RunMode and Training F
194. ent without the check character Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled Visionscape will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Symbol Length When enabled the check character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Codabar Start and Stop Match Status When disabled Visionscape will decode Codabar symbols whether or not the start and stop characters are the same When enabled Visionscape will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same Start and Stop Output Status When disabled the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol When enabled the start and stop characters will be present in the data output of the decoded symbol Large Inter character Gap Status When disabled the spaces between characters or the inter character gap are ignored during the decode process Note If the inter character space is large enough to be considered a margin the symbol will not decode regardless of this parameter s setting Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled Visionscape will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled Visionscape will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn t match the fixed length Symbol Length This is the va
195. enu option brings up the ROI Masking Tool dialog box as shown in Figure 3 19 FIGURE 3 19 ROI Masking Tool Dialog Box ROI Masking Tool The dialog box allows a mask to be drawn into the buffer Then the associated tool uses this mask at run time Only tools that have input mask capabilities in other words Blob Flaw etc can use the ROI Masking Tool This dialog box allows you to select a pen style and drawing style for drawing a mask directly into the buffer You can also use the Fill Style or Eraser Style to fill an enclosed area or erase part of the drawn mask e Fill ROI Fills the entire ROI Clear ROI Clears the entire ROI When editing the mask is complete you must close the ROI Masking Tool to continue with Train and Tryout activities Il PAK VH User Manual 3 31 Chapter Ki Setup Mode Reference Statistics and Data The Statistics and Data button displays the Statistics and Data Toolbar as shown in Figure 3 20 Refer to the descriptions on page 3 32 through page 3 42 FIGURE 3 20 Statistics and Data Toolbar Clear nee an Save Transmit Eie Preview Clos i Statistics File Fe Images Statistics Fle Statistics ii Statistics This remainder of this section describes the following e Clear Statistics starting on page 3 32 e Save Stats File starting on page 3 33 e Save Config File starting on page 3 33 e Save Images starting
196. ep tab in the right pane 8 Click to select Automatic Segmentation 9 Move the Custom Properties dialog box so that you can see the image and the training box 10 Position the training box over all the characters in the image to be included as shown in Figure 2 42 2 i fe a I gt lt aa FIGURE 2 42 Positioning the Training Box Over the Characters EO matom gt gt 4 I SEP 2008 EnA 11 Click Train Symbol s on the Custom Properties dialog box to start the training process As each symbol is located a green box is placed around the character in the image Figure 2 43 and the Symbol Name dialog box is displayed prompting you to type a unique name for that symbol FIGURE 2 43 Training Symbols S Already Trained E Yet to be Trained 12 Enter a name for the symbol and click OK For example for the first symbol enter S for the second symbol enter E and so on Continue performing this step until all symbols have been added Each symbol is stored as part of the OCVFont After you click OK the current box turns red and a green box is placed around the next character in the image Click Skip to pass over a character that is a duplicate You can Cancel training at anytime in which case no more symbols are added to the OCVFont Il PAK VH User Manual 2 35 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials 13 After all symbols are trained click Save Font to
197. er that will be returned from the font Single Character reading process when no match can be made within Two or More Characters the selected font Default Threshold This value is the threshold above which a pixel s value Single Character must be for it to be considered a light pixel If the Two or More Characters Adaptive Thresholding property is enabled this value is ignored but the calculated threshold will be displayed Default 1 Threshold Bias This value will be added to the Threshold value before Single Character a comparison is made to determine whither a pixel is Two or More Characters light or dark Default 0 OCR Font Training 1 In Il PAK VH click Editor 2 Select the OCRTrainableFont tool 3 When an OCRTrainableFont Tool is present in a Job select Font Editor see Figure 6 3 Il PAK VH displays the font editor interface as shown in Figure 6 4 This editor is used for all font creation and training Il PAK VH User Manual 6 19 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 6 3 Font Editor Button Access Level Date Time Programmer 11 18 2018 02 51 PM Zoom In Exit Training Options Acquire to Main Setup Zoom Out FIGURE 6 4 Custom Editor m Graphical view m Numeric view Display font histogram Display character array Undo Last Include perties OCRTrainableFont Tool m Font os ot a ie ule Font Name OCRTFDe
198. erence PAK VH supports a limited set of Perl Language Package Scripts These scripts allow changing the functionality of a Custom Step or CustomVision Tool by simply selecting a different script Note I PAK VH supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the I PAK VH software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by Microscan See Appendix D Perl Gems Tips and Techniques for full details about Perl Inspection Steps Without Snapshots Il PAK VH allows you to use Inspection steps in a product definition even when those Inspection steps contain no snapshot child steps Inspection steps without snapshots are useful when I O handling is required outside of the vision inspections For example an Inspection step could be set up to pulse a virtual I O point That virtual I O point could be used by the vision inspections as a trigger signal Product Creation The Product creation flow chart allows you to insert an Inspection step that does not contain a snapshot step 1 When you right click SWSYS1 the Add Inspection 1 No Snapshot menu item is displayed as shown in Figure 3 37 FIGURE 3 37 Selecting Add Inspection 1 No Snapshot a aaa dd Inspection 1 Acquire 1 m Add Inspection 1 No Snapshot Delete Inspection 1 Delete Inspection 1 Wo Snapshot 2 Click Add Inspection 1 No Snapshot Your Product looks like the Pro
199. ess IP address 192 168 0 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Validate settings upon exit me x cancel _ Note Although you ve chosen an IP address of 192 168 0 254 this is not the only IP address that will work The important point to remember is that the network portion of your chosen IP address must match the network portion of the addresses you assign to your Vision HAWK Smart Cameras The network portion of the IP address is defined by the subnet mask so to use the example above 192 168 0 represents the network number and the value 254 represents the host number It is this last number the host number that must be unique for each of the devices you connect to your switch e Click the OK button when finished Click the Close button two times to close the remaining windows Your PC is now using the Static IP address 192 168 0 254 Il PAK VH User Manual B 3 Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC Setting the Vision HAWK to Use a Different Static IP Address By default Vision HAWK Smart Cameras are configured to use a static IP address of 192 168 0 10 with a subnet of 255 255 255 0 If multiple smart cameras are connected to an I PAK system then each smart camera must have a unique static IP address Start AutoVISION 1 Default Progra
200. est contrast from the inspected symbols is divided by the largest contrast from the inspected symbols This value is then subtracted from 1 to get the percentage difference If the calculated difference is larger than the value of Max Contrast Difference the inspection fails Default 100 Range 0 to 100 e Individual Symbol Search X Determines the width of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol width to get the search width rt 3 D i X gt O Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels e Individual Symbol Search Y Determines the height of the search area for individual symbols This number is doubled and added to the symbol height to get the search height Default 3 pixels Range 0 to 50 pixels e Test For Character Breaks Enables and disables the checks for character break appearance flaws Default Disabled Runtime ID Checking Enables and disables the tests that determine if the correct symbol is present at runtime During training of an OCVFont the FontSymbols that are added are checked against each other to determine how similar they are When FontSymbols are found to be very similar tests for determining the presence of the correct symbol are set up and stored with the FontSymbols These tests are only performed at runtime when Runtime ID Checking is enabled Note Microscan highly recommends that you do not use Automatic
201. est font from all fonts in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder for use on the current image see Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Dialog on page 7 14 Revert Reads in the last saved version of the selected font This allows you to undo all changes since the last save Save Font Saves any changes made to the selected font By default the Always Ask To Save Font checkbox is checked e If this box is checked when the Custom Properties dialog box is closed or Select Font is clicked you are asked if any changes should be saved If this box is not checked you must remember to save changes or they will be lost when the dialog box is closed or Select Font is clicked By default the Use Selected Font on Exit checkbox is checked e If this box is checked when the Custom Properties dialog box is closed the OCVFont currently active in the Custom Properties dialog box becomes the selected OCVFont for the font based OCV tool that is being trained in Il PAK VH If this box is not checked no change is made to the selected OCVFont for the tool being trained in Il PAK VH 7 8 Il PAK VH User Manual as Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts Font Manager Dialog Box FIGURE 7 4 Font Manager Dialog Box Font Manager Available Fonts Select New Duplicate Rename Delete The Available Fonts list is the list of all OCVFonts found in the Microscan Vscape Job
202. evice in this version of Il PAK VH the software system simulates a Vision HAWK 752 x 480 CMOS only Therefore creating a Job for a Software System is the same as creating a Job for a Vision HAWK 752 x 480 CMOS A user should be able to create a Job on a notebook PC using a software system for instance and then transfer that Job to a PC connected to a Vision HAWK 752 x 480 CMOS and load and run that Job with little to no modifications There are a few points that you should understand however when creating Jobs on a software system e By default the Acquire Tool is programmed to Load Images from File as there is no digitizer available on a Software System Image List is empty originally and must be populated also When loaded on a physical device you must change the Acquire mode to Acquire from Camera to enable acquisition from the device s CCD sensor e Your Job will be created to use physical IO so you will not be able to test the IO when running on the software system as it does not support physical IO If you wish to test IO you must change your IO assignments to use Virtual IO but if you do remember to change them back to physical when moving your Job to the actual device For complete information about the Acquire and the Vision System step see Chapter 1 of the Visionscape Tools Reference 1 10 Il PAK VH User Manual Il PAK VH Start up Procedure Typical Il PAK VH Start up Procedure Typical os Il PAK VH
203. evious the image displayed is the last runtime image for that smart camera If you are on the Inspection step it will show you the first snapshot s image for that inspection When you click Acquire or Live Il PAK VH replaces that stored runtime image with the newly acquired image Live This is a Supervisor level function Live takes a live image from the smart camera and displays it on the display buffer in the lower part of the screen When you click the button once to activate Live Mode the button appears depressed The image area is updated dynamically with live video of the image Click Live again to exit Live Mode and the button resumes a normal position Live Mode does not wait for a trigger The last image acquired from Live is saved by I PAK VH In the Training and Tryout menu as you go through the Job by clicking Next and Previous the image displayed is the last runtime image for that smart camera If you are on the Inspection step it will show you the first snapshot s image for that inspection When you click Acquire or Live Il PAK VH replaces that stored runtime image with the newly acquired image Zoom In Zoom In causes the currently displayed image to show more detail Zoom Out Zoom Out causes the currently displayed image to show less detail Il PAK VH User Manual 3 23 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference Try Tool This is a Supervisor level function Try Tool causes the currently selected tool
204. f the trained contrast value which is then used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated contrast value must be in order for the inspection to pass rt 3 D i X gt O Il PAK VH User Manual 7 71 Chapter 7 OCV Reference When switched from Gray Level to Percentage the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is updated to be the percentage value that corresponds to the gray level value that it previously held When switched from Percentage to Gray Level the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is updated to be the gray level value that corresponds to the percentage value that it previously held Default Gray Level Minimum Allowed Contrast The Contrast is the measurement that defines the grayscale foreground to background relationship of the symbol data To calculate the contrast value the average gray level value of the background pixels is subtracted from the average gray level of the foreground pixels Whenever Minimum Allowed Contrast has a value of 0 no contrast checks are performed Default 0 Range 0 to 255 Gray Level or 0 to 100 Percentage Auto Threshold Enabled Enables and disables the automatic calculation of a threshold for binarizing the image at both train and run time When enabled the calculated threshold is displayed in the Manual Threshold property When disabled no calculation is done The threshold used for binarizing is whatever value is in the Manua
205. failed statuses of various Steps in your Job into a single 32 bit integer value Typically this is used when you want to cut down on the amount of data that is uploaded from the inspection but also want to know the status of a large number of Steps When added to your Job the FailCode script will present you with a list of 32 inputs on the properties page as shown in Figure D 2 FIGURE D 2 FailCode Script T Bild ein Jg Biz T Bid T Bis Jg sis T BiG J Biz geis Jg Big T Bino W Bini Fe 2in2 Tg Bins Te Bin4 Je eins Jg eins J Bil T Bine Je sing Jg Bian T Biz Tg Bizz Jg siz Te Bil24 T Bias Te Bilas Ve biz T Bias Te Bilas Jg eiad Tg Bist Aval Package Scrpls Zj Recreate Step Datums Custom Step Inputs Outputs i Snepshoat Stotus Truc w Blob Tool Statue True mb Flaw Tool Status True OCVFonticss Tool Status Truc w lt Unzecigned gt lt Unassigned gt w lt Unassigned gt w lt Unossigned gt 5 lt Unaeeigned gt m lt Unassigned gt w lt Unossigned gt w lt Unaecigned gt lt Unassigned gt w Unassigned wb Unassigned lt Unaesigned gt lt Unassigned gt w lt Unassigned gt a lt Unoassigned gt E cUnageigned gt mb lt Unassigned gt w lt Unossigned gt m lt Unceoigned gt a lt Unassigned gt BS lt Unassigned gt wb lt Uncssigned gt w lt Unaecigned gt 5 lt Unassigned gt lt Unassigned gt w lt Unceoigned gt 5 l
206. fault Gray Level Minimum Allowed Sharpness This value determines how crisp a symbol must be to pass inspection It is measured by average edge strength over the entire symbol Typical edge strengths are from 20 to 80 sharpness units Default 0 Range 0 to 256 Gray Level or 0 to 100 Percentage Contrast Limit Units Sets the units for the Minimum Allowed Contrast property When set to Gray Level the value of the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated contrast value must be in order for the inspection to pass When set to Percentage the value of the Minimum Allowed Contrast is used to calculate a percentage of the trained contrast value which is then used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated contrast value must be in order for the inspection to pass When switched from Gray Level to Percentage the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is updated to be the percentage value that corresponds to the gray level value that it previously held Il PAK VH User Manual FontSymbol as When switched from Percentage to Gray Level the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is updated to be the gray level value that corresponds to the percentage value that it previously held Default Gray Level e Minimum Allowed Contrast The Contrast is the measurement that defines the grayscale foreground to background relationship of
207. folder on the hard drive You will need a good image for training 1 Place your example under your smart camera click Live and adjust the camera Click Live again to stop the picture taking The graphics for the OCVRuntimeTool are displayed and the Current Tool panel shows the OCVRuntimeTool A Font Editor button is displayed on the toolbar as shown in Figure 2 38 FIGURE 2 38 Font Editor Button on Toolbar Access Level Date Time Programmer 11 18 2018 02 51 PM Statistics and Data Advanced Settings Min ems Try Tool it Traini Exit Training Options Acquire to Main Setup 2 Because the OCVRuntimeTool requires a font click Font Editor to initiate font training This displays the On Screen Keyboard cancel out of this and the Custom Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 2 39 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 31 N ff A i je a I gt a Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 39 Font Selection And Training Dialog Box Properties OC RuntimeTool Font DefaultFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Selected Font DefaultFont Training Debug Delay fo ms F Apply Automatic Min Sharpness or Symbols Trained in This Font Apply Automatic Min Contrast MV Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pct Select Font Revert Save Font IV Always Ask To Save Font JV Use Selected Font on Exit The Custom Properties dialog box a
208. formation during tryout When enabled inspection data is displayed on the Output line for each OCVSymbol that is part of the OCVFontless Tool Default Disabled Tryout Debug Delay Sets a delay that is used during the display of debug information This delay is the minimum amount of time that the information is displayed Default 1500 ms Selected Symbol Group Selects which symbol group has its symbol properties displayed on the properties page Changing this value updates the property page to display the correct symbol group properties Symbol groups are defined based on the number of On pixels in the templates of the symbols The grouping of symbols is accomplished by setting a range of values Group Min Pixels and Group Max Pixels for a group By default only one symbol group is defined This group contains all OCVSymbolSteps because the range is automatically set to a minimum of 0 pixels and a maximum of 307200 maximum possible in a 640x480 symbol The groups are defined in order of maximum character pixels so that group 2 s Group Min Pixels property is always equal to group 1 s Group Max Pixels property plus one group 3 s Group Min Pixels property is always equal to group 2 s Group Max Pixels property plus one etc The final group is always defined to have a Group Max Pixels equal to 307200 7 60 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFontless Tool as To add a group change Group Max Pixels of the current
209. ge 0 to 255 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 33 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Character Expansions Useful when dealing with print from a dot matrix printer or any print that is broken up in segments The more sparse the print the higher the value of this property should be This allows for the broken print to become solid by expanding the segments until they come together Dilations expand each segment Then erosions decrease the size of the character in every direction except the direction in which the segments have connected Dilations and erosions work together to make the segments solid without making the character fatter Default 0 Range 0 to 9 Filter Bright Defects When enabled runtime inspection of the symbol includes a pre processing step for filtering out any bright defects in the image Default Disabled Bright Defect Range The value is a percentage that determines the threshold at which the bright defect filter processes The threshold is calculated by taking this percentage of the range between the binarizing threshold and 255 This means that the binary threshold would be used when Filter Bright Defects is enabled Default 0 Range 0 to 100 Output Mask Type Used in conjunction with the DynamicMask step The selections are None Adds nothing to the mask Mask Template default Only the foreground area of the symbol is added to the mask Mask ROI The entire area wit
210. gs and then click Edit Tool Set From here add more tools as needed Note You can print the Product Creation Flow Chart e When you insert a tool in Il PAK VH I PAK VH automatically inserts a tool specified Fail Counter into the Job At Runtime this Fail Counter tracks and records when that tool fails Note When you delete a tool in Il PAK VH you need to delete its associated Fail Counter since this is not done for you PAK VH allows you to insert a Custom Step or CustomVision Tool anywhere in a Product Definition The Custom Step consists of optional input datums optional output datums and a script file written in the Perl programming language The Perl Package Script determines the number and type of inputs and outputs The Perl Package Script controls the functionality of the Custom Step Custom Steps cannot perform vision operations because they do not allow for a buffer to be input to the Perl Package Script The CustomVision Tool consists of an input image required optional input datums optional output datums and a script file written in the Perl programming language The Perl Package Script determines the number and type of inputs and outputs The Perl Package Script controls the functionality of the CustomVision Tool CustomVision Tools can perform vision operations because they require a buffer to be input to the Perl Package Script Il PAK VH User Manual 3 51 Chapter KE Setup Mode Ref
211. gt lt cr gt I3 lt If gt lt cr gt P3 lt If gt lt cr gt R3 lt If gt lt cr gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters4 lt lf gt lt cr gt 14 lt If gt lt cr gt P4 lt lf gt lt cr gt R4 lt lf gt lt cr gt lt eot gt lt lf gt lt cr gt A dialog box is displayed to the Supervisor indicating statistics have been sent When there are no Inspected Characters in that inspection the Inspected Character line of data will not be present TCP IP Protocol and Syntax The TCP IP protocol and syntax for a transmission of statistics is as follows TCP IP Protocol I PAK VH is the Server The TCP IP default Server Port is 7000 You can change any of these using the System Setting dialog box Communications tab TCP IP Syntax for Single Camera Job 3 38 Il PAK VH User Manual Statistics and Data 3 Product product_name lt lf gt go Date Time m d yyyy h mm lt lf gt re 2 Inspected Characters inspected_characters lt lf gt D l lt If gt 22 P lt lf gt oO R lt lf gt 7 lt cr gt If there are no Inspected Characters in the Job the third line of data will not be present TCP IP Syntax for a Multi Camera Job Product product_name lt lf gt Date Time m d yyyy h mm lt lf gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters1 lt lf gt 11 lt lf gt P1 lt lf gt R1 lt lf gt Inspected Characters inspected_characters2 lt lf gt 2 lt
212. h or layout string to the contents you just specified for all tools that had the same code Note The Font Tool IGNORE character and Matrix Tool IGNORE character are allowed in this dialog box The Change Lot dialog box can supports up to 99 OCVFont Tools Data Matrix Tools and Symbology Tools in any one Job Il PAK VH User Manual 4 11 Chapter Overruns Run Mode Reference Il PAK VH monitors Run Mode for process and trigger overruns If one occurs the Il PAK VH Overrun dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 4 11 FIGURE 4 11 Visionscape I PAK Overrun Dialog Box Visionscape I Pak Overrun Warning Camera 1 Trigger Overrun Note This should be considered an alarm condition and reported immediately to the Operator s management Efforts should be taken to prevent and correct overruns When using Part 11 alarms must be acknowledged by providing your username and password When overruns occur and their dialog box is displayed but not acknowledged by you you will be alerted to these when you try to exit Run Mode and return to SetupMode The password box will not be displayed until these overrun alarm messages have been acknowledged Additionally the timestamp of the overrun will be displayed in the message A process overrun occurs when images are not processed fast enough The I PAK VH system has a limited set of image buffers When images are processed image buffers a
213. hat you can see the file names and their paths on the archive device of Il PAK VH Il PAK VH User Manual 5 11 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 FIGURE 5 6 Archiving PDF End of Batch Reports Visionscape I PAK x i C Wscape I PAK jobs AuditTrail AuditTrail enc Audit File Removed New Audit File beginning Updated Audit Trail Scheme I PAK 11 18 2018 07 42 30 Visionscape I PAK Start of I PAK Audit Trail Once the archive is complete and you click OK I PAK VH restores this dialog box back to the viewing status of all three files Reset Audit Trail As an I PAK Administrator after creating a PDF of the Audit Trail which can then be stored onto CD or long term storage device you can reset the Audit Trail This prevents the PC from having a sluggish response as it updates the Audit Trail file data Note Create an SOP to determine when if ever you can reset the Audit Trail Reconciliation of Configuration Files A configuration file is a human readable version of the current product s Job definition and its essential data When you click Statistics and Data gt Save Config File Il PAK VH displays the Save Product Data File As dialog box and prompts you for a name for the configuration file The data saved includes Product date time counters Inspected Character String and Fail Counters When Part 11 is enabled the configuration file is read only This is a Supervisor level function Note When there is
214. he OS Shutdown Duration time has expired Il PAK VH User Manual A 9 Appendix AW installation and Software Shutdown Sequence Summary In the following example we are assuming a power outage will stop your triggers and production line Using the UPS and its PowerChute software we will save the Il PAK counts and job information and gracefully shut down the PC so when power is restored you can recover and continue your production run Time Required for Shutdown Sequence If you are trying to quickly gracefully shut the PC down in the event of a power outage using a fully charged UPS set the Time Required for Shutdown Sequence to 59 minutes This will result in a very quick power down Save Counts Program Command File Enable Command File Execution 4 Choose Command File Name c Program Files APC PowerChute Business Edition agent cmdfiles savecounts exe Y Command File Execution Duration 0 30 Minutes Seconds Enable Command File Enabled to run the Microscan provided savecounts exe program that will do the work of saving your counts and job information Manually copy the file savecounts exe from C Microscan Vscape savecounts exe to C Program Files APC PowerChute Business Edition agent cmdfiles savecounts exe Set the Command File Execution Duration to 30 seconds Remember to click Apply so the settings are retained CD RW Support Il PAK VH supports a CD RW drive for the
215. hin the symbol s ROI is added to the mask Apply to All FontSymbols Sets the properties of all symbols in the OCVFont to the values currently shown on the page Apply to Default Symbol Sets the properties of the default symbol of the OCVFont to the values currently shown on the page Il PAK VH User Manual AutoFind The factory default settings work well for most applications When adjustments to Pass Fail limits are required modify the following settings first Final Residue Limit Maximum Flaw Size Increasing Final Residue to 20 allows more variations to be accepted Changing the Final Residue has a gradual effect on Pass Fail Using a high Final Residue such as 50 on small characters such as can reduce false rejects Increasing the Maximum Flaw Size has a pronounced effect on Pass Fail Increasing Maximum Flaw Size allows more character variations to be acceptable For many applications this value should not be set greater than 2 AutoFind Any of the OCV Tools can optionally use an AutoFind This step determines the location of the layout at runtime You can set up an AutoFind to use 1 Pin no rotation or 2 Pins rotation Set up the Pins by selecting which layout positions to use on the OCV Tool properties page Training The AutoFind pin s get trained automatically when the OCV Tool is trained When all characters have been located in the FOV during OCV Tool training the AutoFind Pin1 Inde
216. ics superimposed The Programmer Supervisor is required to train each tool and then click Next to proceed to the next tool Job View The data on the left hand side of the display is your Job As you successfully train each tool in your Job a green check mark appears next to each tool name With AutoStep off you can click directly on a tool in this view for retraining or click on its shape in the image window Note Some steps like the Inspection step update its status after all of the tools in that Inspection have completed This means that the Inspection step could display a red X until the last tool has been trained and then would change to a green check mark Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Train and Tryout Completing AutoStep Mode When all tools have been trained the Next button on the toolbar changes to a Finish button Then the Programmer Supervisor clicks on Finish to complete the training process The Programmer Supervisor is notified when AutoStep training is complete So O9 c o Q 52 w Q vy N AutoStep Off The Programmer Supervisor can select manually the tools to be trained This method of training may also be called random access training With AutoStep off all tools can be displayed graphically in the image window You can click on a tool to select it The Programmer Supervisor can also use the Next and Previous buttons to select a tool Once selected the tool can be trained by clicking Train
217. idence g Minimum Confidence T Limit the Number of Characters Ef Graphics Level Show ROI Only 6 14 Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 6 2 OCRTrainableFont Tool Properties Pages Tool Settings OCRT rainableF ont Tool g Fe P gl Default Datum Order a OCRTrainableFont Tool Inputs InputB uffer Snapshot1 SnapOutputBuffer Ve Match String Enable m g Match String NA EA RO Contains Single Character lt j Ve Character Fills Entire ROI E H Polarity Dark Characters T Adaptive Thresholding wi g Threshold 1 g Threshold Bias 0 g Edge Energy Threshold 20 Kk Discard Boundary Segments wi it Collect All Character Segments Ol FE Selected Font s OCRTFDemo fay Set Unknown Characters to T Pass On No Data El Check Character Confidence wj g Minimum Confidence 70 Kk Limit the Number of Characters Ti Ef Graphics Level Show ROI Only S e a F F lt 5 Il PAK VH User Manual 6 15 Chapter Automatic Identification Table 6 1 lists the OCRTrainableFont Tool properties in alphabetical order and indicates in which property page the property appears either Single Character or Two or More Characters TABLE 6 1 OCRTrainableFont Tool Settings Alphabetized Property Adaptive Thresholding Single Character Two or More Characters Description When this option is checked a Sobel operation will be performed within the search are
218. ighting Controls how the Light Port Connector on the Vision HAWK is used Off No power is supplied to the Light Port Connector On Continuous power is supplied meaning a connected light head would be on all the time Strobe Pulse equal to exposure duration Power Strobe Short 24V pulse e Exposure Time micro secs Use this value to set the amount of time in micro seconds that the smart camera s CCD will integrate light Exposure Time can freeze motion when you are not using a strobe if you are using a strobe it can prevent ambient light from affecting your image So O9 c o a 52 w Q vy Note If Lighting is set to Power Strobe Maximum Exposure Time 1000 micro seconds Minimum Exposure Time Depends on the camera definition file e Camera Button Text The Programmer can modify the contents of the Camera Button text to better reflect the inspection being done by that smart camera The default text is the name of your smart camera The maximum length for the camera button text is 30 characters Data Valid Tab Use Data Valid Duration ms to specify on a per inspection basis the duration of the data valid pulse You can move the slider or highlight the number in the box and type another number Il PAK VH User Manual 3 57 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference Note Data Valid is enabled disabled via the I O Tab see page 3 59 FIGURE 3 42 Product Sett
219. igurationArchive folder From here you select the two files you wish to reconcile perform a file difference on When you click Reconcile the lower display region will show you the file differences You can view these differences or save them to a file by clicking File gt Save As You can also print these file difference by clicking File gt Print Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users When you click on this Il PAK VH displays the Configure I PAK Users dialog box If you re the Il PAK Administrator you can use the commands shown in Figure 5 8 Il PAK VH User Manual 5 13 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 FIGURE 5 8 Commands for the I PAK VH Administrator Display Programmers Suspend an Existing User Display Supervisors Add a New User Display Operators Restore a User Account Change Your Password Reset a User s Password Display Login Violation Log Display User Changes Display Audit Trail OK In general these commands allow the I PAK Administrator to create and configure user accounts before users can begin using the feature Note The I PAK Administrator should create a user account with the Programmer security level right away so that the Vision System Settings can be adjusted when necessary If you re a Programmer you can use the commands shown in Figure 5 9 FIGURE 5 9 Commands for a Programmer Display Programmers Display Supervisors Display Operators Change Your Password 5 14 I
220. igure 3 1 FIGURE 3 1 I PAK VH Setup Mode File Access Level Calibration Menu Image Help MICROSCAN Sziert Product Gist Date Time 11 18 2017 02 07 PM crane Pade Tan and Tout snced setae Eun ode Please click button for desired submenu EXPIRATION DATE SEP 2020 6MA0282 Il PAK VH sets the access level based on the password you enter 0101 A Programmer can perform all the Supervisor functions plus create a new product definition adjust system settings modify tools in a product definition adjust tool settings and save a product definition at any time 3 2 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Setup Mode Menus e 1010 A Supervisor can perform a Product ChangeOver retrain tools perform a tryout write data out to a file and reset statistics and failures There are various dialog boxes windows menus and buttons that are displayed as a result of action taken on the Setup Mode window So O9 o a 52 Q oY The Setup Mode window contains some read only information such as the Il PAK VH name and version number the name of the current product and current access level As you go into the Il PAK VH submenus Change Product Train and Tryout Statistics and Data and Advanced Settings you will see the main toolbar as a guide to remind you which submenu you are currently in The active submenu is grayed out inactive submenus are not grayed out Setup Mode Menus
221. ile from PAK VH by clicking on Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users gt Display Login Violation Log Il PAK VH User Manual 5 7 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 21 CFR Part 11 Functions The 21 CFR Part 11 drop down menu is accessible for Il PAK Administrator Programmers and Supervisors Operators have no access or visibility into this area of the software Typically at the end of a batch or a run of product you ll want to gather your data and record your inspection counts for Part 11 records These records and this functionality is discussed below End of Batch Reports After you have finished running successfully a batch of product you may need to store the pertinent information about that batch to a secure place for future review and reconciliation An Il PAK VH Supervisor Programmer or the Il PAK Administrator can view the batch reports create PDF records of the batch data print these PDFs and archive these PDFs to your archive device Note Any time you write a file to disk or CD such as when you create a PDF or write that PDF to disk Il PAK VH checks to make sure there is room on the device for the files It will post an error if there is not enough room to write the file When you click 21 CFR Part11 gt End of Batch Reports you will see a dialog box that contains the latest Inspection Results and its support files as shown in Figure 5 4 By default you are presented with its View option This shows y
222. iles Names for the configuration files are the product name with a date time identifier Default Off e Enable User Logins for Training Approvals Enabling this option requires your user name password login when training the following tools Training a Font Tool or Runtime Font Tool Entering a keyboard match string entry for a Data Matrix or symbol match Default Off As you train the tools in a Job you are prompted to enter your Il PAK VH Part 11 user name and password for training any FontTool or Runtime Font Tool and for the Data Matrix and Symbology Tools when in match mode Il PAK VH User Manual 3 91 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference Note The System Setting for Enable User Name Access must be enabled Training a Font Tool or Runtime Font Tool When training any font based Font Tool as you click Train you are prompted for your user name and password When you have the system setting for the Font Tool s Keyboard Input of Match String enabled you are prompted for your user name and password before entering the Font Tool s match string Training a Data Matrix or Symbology Tool in Match Mode When training a Data Matrix Tool or Symbology Tool in AutoStep Mode with Match String Enable of the tool selected Il PAK VH automatically prompts you for your user name and password before entering the Data Matrix or Symbology Tool s match string Il PAK VH also prompts you for your user na
223. imeTool Description of OCV Training Section Settings Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontTools Allows a Programmer to quickly train multiple OCVFont Tools typically where each tool uses the same OCVFont and has the same layout Automatic training requires that an image be available for training and that the Programmer train the first tool in the group of multiple tools Default Disabled every OCVFont Tool must be trained manually With Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontTools enabled when an OCVFont Tool is trained the Disapprove Substitute Approve screen is displayed When the layout is approved the Il PAK VH software scans the other tools in the snapshot looking for OCVFont Tools with the same name or same match criteria as the OCVFont Tool that was just approved Note Match criteria is defined as a string of characters that comes after a space dash space separator in the tool name For example if a tool is named OCVFont Tool Date Code the match criteria is Date Code After you train the tool and click Approve I PAK VH scans for and trains any OCVFont Tools in the snapshot that have the same match criteria you must use the notation to separate the tool name from the match criteria If there is no match criteria in the tool name no Il PAK VH uses the entire tool name when searching for OCVFont tools to train Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontless Tool
224. includes The Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the trained binary template The X and Y position upper left corner of the symbol relative to the OCVFont Tool shape The X and Y allowed movement of the symbol The Legibility Percentage and the Legibility Tolerance The Sharpness Contrast and number of Breaks found along with the associated tolerances The Initial and Final Residue percentages along with the associated tolerances The Largest Final Residue Blob Percentage and its associated tolerance Note A 1 for any value above except the X and Y allowed movement indicates the test is disabled The bitmap representation of the binary runtime symbol area When the OCVFont Tool has been run doing a Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key and moving the 7 44 Il PAK VH User Manual a OCVRuntimeTool mouse inside the OCVFont Tool ROI but not over the symbol area as shown below FIGURE 7 33 Step Tip Example 4 JEFE OAR Vit 387A901 rt O Z D im x gt O OCVRuntimeTool An OCVRuntime Tool uses an OCVFont called the Master Font to learn the layout and determine which characters from the OCVFont are in which locations in the ROI Once the layout is learned the OCVRuntimeTool creates a new OCVFont called a Runtime Font by training a new FontSymbol at each layout position using the current
225. ings The Programmer can select Next Tool and Previous Tool to go through all the tools in the product Note It s easier to go to the Train and Tryout screen to adjust your tool settings When complete close the Tool Settings dialog box Refer to the Visionscape Tools Reference for complete information on the latest tool settings FIGURE 3 64 Tool Settings Dialog Box Tool Settings Previous Tool NextTool Tool Settings for Inspection1 OCVFont Tool AutoFind OnePt Locator LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity ry z C dl Default Datum Order v OCVFont Tool Inputs T Use AutoFind w fq AutoFind Pin 1 Index 1 fq AutoFind Pin 2 Index 999 fy Max Contrast Difference 100 E Individual Symbol Search X 3 E Individual Symbol Search Y 3 i Test For Character Breaks i Runtime ID Checking VY Ef Graphics Level Show ROI Only 3 96 Il PAK VH User Manual Windows Explorer Run Mode 25 Windows Explorer allows a Programmer to launch a Windows Explorer program for configuration management Reviewing the read only configuration files or moving copying or deleting files can now occur without leaving the Il PAK VH interface Every time this button is clicked it launches another Windows Explorer session So O9 o a 52 w Q vy Note Do not move the Jobs from the I PAK_VH Jobs folder while Il PAK VH is running Close Advanced Run
226. ings Dialog Box Data Valid Tab IPAKVisionHAWK1 Data Valid Duration ms 10 When Data Valid is True inspection results can be sampled Data Valid is On for the data valid duration specified and then Off for the data valid duration specified The On duration of Data Valid is added to the execution time The Off time is a background task and does not impact execution time Data Valid Duration ms The Programmer can use Data Valid for each smart camera s results Data Valid is On for the data valid duration specified and then Off for the data valid duration specified The On duration of Data Valid is added to the execution time The Off time is a background task and does not impact execution time Note Data Valid is On and Off for the length of time specified For example using the default of 10 ms when the inspection is complete and inspection results are available Data Valid is set On for 10 ms then Off for 10 ms You are to sample the inspection results while data valid is On Default 10 Range 1 500 3 58 Il PAK VH User Manual Advanced Settings 25 I O Tab l PAK VH can accept input signals in order to trigger inspections I PAK VH can report the results of each inspection by setting output points On or Off o 5 D Som D x FIGURE 3 43 Product Settings Dialog Box I O Tab o fe Q 3 10 Configuration Fixed I0 Point
227. ion stops running and you are transferred to Setup Mode Default Passwords The default Programmer password is 0101 and the default Supervisor password is 1010 Note Microscan strongly advises that you change these default passwords in a production environment Forgotten Passwords Should you forget your password Microscan provides a mechanism to reset the password and get into the system ONCE At the password keypad enter 228489 A random string will appear on the password keypad Il PAK VH User Manual 4 13 Chapter Run Mode Reference Note Make a note of the random string Then call Microscan s customer service with the information displayed on the screen The Customer Service representative will be able to look up a one time use password for you to enter If you are in Run Mode when you forget your password and contact Microscan you can exit Run Mode into Setup Mode by using the password provided by Microscan Customer Service Then immediately go into the Change Password menu to reset your password If you are in Setup Mode when you forget your password you must go into the Change Password menu after receiving the one time password from Microscan s Customer Service to reset it If you fail to reset your password and you go back to Run Mode you will either have to remember your original password or call Microscan Customer Service again for a new one time password Forgotten Passwords 21 CFR
228. ion to be selected By default the list box is set to Use Input String This setting defines the action that l PAK VH takes in the event that the string input from the external device does not match the string learned when the tool was trained The possible selections and their meaning are e Use Input String I PAK VH uses the input string as the inspection string e Use Learned String I PAK VH ignores the input string and sets the string found during training as the inspection string e Retry by Learning I PAK VH forces you to retrain the tool and allow the string to be entered again e Retry by Input I PAK VH allows the string to be entered again The Match Mode Mismatch Action selected is applied to any OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool in the current Job Transmit Final Layout String By default Transmit Final Inspection String is not checked which means that PAK VH will not send the inspection string out when training of an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool is complete When Transmit Final Inspection String is enabled checked Il PAK VH sends the inspection string out to an external device whenever an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool is trained successfully Transmit Final Inspection String data is transferred using the communication method selected on the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Communication dialog box The Transmit Final Inspection String feature is only active if the communication method is se
229. ional input datums optional output datums and a script file written in the Perl programming language The Perl Package Script determines the number and type of inputs and outputs The Perl Package Script controls the functionality of the Custom Step Custom Steps cannot perform vision operations because they do not allow for a buffer to be input to the Perl Package Script The Custom Step supports the following scripts e none on page D 2 e FailCode on page D 4 none The none script is the default Perl Package Script used by a Custom Step when inserted into a Job This script has no functionality FIGURE D 1 The none Script Custom Step Avail Package Scripts pe Re Parse Package Script Recreate Step Datums D 2 Il PAK VH User Manual w Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool e Avail Package Scripts This property allows selection of a Perl Package Script for the step to use You can select none 2 o gt c D FailCode on page D 4 e Re Parse Package Script When clicked this button causes the package script to be parsed Whenever any changes to the script files are made this button needs to be clicked to make these changes take effect xe Y 5 z D p D a Note I PAK VH supports the Package Scripts as they are distributed with the Il PAK VH software Changing these script files or creating new
230. ique Name For This Symbol E Carosi Skip OK Clicking Cancel or Skip aborts the training of this FontSymbol When a unique name is entered and OK is clicked a FontSymbol is created and templates created from the ROI area of the image and default parameters are stored in that FontSymbol The OCVFont shape must be placed around the next character to train it This process continues until all characters in the image have been trained as FontSymbols and added to the OCVFont as shown in Figure 7 20 Only one example of a given character needs to be trained FIGURE 7 20 OCVFont Example 2 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 21 Chapter T OCV Reference The Automatic Segmentation feature can be enabled from the Custom Properties dialog box The Automatic Segmentation setting can be found on the Layout Step property tab for the selected font Automatic segmentation training requires that the OCVFont shape be placed around all the characters in the image that are going to be added as FontSymbols in the OCVFont Then when Train Font is clicked a green box appears in the image over one of the characters A dialog box is displayed asking for a unique name for this symbol e Clicking Cancel aborts the training of this FontSymbol and ends the automatic segmentation training e Clicking Skip aborts the training of this FontSymbol and moves on to the next character in the image Only one example of a character
231. ired submenu a A t je e I gt lt a SEP 2020 6MA0282 207M Current Tool Inspectiont Part11 Disabled 6 Click Advanced Settings 7 Click Create a Product Il PAK VH displays the Select a Vision Device dialog box as shown in Figure 2 6 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 7 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 6 Select a Vision Device Dialog Box Vision Devices Hardware Selection Run Up to 4 Smart Cameras by Selecting from the List Below and then Clicking Here Available Smart Cameras Network Press Ctrl Key to Select Multiple Devices Press Shift Key to Select a Range 8 Select a device Then click the Run Il PAK on button Figure 2 6 above the device you selected This displays the Product Settings dialog box as shown in Figure 2 7 9 For Camera 1 change Camera Type to match the smart camera currently connected to Camera 1 on the I PAK VH change Trigger Acquire Method to Continuous Figure 2 7 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool 2 FIGURE 2 7 Product Settings Dialog Box Cameras Tab 5 2 IPAK H1 I Camera Type VisionHAWK 1280x960 CCD v Trigger Acquire Method rae ie lt Trigger 1 0 none Trigger Polarity High to Low Lighting Exposure Time micro secs 700 Camera Button Text IPAKVH1 10 Click Next This displays the Product Setti
232. is process until the optimal Refresh Rate is determined Note Microscan recommends that you connect the Vision HAWK Smart Camera to the PC using dedicated network cards and static IP addresses to minimize problems with disconnections Refer to Appendix B Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC for a description of how to configure your PC and Vision HAWK Smart Cameras to communicate via static IP addresses Note For optimal display on the widest possible variety of monitors your PC s screen resolution must be set to 100 as shown below In Windows 7 navigate to Control Panel gt Appearance and Personalization gt Display ae as Eoma ae J _ eee ice a gt Control Panel Appearance and Personalization Display I Search Control Pane P Control Panel Home ips i Make it easier to read what s on your screen You can change the size of tet and other items on your screen by choosing one of these options To Adjust resolution temporarily enlarge just part of the screen use the Magnifier tool Adjust brightness Calibrate color Smaller 100 default Preview I Change display settings Connect to a projector ji Oy Adjust ClearType text Medium 125 Set custom text size DPI Personalization Devices and Printers 1 2 Il PAK VH User Manual eh System Specifications Vision HAWK Communications Important
233. istency of menu flow description all steps and sequences are shown and all general details listed Program Settings Dialog Boxes In these dialog boxes Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 the Programmer defines the camera settings and I O configuration Click Next to move ahead to the next menu in the Create A Product wizard series Il PAK VH User Manual 3 43 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 27 Create a Product Product Settings Camera IPAKVisionHAWK1 Camera Type VisionHAWK 1280x960 CCD Trigger Acquire Method Continuous m Trigger 1 0 Trigger Polarity High to Low inant Off a ighting On Exposure Time micro secs 2000 Camera Button Text IPAKVisionHAw K1 FIGURE 3 28 Create a Product Product Settings Data Valid IPAKVisionHAWK1 Data Valid Duration ms p fi 0 3 44 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings FIGURE 3 29 Create a Product Product Settings I O 10 Configuration o 5 Z D Som x Fixed I0 Points In None x Out 1 Data Valid Inspection 1 s Out 2 o TS fe Q o Inspection 1 Passed s Out 3 None Y System Settings Dialog Boxes In these dialog boxes Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 the Programmer defines the Communication and Reset settings Note When you return to Setup Mode from RunMode all inspection Pa
234. items and entries in screen images are indicated as Run triggered Modify etc Il PAK VH User Manual xi Preface Validation Il PAK VH is intended to be the product of choice in the pharmaceutical industry Microscan has designed the product with just this in mind To best support the pharmaceutical industry we know we must be able to provide you with our software development processes Any software that has to do with production equipment in the pharmaceutical industry is mandated by the FDA to be validated You may choose to perform your own application validation We can provide you with our software development details describing how the software is created and tested 21 CFR Part 11 Il PAK VH is 21 CFR Part 11 technically compliant Login user names and passwords are set up by the I PAK Administrator The Part 11 user names their encrypted passwords and the original time datestamp when a user was created or last changed his or her password are stored in a data file called ipak usr When you upgrade the I PAK VH software you must manually move the ipak usr data file to the current version of Il PAK VH See Chapter 3 21 CFR Part 11 for complete information regarding 21 CFR Part 11 Installation Media Il PAK VH installation media includes the following e PAK VH 4 0 0 e Visionscape 7 0 1 e PAK VH User Manual xii Il PAK VH User Manual c 2 per S 8 Q
235. known character Default 70 Pass On No Data When enabled the status will report passed even if a Single Character character is not recognized When disabled if any Two or More Characters character is reported as unknown the status will be false Polarity Allows selection of the symbol type for which the tool Single Character will search Choices are Dark Characters or Light Two or More Characters Characters with a default of Dark Characters ROI Contains Provides a choice between Single Character and Two Single Character or More Characters When you select the Single Two or More Characters Character option only one character boundary will be found within the search area The boundaries of the character will be defined so that they tightly enclose all blobs found Default The tool searches for multiple characters 6 18 Il PAK VH User Manual 6 OCRTrainableFont Tool TABLE 6 1 OCRTrainableFont Tool Settings Alphabetized continued o S 4 Property Description 7 Selected Font s This is a list box containing the names of all fonts that 2 Single Character have been stored on the system Whenever a new font a e Two or More Characters is created and trained its name will appear as an Ke option in this list You can select from this list one or more fonts that are to be used when reading characters from an image Set Unknown Characters To This is a charact
236. l Ena c Num 4 4 gt If you are working on a Panel PC with an integrated Touch Screen and no keyboard is connected to the PC you can open the Touch Input Software using the following button The button is only available in Windows or dialog boxes where it is possible to enter data You can also open the Touch Input via Help gt Open Softkeyboard in Setup Mode If I PAK VH is not running on a Panel PC or the Touch Input Software in not installed on the Panel PC the button is not available Il PAK VH User Manual 3 9 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference I PAK VH User Manual When you select Visionscape Il PAK VH User Manual the PDF for the manual is opened immediately If the PDF cannot be found in the installation path the Open PDF File dialog box is displayed Navigate to the Il PAK VH User Manual PDF and click Open Acrobat Reader starts and you can review the manual When you go into Run Mode Acrobat Reader closes automatically e About I PAK VH When you select About I PAK VH a dialog box is displayed showing the version number of the product Change Product The Change Product button displays the Change Product dialog box as shown in Figure 3 9 FIGURE 3 9 Change Product Dialog Box Change Product j j x Available Products Product Description Job Created Thursday January 24 2008 7 11 13 PM ore Change Lot Cancel The Change Pro
237. l PAK VH User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions 5 e Display Programmers This command enables the I PAK Administrator to see all the user accounts that have a security access of Programmer As a user you can review this list of already created Programmers as long as you are a Programmer A Supervisor or Operator cannot access this menu item You are restricted in viewing the list of other users that are at or below your security level t a x LL 1 N e Display Supervisors This command enables the PAK Administrator to see all the user accounts that have a security access of Supervisor As a user you can review this list of already created Supervisor as long as long as you are a Supervisor or Programmer An Operator cannot access this menu item You are restricted in viewing the list of other users that are at or below your security level e Display Operators This command enables the I PAK Administrator to see all the user accounts that have a security access of Operator As a user you can review this list of already created Operators as long as you are an Operator e Change Your Password You can change your own password by clicking this button You will be asked to enter your password twice to verify that the password is correct An PAK Administrator can also use this menu to change his or her Il PAK Administrator password e Suspend An Existing User The I PAK Administrator can suspend an exi
238. l PAK VH software Changing these script files or creating new script files renders them unsupported and non validated by I PAK VH Cylinder_UnWarp This step is an image in image out operation and unwraps an image on a cylindrical surface reducing the distortion caused by the surface Theory of Operation Given a description of the geometry of a cylinder the CylinderUnwrap step will warp the image on the cylinder in such a way as to unwrap the image onto a flat surface This reduces the distortion caused by the cylindrical surface The geometry of the cylinder is specified using the e Radius of the cylinder e Distance the cylinder is from the camera e Vertical axis of the cylinder e Point within the ROI where the image is correct not distorted Il PAK VH User Manual D 7 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques Cylinder Unwrap ROI The Cylinder Unwrap ROI is a rotatable rectangle Typically the rectangle is rotated to match the angle of the cylinder axis Using the Cylinder Unwrap Warp Typically other tools and steps are placed in its output image where the image pixels have been unwrapped into a rectangle This is useful for studying features or text on a cylinder that will be distorted closer to the edges of the cylinder The ROI that defines the pixels to warp can be adjusted by moving sizing and rotating the search area shape associated with a CylinderUnwrap Warp Figure D 4 and Figure D 5 show an
239. l Threshold property Edge Energy Threshold and Threshold Adjustment are not used when this property is disabled Default Enabled Auto Threshold Adjustment Offsets or biases the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto Threshold Enabled is enabled Default 0 Range 64 to 64 Manual Threshold Displays the dynamically calculated threshold when the Auto Threshold Enabled property is enabled When Auto Threshold Enabled is disabled Manual Threshold is the threshold that is used for binarizing the image Default 135 Range 0 to 255 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFontless Tool as Q e Edge Energy Threshold Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This 9 property is only used when the Auto Threshold Enabled property is g enabled we Default 20 2 Oo Range 0 to 255 e Character Expansions Useful when dealing with print from a dot matrix printer or any print that is broken up in segments The more sparse the print the higher the value of this property should be This property allows for the broken print to become solid by expanding the segments until they come together Dilations expand each segment Then erosions decrease the size of the character in every direction except the direction in which the segments have connected Dilations and erosions work together to make the segments solid without making the character fatter Default 0
240. l or Runtime Font Tool Touch Input Software You can open the Touch Input software using the following button The button is only available in dialog boxes where you can enter data Additionally in Setup Mode you can open the Touch Input using Help gt Open Softkeyboard Supported Camera Il PAK VH supports up to four Vision HAWK Smart Cameras The Vision HAWKs must have Visionscape licenses to function correctly with Il PAK VH User Interface The Ul is available in English only independent of the language setting of the operating system Storing Inspection Results You can store inspection results to a file If the file does not exist when you store inspection results it will be created If the file does exist inspection results are appended to the end of the file Note Only Programmers and Supervisors can edit or select a file name Il PAK VH User Manual 1 7 Il PAK VH Inspection Moving and Sizing Tools Table 1 2 lists the keys and key sequences to move and to size tools TABLE 1 2 Keys to Move and Size Tools Key s Resulting Action Up Arrow Moves shape up by one pixel Down Arrow Moves shape down by one pixel Right Arrow Moves shape to the right by one pixel Left Arrow Moves shape to the left by one pixel F Flips shape by 90 if shape is rotatable L Rotates shape one degree to the left counter clockwise if shape is rotatable R Rotates shape one degree to the right
241. le COM Ports in Il PAK VH This setting can only be selected when the Protocol is set to Il PAK VH Selectable Main Port Default Comm Port 1 Range 1 to 2 Il PAK VH User Manual Chapter K Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 46 Configure Communication Dialog Box RS 232 Settings Configure Communication x r R5232 Settings Comm Port 1 Comm Port 2 Baud Rate 9600 x Parity None 7 Comm Port 2 not available Data Bits e H Stop Bits hoo H Timeout Seconds isis Field Delimiter Char x Protocol PAK Selectable Main Portikg I Display Changeover Strings Main Comm Pot 1 C2 Cancel 3 66 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings Ethernet TCP IP After you click this button the Configure Communications dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 47 o 5 Z D Som D x FIGURE 3 47 Configure Communication Ethernet Settings Configure Communication x Ethernet Settings c TS fe Q Local Port Number M Local Host Name siemens 1 01db62 Local IP Address f 61 218 121 84 Cancel Define the TCP IP Settings as follows e Local Port Number The default is 7000 The range is 7000 to 7004 e Local Host Name Read only display of the local host e Local IP Address Read only display of your PC s IP address This is
242. llows you to train of OC VFonts in the current image The Select Font button allows you to select an OCVFont to train 3 Click Select Font to display the Font Manager dialog box as shown in Figure 2 40 2 32 Il PAK VH User Manual N Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 40 Font Manager Dialog Box Font Manager Available Fonts DefaultFont Select hotstamp_library inkjet_librar ff i e m I gt x aa New Duplicate Rename Delete Cancel Any already existing OCVFonts in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder are listed in the Available Fonts list 4 Click New to display the Font Name dialog box Figure 2 41 and to create a new OCVFont FIGURE 2 41 Font Name Dialog Box m Font Name Cancel 5 Name the font NewFont and then click OK 6 Click Select to select the new font for training By default Il PAK VH OCVFont training does not perform automatic segmentation so that it can better perform Runtime ID Checking For this tutorial we will turn automatic segmentation on so that Il PAK VH automatically locates and places a box around all characters in the FOV This makes the tutorial easier Il PAK VH User Manual 2 33 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials 2 34 Il PAK VH User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool N The tool settings for the selected font are on the right hand side of the Custom Properties dialog box 7 Click the Layout St
243. ls Increasing final residue accepts symbols of lower quality e Final Residue Largest Blob After performing a set of morphological operations on the residue image the largest blob is found in the residue image If the area of this blob is greater than the user selectable maximum the symbol fails e Runtime ID Checking For the font based tools OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool When a symbol is trained and added to an OCVFont it is compared to other symbols already in the OCVFont Note OCVFont boxes must be the same size in order to utilize Runtime ID tests If the two symbols being compared are found to be similar tests are set up that verify that the correct symbol is present at runtime If it cannot be determined that the correct symbol is present at runtime the symbol fails the inspection Additional Filters e Character Expansions are useful when dealing with print from a dot matrix printer or any print that is broken up in segments The broken print is filtered so that it becomes solid by expanding the segments until they come together Dilations expand each segment Then erosions decrease the size of the character in every direction except the direction in which the segments have connected Dilations and erosions work together to make the segments solid without making the character fatter Il PAK VH User Manual 7 3 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Filter Bright Defects are useful when dust or other mate
244. ls are in the OCVFont the input string is compared to the string of characters found during training Any differences in the symbol names are noted If the number of symbols is not the same in each string an error message is displayed as shown in Figure 7 66 and only the Disapprove button is displayed forcing you to retrain FIGURE 7 66 Match String Error Message Wrong Number of Symbols External Input of Match String Ea Incorrect Number of Input Symbol Names Once all lines of input are received successfully Il PAK VH checks for mismatches in the string which were noted earlier In the event of a mismatch I PAK VH displays the message Mismatch Strings Are Different and performs the selected Mismatch Action FIGURE 7 67 Mismatch Error Message Mismatch Strings Are Different If the Match String Mismatch Action setting is set to Use Input String the Il PAK VH displays the message Using Input String and uses the input string as the inspection string FIGURE 7 68 Mismatch Action Using Input String Message Using Input String If the Match String Mismatch Action setting is set to Use Learned String the I PAK VH displays the message Using Learned String and ignores the input string The string found during training is then set as the inspection string 7 86 Il PAK VH User Manual External Input of Match String a FIGURE 7 69 Mismatch Action Using Learned String Messag
245. ludes all the symbols of the mark that are within the mark area box When disabled the OCVFontless Tool trains an OCVSymbolStep for each symbol of the mark that is located within the mark area box Default Disabled Apply Automatic Min Sharpness Allows the OCVSymbolSteps trained to have a sharpness tolerance automatically calculated for them This automatically calculated tolerance is equal to 65 of the sharpness value calculated using the trained template Default Disabled Apply Automatic Min Contrast Allows the OCVSymbolSteps trained to have a contrast tolerance automatically calculated for them 7 58 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFontless Tool as This automatically calculated tolerance is equal to 50 of the contrast value calculated using the trained template Default Disabled e Max Contrast Difference Sets the maximum percentage difference between the calculated contrast values for symbols being inspected by the tool When set to 100 any contrast difference is acceptable If no contrast calculations are performed for the inspected symbols the calculated percent difference is 0 Otherwise the smallest contrast from the inspected symbols is divided by the largest contrast from the inspected symbols This value is then subtracted from 1 to get the percentage difference If the calculated the difference is larger than the value of Max Contrast Difference the inspection fails rt 3 D i
246. lue against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared 6 6 Il PAK VH User Manual Symbology Tool Check Character Type When disabled Visionscape will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols When set to Mod 16 Visionscape will perform a modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to NW7 Visionscape will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check character calculation on the symbol If the symbol does not pass this calculation it will not be decoded When set to Both Visionscape will perform both the Mod 16 and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol If the symbol does not pass either calculation it will not be decoded f SE e I o ce F lt 5 Check Character Output Status When this field is disabled and a check character calculation is enabled Visionscape will strip the verified check character from the symbol data output This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used When enabled Visionscape will output the check character as part of the symbol data This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used Code 39 Check Character Status When enabled outputs the status of the Check Character along with symbol data Check Character Output Status When enabled the check character character is read a
247. mage the system is ready to perform the automatic font selection and scaling Click AutoFont to start the process During the font selection process each OCVFont that is in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder is tested The first part of the test determines if a symbol with the name of the selected character is trained in the OCVFont If not the process continues to the next OCVFont If the symbol is in the font the system will create several scaled versions of the template based on the size of the symbol in the font and the size of the OCVFont shape Each scaled template is assigned a score value after it is compared to the actual image data inside the OCVFont Box If the score value for any scaled template is better than any previous score values that score value is stored as the BestScore along with the name of the font that the template originated from and the scaling factors used to derive the scaled template When the Train Debug Delay property on the Custom Properties Main dialog box is set to a non zero value the scaled templates and match scores are displayed in the upper left corner of the screen Il PAK VH User Manual 7 17 Chapter T OCV Reference After all OCVFonts have been tested the OCVFont that is associated with the BestScore is considered to be the font that will work best with the current image data When an OCVFont has been automatically selected a message box appears to display the nam
248. mage we would position the ROIs like the ones in Figure D 11 Il PAK VH User Manual D 15 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques FIGURE D 11 Positioning ROIs to Find KOREA OES E A E Tool 231 002700 L2A0693 NND 9811 AA CHOB RO KOREA Press the Train button to train the template Description The FindRotated script will search for the trained template by searching over a specified range of angles specified by the Maximum Search Angle and Minimum Search Angle datums It accomplishes this by warping the image contents inside of its ROI It will start by warping the image contents by the angle specified by the Minimum Search Angle datum and then it will run correlation on the result All qualifying match locations are recorded and then the angle is incremented by an amount equal to the value specified in the Angle Step Size datum and the image is warped and searched again It will continue in this fashion until it reaches the angle value specified in the Maximum Search Angle datum and then it will stop Then the script will scan through all of the qualifying template locations and choose the best one D 16 Il PAK VH User Manual w Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool Settings FIGURE D 12 FindRotated Script CustomVision Tool Inputs A InputBuffer Snapshott SnapOutputBuffer Es Avail Package Scripts FindRotated Re Parse Package Script zenck to executer i Recreate S
249. mart camera IP address Click on Modify 6 change the IP address and click Apply Please note that the camera will neng to reboot for the change to take effect 2 Run J MICROSCAN No job is loaded Create a New Job Note If you will be using more than one camera with I PAK follow the above procedure to change the Vision HAWK cameras to the following IP addresses First Vision HAWK IP 192 168 0 10 Subnet 255 255 255 0 default Second Vision HAWK IP 192 168 0 20 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Third Vision HAWK IP 192 168 0 30 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Fourth Vision HAWK IP 192 168 0 40 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Il PAK VH User Manual B 5 U Eo eo Ne D2 Sv o S F 5 6 O Appendix Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC Verifying the Setup Using Network Overview Network Overview displays all of the smart cameras that can be detected on your Ethernet port Now that you have switched your PC and all of your smart cameras to a static IP address verify that they can talk to each other by launching this utility 1 From the desktop navigat to Start gt All Programs gt Microscan AutoVISION gt Tools gt Device Network Viewer 2 When the Network Overview window is displayed Figure B 1 you should see your smart camera s listed if Visionscape can detect them over your Ethernet connection You can communicate with smart cameras listed with black text
250. matically retrained without requiring retraining of the OCVFontless Tool Inspection OCVFontless Tool as rt 3 D i X gt O When AutoFind is enabled the pins are located and the OCVFontless Tool box is re positioned based on the pin locations Each symbol found during training is expected to be at the same location within the OCVFontless Tool box at runtime For each symbol position there are several ways that an inspection can fail The symbol cannot be located The symbol can fail because the sharpness value is out of tolerance The symbol can fail because the contrast value is out of tolerance The symbol can fail because a break larger than the user specified size appears in the character The symbol can fail the initial residue check The symbol can fail the final residue check either or both methods This residue analysis allows for detection of the following Symbol has become thicker or thinner Symbol has holes or missing features Symbol holes are filled in Symbol contains additional or stray markings Il PAK VH User Manual 7 55 Chapter T OCV Reference FIGURE 7 41 OCVFontless Tool Properties Page Tool Settings AutoFind TwoPt Locator AutoThreshold ComputePolarity boja l Bl AW detardaumorde z OCVFontless Tool Inputs Jf Use AutoFind E AutoFind Pin 1 Index fq AutoFind Pin 2 Index E Min Symbol Size in pixels Find
251. mb5 SymbE Symb 4 se Bj zia Default Datum Order Symb1 Inputs fy Num of ON Pixels in Template Es Polarity g Leaibility g Allowed Movement in X g Allowed Movement in Y EEA Residue Limit Units g Initial Residue Limit Es Final Residue Method fay Final Residue Limit g Final Residue Max Blob Size fy Maximum Flaw Size kk Appearance Flaw Break Test g Min Appear Flaw Break Size Es Sharpness Limit Units g Minimum Allowed Sharpness Es Contrast Limit Units g Minimum Allowed Contrast T Auto Threshold Enabled g Auto Threshold Adjustment g Manual Threshold Fay Edge Energy Threshold fay Character Expansions T Filter Bright Detects fH Bright Defect Range FEA Output Mask Type BinaryT emplate amp GrayT emplate 287 Dark on Light 25 000 50 50 Percentage 100 000 Total Residue Area 15 000 10 1 v 3 Gray Level 0 Gray Level 0 M 0 20 0 T 0 Mask Template N A N A Close Num of ON Pixels in Template Displays the number of foreground pixels in the trained binary template Il PAK VH User Manual 7 67 o O D i 2 D x gt O 0 Chapter 7 OCV Reference Polarity Allows the step to always train with polarity Light_On_Dark or always train with polarity Dark_On_Light The default is set by the OCVFontless Tool during training Legibility Passes fails the symbol based on this minimum correlati
252. mbol fail the inspection Note Determining the proper value for Final Residue Limit is a subjective decision the higher the quality of the character symbol desired the lower the Final Residue Limit should be Final Residue Max Blob Size Used when Final Residue Method is set to Max Residue Blob or Both A blob analysis is performed on the residue image and the largest blob is found If this blob has an area that is greater than the value of this property the symbol will fail the inspection Default 10 Range 1 to 512 Maximum Flaw Size Represents the maximum width in pixels that a discrepancy is allowed to be before it is considered objectionable The larger the number assigned the larger a discrepancy is allowed before causing the symbol inspection to fail Default 1 Range 0 to 20 Appearance Flaw Break Test Determines whether the OCVSymbolStep is to inspect for character breaks in the symbol When enabled the inspection fails if a break is found in the symbol When disabled the inspection ignores breaks in the symbol Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFontless Tool as Default Enabled e Min Appear Flaw Break Size Is the smallest size break that causes a character break failure Default 2 pixels Range 1 to 10 pixels e Sharpness Limit Units Sets the units for the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property When set to Gray Level the value of the Minimum Allowed Sharpness pro
253. me and password when you click Train with a Data Matrix or Symbology Tool selected with Match String Enable selected I PAK VH will not prompt you for the login when just retraining a read mode Data Matrix or Symbology Tool In Part 11 mode if Enable User Logins for Training Approvals is On Operators cannot change lot in Run Mode Off Operators can change lot in Run Mode Set Passwords to Expire Enabling this option makes your password expire after a certain specified time period 15 30 60 or 90 days When this option is selected a submenu is displayed where you can select the duration Default Off Note System Setting gt General gt Enable User Name Access must also be enabled When this option is used as you successfully exit Run Mode using your Part 11 login user name and password Il PAK VH checks this user s password and the current date and time to see if your password has expired A pop up message box is displayed if you need to reset your password 3 92 Il PAK VH User Manual Advanced Settings Oo You will not be penalized or lose your account if you do not reset your password However you will continue to see these message boxes every time you exit Run Mode or enter your user name and password rT O Z D So X e Set Time Limit for System Inactivity Setting the time interval to 5 15 30 or 60 minutes causes the I PAK VH system to revert back to the Ope
254. meaning you can Alt Tab and get to the Windows Desktop from Il PAK VH For our Part 11 users this setting should be disabled unchecked so that users cannot get to the desktop or taskbar Disabling the Desktop prevents a user from the following keystrokes Alt Tab Ctrl Esc Start Menu and TaskBar Alt Esc This will prevent changes to the System Clock and will be a deterrent for people who want to use the PC for something other than I PAK VH 5 20 Il PAK VH User Manual Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Concern How safe is the Audit Trail from being compromised The Audit Trail is an encrypted file You cannot just open it with a common editor and make sense of the data Further the Audit Trail can be made into an Acrobat Reader PDF that can be stored on the local drive or archived to another drive network or CD The Audit Trail provides a detailed who what when log of all Il PAK VH changes You can view the translated contents of this file as an authorized user Il PAK Administrator Programmer or Supervisor Also you can use the mouse to select some data to be printed This could be used to show a single Job s production run from Product ChangeOver to Reconciliation of that Batch records t a x IL oO N How safe are the Jobs files from being compromised Since the Jobs are binary files you can only edit them with I PAK VH If someone tries to edit a Job with say Notepad and saves those ch
255. meout drop down list Il PAK VH User Manual 6 25 Chapter Automatic Identification FIGURE 6 12 Click Save Font Properties OCRTrainableFont Tool g x Font Font Name Sample_Font m Characters Not trained Created 6 13 2007 allele ELF le LM saarn Niele eR tsm ME rm Text or Character to Include o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1234567890 EIA RMD ew ow eer Dye a bs PL IDL ranns AAEM __ Em Timeout 1 minute 7 g Number of Trained Characters Cycles 36 RMS 0 004243774 A A A Revert 0 1 5 10 Included Not In Font Included 1234567890 Save Font or Revert Clicking Save Font saves the new training The train date and time are displayed beneath the font name as shown in Figure 6 13 FIGURE 6 13 Font Name and Train Date and Time Font Name Sample_Font Trained on 2 12 2003 11 48 57 PM Clicking Revert abandons the training If the font had been trained previously it will revert to its previous trained state After training characters are highlighted using red yellow and green to indicate the number of trained samples for each character 6 26 Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool 6 FIGURE 6 14 After Training x Font nn Font Name Sample_Font r Characters Trained on 6 14 2007 6 47 33 AM alle llelo lEF eH M ECEE Tei m Text or Character to Include LAM eael elle Ooo eee e e e Aee AA Ae
256. mera views in any combination The Operator cannot relocate camera views This is an Operator level function Showing all views or no views will not impact the inspection process e Failure Report Displays a separate Failure Report for each smart camera that is selected currently in the Run Mode window Make sure Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt Show All Menu Options Advanced Users is selected Hotkey ALT F FIGURE 4 2 Display Failure Report Current Product sample ocvFonttools 1 Setup Failure Report Change Lot The Failure Report information box lists Inspection Failures and their occurrences Failures are generated by Inspection and are displayed by Inspection The tool s symbolic names are displayed under Failure Type and the failure counts are displayed under Frequency To close the Failure Report s click Failure Report again The FailureReport form will be cleared each time you go to Run Mode Il PAK VH User Manual 4 3 Chapter Run Mode Reference Show Hide Failed Image Queue The Failed Image Queue is lossy meaning I PAK VH saves as many failed images as it can It is possible that some failed images will not be saved to the Failed Image Queue To save failed images with a lossless connection see Save Images on page 6 33 Click this button Figure 4 3 to display the Failed Image Queue ase EA sample data matrix M Change Lot Note The butto
257. mes up when linking an input datum Cylinder Radius The radius of the cylinder DistanceFromCamera The distance from the camera to the cylinder UseCalibration If the inputs CylinderRadius DistanceFromCamera are specified in calibrated world coordinates for example millimeters then the UseCalibration checkbox should not be checked If the inputs are specified in pixel coordinates then UseCalibration should be checked Training None Results Status Set to true after a successful execution of the step CylUnwrapped Image The modified image I O Summary None Il PAK VH User Manual w Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool Dynamic_Binarize Theory of Operation The Dynamic Binarize script is used when you want to binarize your image which means to convert all of the pixels below a threshold to 0 and all those above the threshold to 255 This script will dynamically calculate its binary threshold each time it runs ge c oO nw 20 rs Z SS Or p a Using Dynamic_Binarize This script provides you with an ROI like any other Vision tool in Visionscape would You can position and size the ROI over any area of your image and an output buffer will be created of the same width and height and containing the binary representation of all of the pixels within the ROI In Figure D 7 and Figure D 8 we demonstrate how the text on a chip can be binarized FIGURE D 7 Cu
258. minated with either an Enter or Return character Once Il PAK VH receives this termination character it closes the RS 232 port and ignores anything else sent COM1 Properties Your RS 232 device settings should be set This example is from HyperTerminal Port Settings Bits per second o0 tts Data bits E Parity None Stop bits fi Flow control stats i Restore Defaults Cancel Apply 3 28 Il PAK VH User Manual Train and Tryout 25 Properties Your RS 232 device settings should be set as shown below This example is from HyperTerminal Properties 21x ConnectTo Settings Lo O9 o Q sv w Q oY N C Windows keys Function arrow and ctrl keys act as Emulation Auto detect Terminal Setup Backscroll buffer lines 500 J Beep three times when connecting or disconnecting ASCII Setup Cancel Il PAK VH User Manual 3 29 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference ASCII Setup Your RS 232 device settings should be set as shown in below This example is from HyperTerminal ASCII Setup 21x ASCII Sending Send line ends with line feeds MV Echo typed characters locally Line delay jo milliseconds Character delay fo milliseconds ASCII Receiving Append line feeds to incoming line ends Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII IV wrap lines that exceed terminal
259. mmends this be a factory trained Il PAK VH user The Programmer will set up the vision Jobs and adjust settings Determine who will be your Supervisors those who can retrain the vision tools to perhaps train a new lot code and those who can perform a Product ChangeOver to start inspection on another product type Another decision in your Supervisor Configuration is what access they have to the I PAK VH System and whether or not they have the ability to retrain key tools such as a Font Tool The Programmer can set up the Supervisors Access rights by selecting Access Level gt Configure Supervisor Access The Il PAK Administrator assigns the right to retrain when they create a user account For more information see Configure Supervisor Access on page 6 5 Note Create an SOP that defines your users and their access rights Turn on Part 11 in Il PAK VH see Enabling 21 CFR Part 11 on page 5 3 By default to provide a generic solution for all our customers Part 11 is not enabled This setting turns on Part 11 and the Audit Trail Note Create an SOP to never turn this option off 5 6 Il PAK VH User Manual Customer Responsibilities e Enable any other Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt General gt 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration menu items that you require These are dependent on your regulations For example if you require that passwords expire set the Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Gene
260. mo m Characters Trained on 11 17 2017 10 50 28 AM ABEOEARAHTTKAOM NICSE ITEM m Text or Character to Include Lol Ile lsa S Le 7 eio a falele Walle Wop Im _tretee ee Dlloel se MIDE eiieg FREEDOS e Number of Trained Characters A 4 A A A 0 1 5 10 Included Notin Font Included 4 Minimize the PAK VH Editor not the custom editor 5 Inthe custom editor click Select Font to select a new font to be trained The Font Manager dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6 5 6 20 Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool FIGURE 6 5 Font Manager Dialog Box im Font Manager E T gt O Available Fonts E lt e S E p 3 2 1 8 A 2Z_uppercase 4_thraugh_M FratFoni 0 0 test Rename Delete 6 Click New The New Font dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6 6 FIGURE 6 6 New Font Dialog Box E x Name Sample Font 0K poba E p tici 5 i a1 C lt Empty gt ema 0123456789 C ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWXYZ AB abedefghijkimnoparstuvwexpz abedefghikimnoparstuvwxy201 23456789 C ABCDEFGHIJKLM C NOPQRSTUVWXYZ abedefghiklm C noparstuvwxy2 7 Type a name for the new font 8 Select the initial character set characters may be deleted or added later Il PAK VH User Manual 6 21 Chapter Automatic Ide
261. more than one OCVFont Tool OCVRuntimeTool Symbology Tool or Data Matrix Tool only the last inspected tool s string is saved You can display the file differences between two configuration files When you click 21 CFR Part11 gt Reconcile Configuration Files the Reconcile Configuration Files dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5 7 Il PAK VH User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions 5 FIGURE 5 7 Reconcile Configuration Files Reconcile Configuration Files Eile Click on the two Configuration Files to Compare C Wscape l PAKjobs Configuration rchivess t a X IL 1 N Selected Configuration Files sample02 D ata dat sample03 D ata dat sample02 D ata dat sample03 D ata dat Reconcile File difference found File 1 C Y scape l PAk jobs Configuration4rchives sample02 D ata dat Line Number 4 Contents Current Date Time 11 19 2018 10 49 04 File 2 C Wscape l Pak jobs Configuration4rchives sample03 D ata dat Line Number 4 Contents Current Date Time 11 19 2018 10 49 47 File difference found File 1 C Wscape l Pak jobs Configuration4rchives sample02 D ata dat Line Number 530 Contents Signature Date Printed 11 19 2018 10 49 06 File 2 C Wscape l Pak jobs Configuration4rchives sample03 D ata dat Line Number 530 Contents Signature Date Printed 11 19 2018 10 49 49 The upper left of the display shows you all the files in your PAK_VH Jobs Conf
262. ms I Desktop Gadget Gallery D e Internet Explorer J JAI Control Tool j Windows DVD Maker Solutions E Windows Fax and Scan Windows Media Center Windows Media Player g Windows Update A XPS Viewer p Accessories J JAISDK P Maintenance ry Microscan AutoVISION amp Microscan AutoVISION 1 Jl Documentation Devices and Printers mY Tools Bg Microscan Visionscape Default Programs 4 Back Search programs and files Shut down gt man Documents Pictures Music Computer Control Panel e Once AutoVISION has started select the desired Vision HAWK Smart Camera in the dropdown 2 Emulator No Job Loaded VisionHawk32C18E Running 2 B 4 Il PAK VH User Manual File Help HTE B sf VisionHawk32C18E oe Running A License Options 192 4 0 20 File Help Tr ersion IP Address MAC Address Subnet Mask DHCI Number of serial TCP ports Starting serial TCP Port 49211 Industrial Protocol lt none gt Baud Rate 115200 Data Bits 8 rity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control None Auto Butte True Send Trigger 6 Dan 7 00 08 43 32 C1 8E 255 255 255 0 isal RS232 1 VisionHawk32C18E 192 168 0 20 Vision HAWK WVGA Setting the PC to Use a Static IP Address cies the Connect button 3 and click the lock icon 4 to take control of the camera Click on Details 5 to show the s
263. must be placed around the characters that are going to be inspected FIGURE 7 10 Tool Shape Placed Around Characters Image MICROSCAN fay Promet fees Pisao 254M s So Zoomin Ty Toot ZoomOut Ty All Ea Exit Training to Main Setup new New Tool 1S Camera Settings tenie we Options Wat Step EXPIRATION DATE pe linn Ro SEP 2008 6MAG262 ee Ee 7 12 Il PAK VH User Manual as Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts Click Tool Settings to display the OCVFont Tool s properties page Clicking on the LayoutStep tab in the properties page will display all properties for the LayoutStep The correct font needs to be selected from the Selected Font datum s list of available fonts Clicking Train causes the tool to find all characters within the ROI that are trained as symbols in the selected font The tool sets up its inspection Layout and is then ready to run Click Approve to complete the process see Figure 7 11 o O Z D im E x gt O eo FIGURE 7 11 OCVFont Tool Training Completed isionscape I PAK Image Help M I CROSC A Current Product Access Level Date Time Testl Programmer 11 19 2008 07 30 AM Change Product Advanced Settings u Next Tool p Zoomin Try Tool Font Exit Training AutoStep Previous Next CREA Settings Options Acquire Live Zoom Out
264. n Out Inspection Snapshot1 Assign6 Out Inspection Snapshotl BCRT ool1 Text i TS e Q o Select all D OK Cancel The Cancel button allows you to discard any modification that was done Only the OK button will take over the selection The Select all button allows you to select all entries in the list You will see a listing of all the selected results from the Inspection Step s property page in the Select Results to Upload field Click any of these results to be output via the RS 232 Communications Port Click OK to exit the dialog box Note You may select any or all of these inspection results to be reported at runtime through RS 232 RS 232 result reporting will affect inspection time and system throughput The fewer items you output the more efficient Il PAK VH will be If the trigger method is set to continuous or the inspection is triggered at high rates the flood of inspection results can bog down the PC s resources making the mouse unresponsive Once this product s tools are trained you can go into Run Mode Using a program such as HyperTerminal you can verify that the inspection results are being output from I PAK VH to the Communications port specified For example Il PAK VH User Manual 3 75 Chapter Ki Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 53 Sample RS 232 Results Output Terminal Phonebook Call Log Lists Snapshoti Blob Tool BlobFilter Center Poi
265. n Camera 1 Results Inspections 581 Passed 581 Time 53 00 ms Y re Som D t v ao oO 5 String Decoder test DataMatrix Tool Text Decoder test The Camera Results information box provides inspection result data from a Job It displays the Requested Result and its Value per inspection The Camera Results information box appears over the Runtime Window in an always on top mode The Operator can relocate the Camera Results information box To close the Camera Results information box click Camera Results again Camera Results displays updated data from the actively running vision tools including the following e Inspections Total number of inspections being performed e Passed Total number of passed inspections observed e Time Total inspection time in milliseconds e String The Font Tool s character string being inspected or the match string for the Data Matrix or Symbology Tool Note When inserting a Data Matrix Tool Symbology Tool Runtime Font Tool or the OCVFont Tool Il PAK VH selects automatically the text component of each tool in the Inspection step s Select Results to Upload field This data shows in the String field and the Requested Result and Value fields Only one text field can be displayed in the String field Il PAK VH User Manual 4 7 Chapter Run Mode Reference e Requested Result Reports on the items selected at
266. n RS 232 debugging tool that allows Programmers to verify that string s are sent using correct formatting l PAK VH tries to specify the exact syntax error if any of the input Il PAK VH displays and highlights errors on the Il PAK VH screen for a longer period of time so that you know that a ChangeLayout error has occurred This causes user intervention to acknowledge the bad data When I PAK VH displays the Change Lot screen users can clearly see the newly entered strings to further provide debug assistance 7 96 Il PAK VH User Manual Lot ChangeOver CHANGELAYOUT Command RS 232 ChangeLayout Error Messages In the event of data errors the error messages shown in Table 7 3 are displayed TABLE 7 3 RS 232 ChangeLayout Error Messages Error Message Change Layout Error Missing the Tool Name or the Layout Meaning The input string did not contain either the name of the OCVFont Tool or the new layout string Change Layout Error The Tool name is not in the Job Check you input syntax An OCVFont Tool with the given name could not be found in the Job Input Symbol Name not found in OCVFont The new layout string contains a Symbol Name that cannot be found in the selected OCVFont Missing 1st colon in layout The input string could not be parsed because it has an incorrect format Missing 2nd colon in layout The input string could not be parsed because it has an incorrect format
267. n becomes active after the first failed image FIGURE 4 3 Show Hide Failed Image Queue You can display up to 20 failed images default is 10 per smart camera Set the number of images in the queue using Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results gt Number of Images in Queue for more information about Number of Images in Queue see System Settings Training and Results Tab on page 6 71 Use the left and right arrow buttons Figure 4 4 to cycle through the failed images FIGURE 4 4 Failed Image Queue Previous and Next Image flee sample data matrix i Change Lot Date Time 13 30 59 9 Jul 4 4 Il PAK VH User Manual Run Mode Window Notice the counters and buttons in the two images below fate sample blob Date Time 12 20 48 7 Aug El Indicates the Newest and Last Failed Image is Displayed Failure Report Change Lot Y re i D t v ae e c 5 Inspect 7060 Pass Failure Image 1 10 Indicates the Oldest and First Failed Image is Displayed When the queue reaches the maximum number of images and an additional failure occurs the first image in the queue gets overwritten by the new failed image Click Show Hide Failed Image Queue to return to the regular Il PAK VH Camera display Click the Zoom buttons to bring the displayed failed image to the desired magnification level Reset
268. nd compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check character Note With Check Character Output Status and an External or Serial trigger option enabled an invalid check character calculation will cause a No Read message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Large Intercharacter Gap Status When enabled Visionscape can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 3x the narrow element width Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled Visionscape will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered valid Symbol Length Specifies the exact number of characters that Visionscape will recognize this does not include start and stop and Il PAK VH User Manual 6 7 Chapter Automatic Identification check character characters Visionscape ignores any symbology that does not match the specified length Full ASCII Set Status Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar sign and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled Visionscape can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 Code 93 Fixed Symbol Length Status When disabled Visionscape will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn t exceed the system s maximum capabilities When enabled Vi
269. nd groups a set of characters of a particular font style and size The OCVFont contains a default FontSymbol that is used only for setting default parameters parameters that any FontSymbol inherits when inserted into the OCVFont One or more OCVFonts are required for font based OCV Creating FontSymbols As a container step the OCVFont step creates FontSymbol steps Creating FontSymbol steps can be accomplished by individual training or automatic segmentation using the Custom Properties dialog box of the OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 7 18 OCVFont Example 1 00356699 i 88BBDDGQS By default Il PAK VH is designed such that you perform individual training of characters This is to activate runtime ID checking of special characters like O 0 B 8 D etc ID checking requires that these symbol boxes be the same size 7 20 Il PAK VH User Manual as OCVFont Individual character training requires that the OCVFont box be placed close around a single character in the image leaving a 1 2 pixel border as shown in Figure 7 18 This box should not include any portion of the adjacent characters The minimum recommended character width is 20 pixels When Train Font is clicked the Symbol Name dialog box is displayed asking for a unique name for the symbol as shown in Figure 7 19 Q a a D im g x gt oO e FIGURE 7 19 Symbol Name Dialog Box Symbol Name Enter a Un
270. ndow in a continuous mode Il PAK VH User Manual 2 19 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool This tutorial takes you through the process of setting up an inspection using the OCVRuntimeTool For more details refer to OCVRuntimeTool on page 5 44 Setting Up the Tool Set 1 From Windows select Start gt Microscan Visionscape gt Visionscape I PAK_VH I PAK VH displays its Welcome screen as shown in Figure 2 22 FIGURE 2 22 Select a Device for Il PAK VH Dialog Box l Select a Device to get started Note This screen only comes up the first time you launch I PAK VH or if the last loaded product cannot be found 2 Click OK I PAK VH displays the Select a Visionscape Device dialog box as shown in Figure 2 23 2 20 Il PAK VH User Manual N Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 2 23 Select a Visionscape Device Dialog Box Product Settings Vision Devices ff pm e I gt aa Hardware Selection Run Up to 4 Smart Cameras by Selecting from the List Below and then Clicking Here Available Smart Cameras E Network Press Ctrl Key to Select Multiple Devices Press Shift Key to Select a Range 3 Select a device Then click the Select any Smart Camera button Note If the smart camera is connected directly to a PC no network involved Il PAK VH automatically chooses the smart camera
271. needs to be trained When a unique name is entered and OK is clicked a FontSymbol is created and templates created from the ROI area of the image and default parameters are stored in that FontSymbol The green box changes to a red box and a new green box appears over the next character in the image This process continues until all characters in the image have been trained as FontSymbols and added to the OCVFont or the process is canceled OCVFont Tab When an OCVFont is selected in the Custom Properties dialog box the OCVFont tab displays the current settings for that OCVFont 7 22 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFont as FIGURE 7 21 OCVFont Properties Page ia Tool Settings olx OCVFont Layoutstep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb I Apply Automatic Min Sharpness I Apply Automatic Min Contrast rt O D i 2 x gt O 0 I Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pet 90 e Apply Automatic Min Sharpness When enabled as FontSymbols are trained and added to this OCVFont a minimum tolerance for sharpness is calculated for the FontSymbol This value is 65 of the sharpness value calculated using the trained grayscale template of the FontSymbol Default Disabled e Apply Automatic Min Contrast When enabled as FontSymbols are trained and added to this OCVFont a minimum tolerance for contrast is calculated for the FontSymbol This value is 50 of
272. new product is loaded into I PAK VH 3 70 Il PAK VH User Manual Advanced Settings 25 Il PAK VH sends an OK message when the command is successfully received and processed I PAK VH sends a FAIL message when the command is not successfully received or processed O Z D i D x Note When using the CHANGEPRODUCT command the OK response is sent out before the new product is read in This is because the new product may not have the same Input Output channel selections xe te Q 3 System Settings Training and Results Tab FIGURE 3 48 System Setting Dialog Box Training and Results Tab Communication Training and Results General Product ChangeO ver Activities Training V Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver V AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training M Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot IV Reset Statistics after re training 7 Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller IV Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout Archive Path T I Go directly between RunMode and Training Results Reporting OCV Training I Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontT ools Save Runtime Results to a File M Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontlessT ools 7 Enable OC Failure Tracking nal Communications Timeout 160 Seconds Match String Mismatch Action lt I Enable Failed Image Queue Save Failure Queue Images on Ret
273. nfiguration and Statistics files from being compromised 5 21 Can this data be saved to a non editable format 5 21 How do know who made the last batch or change 5 21 My company wants the number of login failures to be 3 but Il PAK VH defaults to 5 What can do 5 22 If get an alarm on I PAK VH how will know someone saw it 5 22 What is the date format used inside the Part 11 files 5 22 What if Il PAK VH runs out of hard drive space 5 22 Automatic Identification 6 1 Symbology Tool 6 2 OCRTrainableFont Tool 6 12 Theory of Operation 6 13 OCR Font Training 6 19 Training Tips 6 33 Tips for Marking OCR Fonts 6 34 IntelliText OCR 6 35 IntelliText Overview 6 35 IntelliText Binarization 6 36 IntelliText OCR Tool Inputs 6 37 Optimization Examples 6 40 IntelliText OCR Tool Outputs 6 47 OCV Reference 7 1 Overview 7 2 OCV Inspection 7 2 Additional Filters 7 3 Brief Descriptions 7 4 vi Il PAK VH User Manual Contents Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts 7 5 Custom Properties 7 6 Main Custom Properties Dialog Box 7 7 Font Manager Dialog Box 7 9 Training Fonts 7 10 Training the OCVFont Tool 7 12 Remove Symbol Dialog 7 14 Automatic Font Selection and Scaling Dialog 7 14 Automatic Font Selection The AutoFont Button 7 15 Font Scaling The Scale Button 7 19 OCVFont 7 20 Creating FontSymbols 7 20 OCVFont Tab 7 22 LayoutStep Tab 7 25 AutoThreshold Tab 7 25 ComputePolarity Tab 7 27 DefaultSymb Tab 7 2
274. ng of the characters inspected by the Job isa number lt lf gt is a line feed character chr 10 lt cr gt is a carriage return character chr 13 lt eot gt is an end of text character chr 4 or Ctrl D in HyperTerminal Note If there are no Inspected Characters in the Job the third line of data will not be present When there is more than one inspection the I P and R lines indicate the inspection number such as 11 P1 R1 e Clear Statistics When I PAK VH receives this command the Inspect Pass and Fail counts are set to zero e Go To Setup Mode When I PAK VH receives this command the system returns to Setup Mode without requiring a password If Il PAK VH is already in Setup Mode no action is taken Go To Run Mode When Il PAK VH receives this command the system enters Run Mode If Il PAK VH is already in Run Mode no action is taken e Change Product This is the only remote command that requires a parameter see Protocol on page 3 65 When I PAK VH receives this command the system attempts to load the indicated product If the product cannot be found or has other problems loading Il PAK VH returns a FAIL to the Output Channel selected If Il PAK VH is in Run Mode inspections stop The new product is loaded into Il PAK VH and downloaded to the smart camera Then inspections begin If Il PAK VH is in Setup Mode the
275. ng set TRUE for 1 second and then FALSE for 1 second alternatively to indicate that Il PAK VH is functional At this one second interval the Il PAK VH software is verifying the operational mode of the smart camera If the smart camera is not operational the HeartBeat output is set to FALSE and remains FALSE until the smart camera is again operational When in Setup Mode and training OCVFont Tools the timing of HeartBeat may deviate from 1 second True 1 second False The HeartBeat output is generated by Il PAK VH During periods of heavy PC loading the HeartBeat Output frequency can change For example during a download the HeartBeat will not pulse because all resources are downloading the Job to the smart camera s PLC monitoring must be written with these scenarios in mind For example monitor the HeartBeat every 1 second when the Run Mode output is also asserted While in Setup Mode the Run Mode Setup Mode Output is set to FALSE During Run Mode the Run Mode Setup Mode Output is set to TRUE External monitoring of the I O point indicates when I PAK VH is ready to run Inputs Must be set to In to Enable e Inspection Trigger is an input that instructs I PAK VH to conduct one inspection cycle for each inspection trigger l PAK VH receives from an external source The default for this is I O 1 of the Fixed IO Points e You may use an input as a handshake to clear a pass output Il PAK VH User Manual 3 61
276. nged until the Approve Inspect Characters window is displayed as shown in Figure 7 53 FIGURE 7 53 Match String Training Dialog Box a a i g x gt oO e Enter Line 1 of Match String Input Line 1 separate the symbol names with spaces Abbrechen _ For each line of characters found during training Il PAK VH does the following e Displays an input box Input Line N message where N is replaced by the number of the line being waited for FIGURE 7 54 Match String Input Prompt Enter Line 1 of Match String Input Line 1 separate the symbol names with spaces Abbrechen _ e Waits for a string to be input When a string is input Il PAK VH examines it to determine which symbol names are in it If any of the input symbol names are not found in the OCVFont I PAK VH displays an error message as shown in Figure 7 55 and forces you to retrain by displaying only the Disapprove button Il PAK VH User Manual 7 79 Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 7 55 Match String Error Message Bad Symbol Name Input Match String X Input Symbol Name 1 Not Found In OCYFont e Ifthe number of symbols is not the same in each string an error message is displayed as shown in Figure 7 56 and only the Disapprove button is displayed forcing you to retrain FIGURE 7 56 Match String Error Message Incorrect Numbers of Symbols Input Match String Ifthe input s
277. ngs dialog box Data Valid tab as shown in Figure 2 8 FIGURE 2 8 Product Settings Dialog Box Data Valid Tab IPAKY H1 Data Valid Duration ms 1 0 11 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the Product Setting dialog box I O tab as shown in Figure 2 9 Il PAK VH User Manual Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 9 Product Settings I O Tab 10 Configuration Fixed 10 Points In None Out 1 Data Valid Inspection 1 7 Out 2 Inspection 1 Passed x Ec E 12 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box Communication tab as shown in Figure 2 10 FIGURE 2 10 System Settings Dialog Box Communication Tab Selection Input Channel None 7 Output Channel None x r Configure R5232 Ethernet TCP IP 13 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box Training and Results tab as shown in Figure 2 11 2 10 Il PAK VH User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 11 System Settings Dialog Box Training and Results Tab Communication Training and Results General Product ChangeO ver Activities Training IV Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver MV AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training F Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot IV Reset Statistics after re training I
278. nt Each grouping of results is terminated with an EOT The format of these inspection results is STX symbolic name result ETX Where STX is Chr 2 ETX is Chr 3 EOT is Chr 4 Note Sometimes inspection results reported are in the form of arrays or lists Data will be reported in full PAK VH will not parse or interpret data results e Save Runtime Results to a File Once it is selected click OK from the System Settings dialog box and exit the Advanced SubMenu Default Not Selected Note Follow the same setup of Il PAK VH s inspection results to upload as described above see Enable RS 232 Runtime Results on page 3 74 before going into the Save Results dialog box Then you will notice an additional button available on the Statistics Data SubMenu called Save Results 3 76 Il PAK VH User Manual Advanced Settings 25 FIGURE 3 54 Updated Statistics SubMenu for Save Results Save Save Transmit p Preview i Clear Clear Stats Contig Save Save Config Transmit Ene Preview ose Statistics Failures Fie File Images Results File Statistics File Statistics Statistics So o9 o Q 52 ee oY N Click Save Results the following dialog box is displayed FIGURE 3 55 Save Results Select the Specific Inspection Results to Output to a File Tool Results to Output Inspection Snapshotl FontT ooll Text Inspection1 Snapshot1 Assign5 Out Inspection Sna
279. nt for all FontSymbols being inspected FontSymbols may still make individual adjustments to the thresholds using their own Auto Threshold Adjustment properties The ComputePolarity step of the OCVFont Tool belongs to the LayoutStep It is not used by an OCVFont Tool 7 42 Il PAK VH User Manual a OCVFont Tool Step Tip After the OCVFont Tool has been trained positioning the mouse over the ROI displays a Step Tip This Step Tip provides information and graphical feedback for individual symbols when the mouse is over a symbol area Train information includes the Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the binary template and a bitmap representation of the binary template as shown in Figure 7 30 Y 3 g 2 D Z gt Oo FIGURE 7 30 Step Tip Example 1 When the mouse is not positioned over a particular symbol area the Step Tip displays the currently trained Layout Characters or just the name of the OCVFont Tool when it is not trained as shown in Figure 7 31 FIGURE 7 31 Step Tip Example 2 387A901 When the OCVFont Tool has been run doing a Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key when the mouse is positioned over the symbol area as shown in Figure 7 32 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 43 Chapter T OCV Reference FIGURE 7 32 Step Tip Example 3 Inspection information
280. ntification 9 Click OK to close the New Font dialog box The Font Manager is displayed again 10 Highlight the newly created font and click Select 11 In Il PAK VH click Acquire New Image to capture a new image Acquiring a new image clears the image of all overlay graphics 12 Size the ROI to completely surround the characters to be trained as shown in Figure 6 7 FIGURE 6 7 Sizing the ROI Eel lu BB O Characters ICCA IAM Merere oj ie is ale le ele Ibe elt EL im Font Font Name OCRTFDemo Trained on 11 17 2017 10 50 28 AM Select Font 13 In the custom editor type the characters to be trained into the Text or Characters to Include text box Figure 6 7 Note Do not type spaces In the image in Figure 6 7 the ROI completely surrounds the characters 12345 The red lines defining the ROI should not touch the characters to be included 6 22 Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool The Maintain Case checkbox forces the Text or Character to Include to uppercase if the font consists of uppercase characters ABC For example if you type klm the characters will be converted to KLM when you click the Include button Maintain Case also forces characters to lowercase if the font consists of lowercase characters abc 14 Click Include Recently included characters will be highlighted in blue Characters remain highlighted un
281. ob is downloaded to each smart camera all inspections are started and the I PAK VH interface goes into Run Mode Running I PAK VH for the First Time When you run I PAK VH for the first time you will be prompted to select a smart camera as described above Then I PAK VH will create a sample Job Sample avp for you and download it to the smart camera This is an example or a sample of a job you might run at your production plant This sample job does not use live images from the camera Instead it displays an image file sample tif from the PC s hard drive Il PAK VH User Manual Il PAK VH Start up Procedure Typical FIGURE 1 1 Sample Job at First Time Startup MICROSCAN Change Lot T Failure Report LETE Operator Inspect 28 Pass 28 Fail 0 d 2020 mm A Es 2 pe S 3 Q 2 mm gt lt A Sample avp contains a default vision tool setup that includes an Inspection a Snapshot using Camera 1 in continuous mode a 100 ms Wait Step and a Fontless Tool All tools are untrained meaning that this sample inspection will fail every cycle Il PAK VH s first time startup will run this Sample job in continuous mode no triggers needed on a sample image so you can see the counters increment Then you can go to Setup Mode and either train the Fontless tool on the sample image or create your own production job Note After you exit Run Mode
282. oduct Clicking this button allows you to loada different product file Exit Il PAK VH Clicking this button exits Il PAK VH Once the device is discovered Il PAK VH must Take Control of it You can define a User Name and Password for each smart camera which can be used to Take Control of the device The Vision HAWK s User Name and Password are blank by default Once you have control of a device you can download Jobs to it start and stop inspections etc Other users are locked out of the device while you have control of it Il PAK VH User Manual 1 11 Chapter Il PAK VH Inspection Il PAK VH will try to take control using the default user name and password it will also try to use no user name and password If these fail then a dialog box will be displayed asking you to enter the user name and password If you enter the correct values and I PAK VH is able to take control successfully these values will be saved so that in the future it can take control automatically This means that you don t need to enter user names and passwords for each device every time you start up and every time you change products Note The user name and password used to take control of the smart camera has nothing to do with the user names and passwords used by I PAK VH itself when using 21 CFR Part 11 do not confuse them Once I PAK VH has discovered and taken control of each of the devices used by the Product the J
283. og box is enabled Clicking this button displays the Job Archive dialog box as shown in Figure 3 13 FIGURE 3 13 Job Archive Dialog Box Fonts Button Job Archive Type Jobs Fonts Current Fonts Archived Fonts DefaultFont ocyv Font ocy font2 ocv myFont ocy myFont ocy lt Restore Select All ox Click Fonts to archive restore font files and images from to the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder To archive Fonts from the Current Fonts folder to the Archived Fonts click on the Font name from the left hand list Then click on Save gt to copy those files onto the archival path To select more than one file at a time hold the Ctrl key while clicking file names To restore Fonts from the Archived Fonts to the Current Fonts folder simply click on the Font name from the right hand list Then click on lt Restore to copy that Font back to the Current Fonts folder Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Train and Tryout Train and Tryout Train and Tryout displays the Train and Tryout wizard mode window as shown in Figure 3 14 Lo O09 o Q sv w Q oY FIGURE 3 14 Train and Tryout Wizard Window Image Masking Tool Help M CROSC AN Current Product Access Level Date Time Testi Programmer 11 17 2017 02 40 PM Zoom In i AutoStep Tool a Exit AutoStep Mode ON H Settings Options Acquire Live nR Mode ates ati X Inspection1 J Snapsho
284. old Mode Binarization Mean Factor Binarization Dynamic Range Scaling Factor FixedTemplate 0 500 0 500 j 1 000 The next step is to start reducing the Binarization Mean Factor Around a value of 0 2 to 0 15 characters will start to appear on this particular mark 4 i i f Pie ee ee ERA J i i i 3 F a a a Match String Binary Threshold Mode 0 152 Binarization Mean Factor Binarization Dynamic Range Scaling Factor FixedTemplate 0 oO 2 By continuing to reduce the Binarization Mean Factor on this particular sample noise will start showing up around 0 Match String Binary Threshold Mode Binarization Mean Factor Binarization Dynamic Range Scaling Factor FixedTemplate Il PAK VH User Manual 6 41 Chapter Automatic Identification The next step is to raise the threshold again until most of the background noise and objects are eliminated Note that the characters might start to erode a bit again but are still well formed Match String Binary Threshold Mode FixedTemplate E g 6 F m n 4 E o 95031900 E The Binary Dynamic Range is then lowered having the effect of filling in the countour around the character The result is a well segmented mark Match String Binary Threshold Mode FixedT
285. on page 3 33 e Transmit Statistics starting on page 3 37 Preview Config File starting on page 3 39 e Preview Statistics starting on page 3 40 e OCV Tracking on page 3 40 e Close Statistics starting on page 3 42 Clear Statistics This is a Supervisor level function Clear Statistics resets the Inspect Pass and Fail counts to zero 0 It also resets the Failure Counters on the Failure Report to zero 0 At this point Il PAK VH clears the counts sets them to zero that are stored in the registry A dialog box is displayed verifying that statistics have been reset Il PAK VH User Manual Statistics and Data 25 Note There are limits on the counters based on display restrictions For example Inspected 10 characters up to 2 147 483 647 Pass 10 characters up to 2 147 483 647 Fail 10 characters up to 2 147 483 647 If another inspection occurs after the counters have reached this limit then the counter is set to 2 147 483 647 and stops incrementing This limit 2 147 483 647 is based on the size of a VB LONG So O9 c o Q 52 i vy Save Stats File Save Stats File saves the last runtime statistics to a file The data saved includes Product date time and counters When Part 11 is enabled the statistics file is read only Save Config File This is a Supervisor level function Save Config File saves a human readable version of
286. on percentage The symbol will fail inspection when the correlation percentage is less than this value Default 25 Range 0 to 100 Allowed Movement in X Sets the maximum number of pixels that a symbol can move in the X axis relative to other symbols from its trained position Default 50 pixels any movement is allowed Range 0 to 50 pixels The maximum of 50 pixels comes from the parent OCVTool setting Individual Symbol Search X which limits the search range in X to a maximum of 50 pixels in either direction Allowed Movement in Y Set the maximum number of pixels that a symbol can move in the Y axis relative to other symbols from its trained position Default 50 pixels any movement is allowed Range 0 to 50 pixels The maximum of 50 pixels comes from the parent OCVTool setting Individual Symbol Search Y which limits the search range in Y to a maximum of 50 pixels in either direction Residue Limit Units Inputs the residue limits in either a maximum pixel count value or a percentage value percentage value is based on the number of On pixels in the trained template When the value of this property changes the values of Initial Residue Limit and Final Residue Limit are changed to match the selected units Default Percentage Initial Residue Limit Provides a quick check of the character quality and correctness The initial residue calculation is done before any image processing is done on th
287. on uses edge detection to determine foreground and background information The calculated threshold is displayed in Threshold Although it is called AutoThreshold the Auto portion can be disabled When disabled no calculation is done The threshold used by the parent step is whatever value is in the Threshold property The Edge Energy Threshold and Threshold Adjustment properties are not used when Auto is disabled Default Enabled Edge Energy Threshold Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This property is only used when Auto Thresholding Enabled is enabled Default 20 Range 0 to 255 Threshold Adjustment Offsets or biases the dynamically calculated threshold when Auto is enabled Default 0 Range 64 to 64 Threshold Displays the dynamically calculated threshold when auto is enabled When auto is disabled the value of this property is the threshold that is used by the parent step Default 135 Range 0 to 255 The ComputePolarity step of the OCVFontless Tool is used for automatic segmentation of the image during training FIGURE 7 44 ComputePolarity Properties Page Tool Settings OCVFontless Tool TwoPt Locator AutoFind AutoThreshold ComputePolarity a PA Default Datum Order v ComputePolarity Inputs EB Polarity Automate Light on Dark Dark on Light Automatic Il PAK VH User Manual 7 63 a
288. ool If Step Template Find Image rith Tool ThreePt Locator IImageView Step Tolerance Meas IntelliFind Tool Trajectory Step IntelliT ext OCR Tool TwoPt Locator Cancel 18 Click to select OCVRuntimeTool and click OK 19 Right click on Acquire 1 Click to select Wait Step and click OK This displays the Product Creation Acquire 1 Tools Detail dialog box as shown in Figure 2 36 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 29 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 36 Product Creation Acquire 1 Tools Detail Acquire 1 OCVRuntimeT ool Wait Step Camera 1 20 Now you have all the steps required for this tutorial Click OK twice Type a name for the Job and click Save 21 The Setup Mode Train and Tryout wizard window is displayed If the AutoStep Mode button is ON click Exit AutoStep Mode see Figure 2 37 FIGURE 2 37 Turning AutoStep Mode OFF Image MICROSCAN Fango Product out A it f Ent AutoStep pi ES 61 2930 x220 Y 207 5 w 100H 75 0 0 inputs OCVRuntimeTool Is Not Trained JPutputs OCVRuntimeTool Is Not Trained Curent Tool OCVRuntimeTool Font Selected DefaultFont Part11 Disabled 11 18 2018 2 48PM 2 30 Il PAK VH User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool Font Training At least one OCVFont is required to use the OCVRuntimeTool OCVFonts are stored in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts
289. operties FIGURE 7 2 Font Editor Button Access Level Date Time Programmer 11 18 2018 02 51 PM Statistics and Data Advanced Settings Min ers Zoomin Try Tool es Options Acquire Live Eon Exit Training Zoom Out Try All itor f to Main Setup The Custom Properties dialog box for the font based OCV tool creates and modifies fonts on the system With a font based OCV tool selected as the current tool from the Train and Tryout screen of Il PAK VH clicking on the Font Editor toolbar button brings up the Custom Properties dialog box Note The Font Editor toolbar button does not appear in AutoStep mode because the AutoStep mode is only aware of tools and shapes within the current Setup Manager configuration Font Editing relies on the ability to insert remove OCVFont steps for training and manipulation Because these OCVFont steps are inserted removed dynamically the AutoStep mode does not know about them and does not allow the shapes to appear in the buffer Without the shapes the training of these OCVFonts is not possible 7 6 Il PAK VH User Manual as Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts Main Custom Properties Dialog Box FIGURE 7 3 Main Custom Properties Dialog Box Properties OC Font Tool Font Selected Font DefaultFont Training Debug Delay jo ms I Apply Automatic Min Sharpness ee Symbols Trained in This Font Apply Automatic Min Contrast
290. ou the information from the Statistics File the Configuration File and the decrypted Audit Trail You can choose to select all or some of these files for the other options 5 8 Il PAK VH User Manual 21 CFR Part 11 Functions 5 FIGURE 5 4 Viewing End of Batch Reports Current Product Testi Statistics M Microscan Visionscape l PAK YH RunTime Statistics File for Product Test Current Date Time 11 19 2018 09 27 41 _ q t A x LL 1S N Config File M Data File for Product Test Visionscape I PAK YH Microscan Visionscape I PAK VH Current Date Time 11 19 2018 09 27 39 Name of I PAK YH System default Data File for Product Test1 gt Vision Device Vision1 lt gt gt Vision1 lt lt Digitizer Selected CAM 1 0 3200 Digitizer Mode Single Board Normal FRET TLIC BOT APT eR OR Audit Trail IV Updated Audit Trail Scheme PAK VH 11 19 2018 13 56 42 Visionscape PAK VH Start of PAK VH Audit Trail 11 19 2018 09 24 30 LoginName NONE Action System Settings Parameter changed Old Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 False New Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 True Reason for Change is because 11 19 2018 09 24 34 LoginName NONE Action Exitting System Settings OK clicked 11 19 2018 09 24 38 LoginN ame NONE Action Advanced Settings Save Product Test1 11 19 2018 09 24 39 LoginN ame NONE Action Entering Advanced Settings Advanced
291. ow the printed characters to be excluded masked out from other image processing Default 1 Graphics Level Sets up different levels of debug graphics at runtime The default Show ROI Only will only show the ROI boxes associated with the OCVFont Tool and the characters being inspected green for passed red for failed When set to Show None no graphics are shown at runtime When set to Show Basic Graphics a number indicating the symbol s position in the layout is shown along with the ROI boxes 7 40 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFont Tool a FIGURE 7 28 Graphics Level Example o O D i 2 D x gt O eo When set to Show Details residue graphics are displayed green pixels are those that were not there at train time but are in the image at runtime fills while yellow pixels are those that were there at train time but are not there at runtime voids The LayoutStep for the OCVFont Tool selects an OCVFont and sets up the learn layout process FIGURE 7 29 LayoutStep Properties Page Tool Settings OCVFont Tool AutoFind OnePt Locator L AutoThreshold ComputePolarity amp g Bl A g Default Datum Order kd LayoutStep Inputs Ef Selected Font DefaultFont E Allowed Overlap During Read 5 g Min Read Match 65 000 Kk Automatic Threshold Adjustment w ia e Selected Font Allows selection of an OCVFont to use for training and inspections
292. ower Supply Software PowerChute will install and search for a UPS connected to the PC PowerChute Business Edition gt xe c co o rE SH Checking for the presence of a UPS When prompted you will need to assign a username and password for the the UPS and the PowerChute software In the example on the next page the username is user and the password is password lii il Please enter the username and password you would like to use q for PowerChute Business Edition software NOTE This username and password must be the same for the console BUSINESS EDITION server and all managed agents Agents with different passwords will require multiple servers to manage them Username Password Confirm Once completed you will launch and configure the UPS software to support I PAK VH Il PAK VH User Manual A 7 Appendix Installation and Software Configuring PowerChute Software From the Start Menu launch PowerChute Business Edition Note Powerchute uses TCP IP to communicate to and configure the UPS Ensure all devices are on the same network the Vision HAWK PC and UPS e Use your login username and password to access Once launched and logged in a screen similar to this will appear YM PowerChute Business Edit x gt C amp baps 10 20 1 47 6547 main K i Smart UPS SC420 PowerChute System Status Summary Business Edition UPS System Status
293. perty is used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated sharpness value must be in order for the inspection to pass When set to Percentage the value of the Minimum Allowed Sharpness is used to calculate a percentage of the trained sharpness value which is then used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated sharpness value must be in order for the inspection to pass When switched from Gray Level to Percentage the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is updated to be the percentage value that corresponds to the gray level value that it previously held When switched from Percentage to Gray Level the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is updated to be the gray level value that corresponds to the percentage value that it previously held Default Gray Level e Minimum Allowed Sharpness Determines how crisp a symbol must be to pass inspection It is measured by average edge strength over the entire symbol Typical edge strengths are from 20 to 80 sharpness units Default 0 Range 0 to 256 Gray Level or 0 to 100 Percentage e Contrast Limit Units Sets the units for the Minimum Allowed Contrast property When set to Gray Level the value of the Minimum Allowed Contrast property is used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated contrast value must be in order for the inspection to pass When set to Percentage the value of the Minimum Allowed Contrast is used to calculate a percentage o
294. pixels high it is rather large for optimum text segmentation Because the mark is so large the algorithm has detected segments from the C on different lines of characters By modification of the scaling the segmentation problem is resolved Note that this low contrast mark may experience some instability from image to image with Auto binarization and would likely benefit from a Fixed Template setting Il PAK VH User Manual 6 43 Chapter Automatic Identification Scaling Increase Usage Consider the following dot mark with close and partially touching characters The mark is at reasonable resolution but the close characters are creating segmentation problems Character thresholds can be modified to separate them but this can be challenging particularly with the JUN segment Setting the scaling to 2 0 in combination with over exposing the image creates a good separation that binarizes well and subsequently segments properly and consistently 6 44 Il PAK VH User Manual IntelliText OCR Character Threshold Usage Example 1 SE e 1o o Eg a 2 5 lt 5 Consider the following segmentation problem The mark mostly segments well but splits a couple characters up because of poor horizontal connection between the dots In this example the maximum character width is about 20 pixels The segmentation problem can be resolved by increasing the minimum
295. pshotl Assign4 Out Inspection1 Snapshot FontT ool2 Text Inspection Snapshot1 Assign Out Inspection1 Snapshot1 Assign6 Out Inspection Snapshot1 BCRT ool Text Select all Clear all Specify the File Delimiter Commal C Hash C Asterisk Filename to be Used Y MV ws prod ipak Inspection Browse Cancel The Cancel button allows you to discard any modification that was done Only the OK button will take over the selection The Select all button allows you to select all entries in the list The Browse button allows you to navigate to the folder and file of the used file Clicking this button opens the Select DAT File dialog box In this dialog box you can select an existing DAT file used for writing the Output data It is also possible to write a new filename into the filename field The file will be created and can be used Il PAK VH User Manual 3 77 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference You will see a listing of all the selected results from the Inspection Step s property page in the Select Results to Upload field Now you need to click any of these results to be output to a file You must also specify the file delimiter You can choose between the comma default ora ora By default the File name is InspectionResults dat If you wish to change the file name or its path specify this data in this dialog box Click OK to exit this dialog box Note You m
296. ptions Allow you to set the Tryout operation e Do Acquire Currently this option is disabled e Show I O Results Sets the Opto Outputs as a result of running the Job definition in Tryout This allows for a near live simulation The default is selected e Triggered I O or Sensor During a Tryout this allows I PAK VH to use the trigger mechanism When you select Trigger in the Trigger Acquire Method of the Product Setting Cameras dialog box this appears checked e Loop Allows the system to loop continuously through the Job definition performing a Tryout inspection rather than running through just once If selected the Try All button s text changes to Try Stop The Supervisor can stop this continuous tryout cycle by then selecting Try Stop The default is not selected e Delay Allows you to pause briefly between tools to analyze resulting graphics The default is not selected 3 22 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Train and Tryout Acquire This is a Supervisor level function Acquire takes an image using the pre defined trigger criteria fire strobe etc from the Options dialog box The image is displayed on the display buffer in the lower part of the screen This is useful when using a strobe allowing you to view a production image So o9 c o a 52 w Q vy 9 The image last Acquired is saved by I PAK VH In the Training and Tryout menu as you go through the Job by clicking Next and Pr
297. r Height Two or More Characters This allows you to specify a minimum and maximum height for the characters found Default No height limits Limit Character Width Two or More Characters This allows you to specify a minimum and maximum width for the characters found Default No width limits Limit the Number of Characters Single Character Two or More Characters When enabled the tool will return only a limited number of characters The characters with the maximum confidence level up to that limit see Maximum Number of Characters description will be returned Default Disabled Min Character Area pixels Two or More Characters This option is displayed only when you disable the Allow Segmented Characters option This setting specifies the minimum size of a character thereby eliminating segments that are too small to be characters by themselves Default 40 Il PAK VH User Manual 6 17 f SE e Io o Eg F lt 5 Chapter Automatic Identification TABLE 6 1 OCRTrainableFont Tool Settings Alphabetized continued Property Description Minimum Confidence This option is displayed only when the Check Single Character Character Confidence property is enabled You can Two or More Characters enter a confidence level that the tool must find for each character Any character that cannot be matched to at least this input level will be returned as the un
298. ral gt Set Passwords To Expire option as well as specifying the duration of the password For more information about the menu items see 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration on page 6 92 t a x IL oO N Note Create an SOP that defines your password expiration duration 5 Now bring in your Il PAK Administrator to begin assigning login names passwords access and retraining rights Always remember to define a Programmer and at least one Supervisor Your day to day users should be Operators and Supervisors When an I PAK Administrator creates a user account a listing of user names encrypted user passwords and access levels will be created When entering Setup Mode from Run Mode you will have to enter a user name and user password via the Il PAK VH keyboard or a Login dialog box Based on the user name and password entered the appropriate access level will be granted during Setup Mode Note A 21 CFR Part 11 System Setting Use OnScreen Keypad instead of PC Keyboard enables an OnScreen Keyboard for entering login and training approval user names and passwords rather than the I PAK VH keyboard For more information see page 6 95 At all times the current access level is clearly displayed An active user reverts back to Operator mode after the user defined no activity limit is reached Any time there is a violation an entry is made to a security log file An Il PAK Administrator can view this f
299. rator access level after that period of System Inactivity The default time interval is 15 minutes i fe Q o e Set Number of Failed Login Attempts Setting the number of failed login attempts to a number between 1 and 10 causes the I PAK VH system to suspend a user who has unsuccessfully tried to login X number of times in a row Only an I PAK Administrator can restore this suspended account The default is 5 e Enable Saving Stats and Config Files from Stats Menu Enabling this option makes a more configurable I PAK VH user interface This setting enables and disables the buttons for Save Stats and Save Config Files saving the Statistics and Configuration files from the Statistics and Data submenus e Use OnScreen Keypad instead of PC Keyboard Enabling this option causes I PAK VH to display an OnScreen Keyboard for entering login and training approval user names and passwords Menu Settings This section allows you to streamline the menus e Streamline Menus Presents a clean less cluttered Operator interface e Show All Menu Options Advanced Users Default Select this option to display the menus like they are presented in this user manual e Enable Change Lot in Run Mode When checked the Change Lot button is visible in Run Mode meaning Change Lot is possible e Automatic Open Softkeyboard When checked the Softkeyboard is opened automatically if the selected dialog box
300. re freed for re use If the buffers are not freed fast enough because image processing is taking too long the acquisition process will run out of buffers A trigger overrun occurs when a trigger arrives but the smart camera is still busy acquiring an image from the last trigger and is therefore not capable of handling this trigger See the Vision HAWK Smart Camera Guide to find out the maximum achievable rate for the image size selected in your application Il PAK VH User Manual Exiting Run Mode and Entering Setup Mode Exiting Run Mode and Entering Setup Mode To begin the sequence of exiting Run Mode click the Key button as shown in Figure 4 12 FIGURE 4 12 Exit to Setup Mode Y re D i D t ao e 5 ase Sample ocvfonttools Setup Failure Report Change Lot All camera displays will be closed automatically All open reports failure reports and result displays will be closed automatically Il PAK VH saves the last runtime image for each smart camera These images are used in subsequent training sequences The inspection counters are saved to the registry When running with 21 CFR Part 11 with Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 on a Login dialog box is displayed Enter your user name and password Otherwise you are presented with a keypad to enter your Supervisor or Programmer password In either scenario after your password is successfully entered your inspect
301. re selected in the OCRTrainableFont Tool Until Save Font is clicked font changes may be abandoned Close the OCRTF Training dialog box and click No when prompted to save changes Tips for Marking OCR Fonts Use either the numeral 0 or the letter O but not both If a human operator has trouble distinguishing characters quickly the vision system will also have difficulty Unlike machine readable codes such as Data Matrix OCR does not have built in error correction Misreads are possible For example 813 may be reported as B13 If possible include a checksum character in the printed text Results Status Set to true after a successful execution of the step Number of Characters Found Total number of character objects found whether or not they were successfully decoded Output String The set of characters found within the ROI placed in order from the top left most character and scanning to the right then down Characters that are found but not decoded will be represented by the character defined by Set Unknown Characters To Minimum Character Confidence The lowest match level of the characters successfully decoded Il PAK VH User Manual IntelliText OCR Mean Character Confidence The mean match level of the characters successfully decoded This excludes the confidence level of any characters that were excluded by the Minimum Confidence parameter Maximum Character Confidence
302. re training Enabling this setting automatically resets the Runtime statistics to zero when you perform a Product ChangeOver and when you create a new product This makes I PAK VH ready to go On line with counters set to zero Default Selected e AutoStep Mode on Automatically in Train and Tryout Enabling this setting sets the Train and Tryout menu s AutoStep Wizard Mode on Some users may want to disable this AutoStep Mode option so they can just go right to the tools they wish to retrain or adjust Default Selected Go directly between RunMode and Training Enabling this setting brings you right into the Train and Tryout menus directly from Run Mode You will bypass the main Setup Menu You may find this useful if you usually come out of Run Mode and go directly into Train and Tryout This saves a mouse click Default Selected This section allows you to e Automatically train multiple OCVFont and OCVFontless tools e Specify the intended inspection string externally Set the amount of time that the communications handshake waits e Define the action that I PAK VH takes in the event that the string input from the external device does not match the string learned when the tool was trained Il PAK VH User Manual 3 85 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference Specify the intended inspection string for an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool Send the final inspection string out after training an OCVFont Tool or OCVRunt
303. rence When you select either the OCVFont Tool or the OCVRuntimeTool the Font Editor button appears in the toolbar For more information about using Font Editor see Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts on page 5 5 3 24 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Train and Tryout Exit Training to Main Setup This is a Supervisor level function Exit Training to Main Setup allows the Supervisor to leave Train and Tryout Mode and return to the Setup Mode window All tools should be trained before clicking Exit Training to Main Setup The Job definition is saved to the hard drive when Exit Training to Main Setup is selected So o9 c o a 52 ee Automatically Setting Tool Settings The I PAK VH interface automatically sets tool settings that are the most useful for users e When inserting a Data Matrix Tool Symbology Tool Runtime Font Tool or the OCVFont Tool Il PAK VH automatically selects the text component of each tool in the Inspection step s Select Results to Upload field This data is shown on the Results Display dialog box in the String field Requested Result and Value fields Only one text field can be displayed in the String field The text fields hold either the Font Tool s current inspected character string or the Data Matrix or Symbology Tool s match string e When inserting a Data Matrix Tool its tool graphics are set to show basic graphics Special Training of Tools
304. rial settles on the print and appears brighter than the print in the image This filter eliminates the bright specks and allows proper inspection of the print Note Typically this test is not used in pharmaceutical applications Brief Descriptions e OCVFont An OCVFont step is a container of one or more FontSymbol steps The OCVFont contains a default FontSymbol that is used only for setting default parameters parameters that any FontSymbol will inherit when inserted into the OCVFont One or more OCVFonts are required for font based OCV OCVFonts are created and modified using the Custom Properties dialog box of the OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool OCVFonts are stored separately from the inspection Job file in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder FontSymbol A FontSymbol is a collection of template images settings and tolerances that inspect a character or logo at runtime OCVFont Tool An OCVFont Tool uses an OCVFont to learn the layout and determine which characters from the OCVFont are in which locations in the FOV Once the layout is learned the OCVFont Tool expects to find these symbols at the same locations during inspection It uses the data from the FontSymbols in the OCVFont to verify the quality of the characters being inspected OCVRuntimeToo l An OCVRuntimeTool uses an OCVFont called the Master Font to learn the layout and determine which characters from the OCVFont are in which locations in th
305. ring Mismatch Action Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Number of Images in Queue r F Keyboard Input of Match String Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second C Maximum 2 4 Cg 15 Observe the default settings Click Next This displays the System Settings dialog box General tab as shown in Figure 2 33 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 27 N ff A i je H I gt lt Ea Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 33 System Settings Dialog Box General Tab Job Settings Menu Settings ETES C Streamline Menus eee eee eee zi Show All Menu Options Advanced Users v Enable Change Lot In Run Mode End Batch Automatic Open Softkeyboard Enable End Batch Functionality Il PAK Windows Setting 21 CFR Part 11 Configuration f IV Enable Desktop Turn off Always on Top J Enable User Name Access Enable Part 11 T Enable Il PAK to be Minimized J Enable Configuration File Audit Trail m Config File Format J Enable User Logins for Training Approvals US Letter Format E Set Passwords to Expire amp 4 Format Set Time Limit for System Inactivity Revert to Operator Mode 1 PAK System Name e 5 Minutes 15 Minutes 320 Minutes 60 Minutes System Name ldefaut tt sti lt sSS Set Number of Failed Login Attempt eed Joe Wi TA ES Sy HOT eel Sa E JV Enable Saving Stats and Config Files fron F Use OnScre Stats Menu en Keypad m
306. ring the learn layout process Default 65 Range 0 to 100 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 51 a rt O D im D x gt O eo Chapter T OCV Reference e Automatic Threshold Adjustment Enables and disables the automatic threshold adjustment feature When enabled the best match location during the learn layout process calculates an adjustment to the threshold used to create binary images at runtime This calculated value is set in the Threshold Adjustment property AutoThreshold tab The AutoThreshold tab of the OCVRuntimeTool belongs to the LayoutStep and is used only at runtime The only property used is the Threshold Adjustment property which serves as a global adjustment for all FontSymbols being inspected FontSymbols may still make individual adjustments to the thresholds using their own Auto Threshold Adjustment properties The ComputePolarity step of the OCVRuntimeTool belongs to the LayoutStep It is not used by an OCVFont Tool Step Tips After the OCVRuntimeTool has been trained positioning the mouse over the ROI displays a Step Tip This Step Tip provides information and graphical feedback for individual symbols when the mouse is over a symbol area Train information includes the Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the binary template and a bitmap representation of the binary template as shown in Figure 7 37 FIGURE 7 37 Step Tip Example 1 THA When
307. rogrammer can define the following activities for a Supervisor Allowing access train mode to tool settings font training and scaling Changing Product and System settings Il PAK VH User Manual 3 5 25 Lo O09 o Q sv Q oY N Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference Editing the Tool Set Job View Shutting down I PAK VH launching the Windows Explorer calibration and saving Product definitions Changing Lot at Run Time By default this is enabled the Supervisor is allowed to change the lot string using the Change Lot button on the main Run Mode screen When the Supervisor clicks Change Lot he or she is prompted for either the Programmer or Supervisor password When Changing Lot at Run Time is disabled the Supervisor is not allowed to change the lot string using the Change Lot button on the main Run Mode screen When the Supervisor clicks Change Lot he or she is prompted for the Programmer password 21 CFR Part 11 Menu For complete information regarding 21 CFR Part 11 and its menu see Chapter 3 21 CFR Part 11 Calibration Menu Note If you are using a Software System this menu is disabled FIGURE 3 5 Calibration Menu Calibration Menu Open Calibration Save Calibration Save Calibration as Text Calibrate Cameral gt v Display Calibrated Results This menu allows you to calibrate camera views on any target in the system Camera views ar
308. rogrammer to create a Job define Il PAK VH system parameters such as number of cameras triggering methods and so on This involves setup of all components of the application from positioning the part in the smart camera s FOV to training the vision tools The Run Mode button is grayed out until all tools in the current Job are trained For complete information about Setup Mode see Chapter 6 Setup Mode Reference Run Mode Run Mode allows an Operator to view the operation of the Vision HAWK Smart Cameras while they are inspecting product After a Product ChangeOver or after a new product is defined the Supervisor clicks on the Run Mode button in the Setup screen to switch to Run Mode This causes the current product to be downloaded to all of the smart cameras defined in the Job and then all of their inspections are started which means that the smart cameras will begin waiting for inspection trigger signals When an input trigger is received the inspection Job executes the digital outputs are set and inspection images and their results are displayed on the Il PAK VH monitor Note The Runtime and Setup screens have the standard Microsoft Windows Minimize button on the upper right corner of the screens when the System Settings gt General gt Enable I PAK VH to be Minimized When clicked this button minimizes the Il PAK VH application When the run screen is minimized it automatically minimizes the child
309. s Allows a Programmer to quickly train multiple OCVFontless Tools Automatic training requires that an image be available for training and that the Programmer train the first tool in the group of multiple tools Default Disabled every OCVFontless Tool must be trained manually Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings With Automatic Training for Multiple OCVFontless Tools enabled when an OCVFontless Tool is trained the Il PAK VH software scans the other tools in the snapshot looking for OCVFontless Tools with the same name or same match criteria as the OCVFontless Tool that was just trained So O9 o Q 52 en oY Note Match criteria is defined as a string of characters that comes after a Space dash space separator in the tool name For example if a tool is named OCVFontless Tool Random Code the match criteria is Random Code After you train the tool and click Approve I PAK VH scans for and trains any OCVFontless Tools in the snapshot that have the same match criteria you must use the notation to separate the tool name from the match criteria If there is no match criteria in the tool name no PAK VH uses the entire tool name when searching for OCVFontless tools to train FIGURE 3 61 Training Screen from Training Multiple OCV Tools Image Masking Tool Help MICROSCAN fesa Product pe 11719 2008 0625AM m M r Zoom In A Tool D
310. s Cries Out 1 Data Valid Inspection 1 x Out 2 Inspection 1 Passed v Out 3 None Y e 1 0 Device Type Allows you to configure the General Purpose IO Points and define these points as Inputs or Outputs In Input Out Output Figure 3 43 shows the factory defaults for this kind of I O device e Configure I O Allows you to define a value for each physical I O contact in your Il PAK VH Refer to Table 3 1 for single camera default I O Fixed IO Points are accessed via the Power and Primary I O connector on the back of the smart camera The General Purpose IO Points are accessed via the Serial and Secondary I O connector on the back of the smart camera For more information see the Vision HAWK Smart Camera Guide Il PAK VH User Manual 3 59 Chapter Kil Setup Mode Reference TABLE 3 1 Smart Camera Default I O Scheme I O Function Input 1 Trigger I O Camera 1 Output 1 Data Valid Inspection 1 Output 2 Inspection 1 Passed Output 3 None Outputs TRUE when enabled e Data Valid is an output that indicates the Inspection Passed output is valid The duration of Data Valid is user programmable via the Product Setting Menu Data Valid is TRUE for the duration specified Default 10ms Range 1 500ms e Overruns This output is used to signal either a trigger overrun or process overrun condition from the running inspection Il PAK VH will detect any overruns
311. s Fonts folder OCVFont files have the extension ocv a a i g x gt oO e w Buttons e Select When clicked this button returns you to the Main Custom Properties dialog box with the font selected in the Available Fonts list as the selected font e New When clicked this button prompts you to enter a name for the new font FIGURE 7 5 Font Name Dialog Box Name NewFont OK Cancel Il PAK VH User Manual 7 9 Chapter T OCV Reference You must enter a unique name for the new font If an OCVFont with the name DefaultFont ocv does not exist in the fonts folder Il PAK VH will create one and give it the standard default property values If an OCVFont with the name DefaultFont ocv already exists in the fonts folder it will not be overwritten The values of all font properties are copied from DefaultFont ocv to the new font This allows new fonts to have customized settings based on your requirements e Duplicate When clicked this button prompts you for a name for the new font You must enter a unique name for the new font The font that is selected in the Available Fonts list is then copied and the copy is given the provided name e Rename When clicked this button prompts you for a name for the new font You must enter a unique name for the new font The font that is selected in the Available Fonts list is then renamed wi
312. s directly from the Vision HAWK cameras Default IO Scheme Input Trigger lO Output Data Valid Output Inspection Passed Output Fixed Strobe If you don t use Strobe you can configure three outputs If you use Strobe you can only configure two outputs Access Levels Predefined Operator Supervisor and Programmer levels are provided Predefined Administrator to create a data file of 21 CFR Part 11 users 21 CFR Part 11 user name login capability is provided and its users are assigned access levels of Operator Supervisor or Programmer Communications Digital I O RS 232 TCP IP EtherNet IP PROFINET Microscan Link Backup of Statistics and Product Definitions All Statistics are saved in the PC s registry The last run Job s name is also stored in the PC s registry This feature enables the vision counts and product definition to be restored in the event of power interruption and power failure In the event of a PC reboot upon restart of the PC and I PAK VH the last vision product Job definition is downloaded to the smart camera and is ready to run awaiting a trigger 1 4 Il PAK VH User Manual Functional Specifications meh Functional Specifications Il PAK VH resides on the PC in the Windows environment It is designed to create manipulate train and execute vision tools via a user friendly program Il PAK VH supports both Setup Mode see Chapter 6 Se
313. sely around the character but different characters must not touch Default Disabled Discard Boundary Characters Two or More Characters When this option is checked characters found touching the ROI will be discarded Default Enabled 6 16 Il PAK VH User Manual OCRTrainableFont Tool TABLE 6 1 OCRTrainableFont Tool Settings Alphabetized continued Property Description Discard Boundary Segments Single Character This option is displayed only when the Character Fills Entire ROI option is disabled When this option is checked segments of characters found touching the ROI will be discarded Default Enabled Edge Energy Threshold Single Character Two or More Characters Defines the pixel value at which a pixel in a Sobel Edge Enhancement is considered to be an edge pixel This property is only used when Auto Thresholding Enabled is enabled Range 0 to 255 Default 20 Graphics Level Single Character Two or More Characters Enables various graphics options at runtime Default Show ROI Only InputBuffer Single Character Two or More Characters Allows selection of the buffer to work on from the list of currently available buffers The default buffer will be the output buffer of its originator This is usually the output buffer of the closest enclosing Snapshot but can also be the buffer of any step that generates an output image Limit Characte
314. sfied with the layout shown in the Inspect Chars string at the top of the window click Approve to return to the Setup Mode Train window Keyboard Input of Match String Keyboard Input of Match String allows you to specify the intended inspection string for an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool This is accomplished by displaying an input box into which you can type the necessary information Note Enabling Keyboard Input of Match String mode automatically disables the ignore and substitute character functionality of Il PAK VH The OCVFontless Tool does not support the Keyboard Input of Match String feature Il PAK VH User Manual 7 77 Chapter T OCV Reference Enabling Keyboard Input of Match String Advanced Settings gt System Settings gt Training and Results gt Keyboard Input of Match String is a System Settings that will not change even when you do a change product to another Job that contains an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool FIGURE 7 52 Enabling Keyboard Input of Match String Product ChangeO ver Activities V Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver IV Reset Failures on Product ChangeOver Archive Path M Y_NASHUA dev vs370 prod _ F Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot I Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Results Reporting Enabled RS 232 Runtime Results Save Runtime Results to a File Enable OC Failure Tracking MV Report RS 232 ERROR when Inspection Result is
315. sionscape will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn t match the fixed symbol length Symbol Length This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared Code 128 Fixed Symbol Length Status When enabled Visionscape will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length will be considered a valid symbol Symbol Length This specifies the exact number of characters that Visionscape will recognize this does not include start stop and check character characters Visionscape ignores any symbol not having the specified length EAN Status When this field is disabled Visionscape will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements or perform any special formatting When enabled Visionscape can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position it must conform to EAN format Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active If EAN status is required Visionscape will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN format All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command Note Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to b
316. softer character edges 6 28 Il PAK VH User Manual Numeric View FIGURE 6 16 Numeric View Button OCRTrainableFont Tool Properties OCRTrainableFont Tool L Numeric View Graphical View SE e a Eg F lt 5 After you click Numeric View the constants associated with each character sample are displayed in a grid as shown in Figure 6 17 FIGURE 6 17 Constants for Character Samples Properties OPN OCR1 Character Data Display eer ae Distance Max Dist Std Dew 0 00 0 27 0 03 0 34 0 047 0 00 0 27 0 14 0 04 0 14 0 04 0 14 0 04 0 14 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 00 0 03 0 001 0 03 0 87 0 87 0 87 0 87 0 87 0 87 0 34 0 27 0 34 0 27 0 34 0 27 0 34 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 a ey 1 OO Mf Ow coo SO eee Mm 4 ADC a all xi Font Font Name 1 8 Trained on 2 1 2 2003 11 08 50 AM Select Font m Text or Character to Include Maintain Include Iv Cars Training Timeout 1 minute E Included Committed Samples corresponds to included characters Individual samples may be deleted from the list by right clicking on the grid and choosing Delete Il PAK VH User Manual 6 29 Chapter Automatic Identification Selecting Character Statistics displays the training statistics for all characters in the font as shown in
317. ssed outputs are set FALSE FIGURE 3 30 Create a Product System Settings Communication M Selection Input Channel None led Output Channel None X Configure RS 232 Ethernet TCP IP Il PAK VH User Manual 3 45 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 31 Create a Product System Settings Training and Results Communication Product ChangeOver Activities V Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver I Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot I Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Archive Path r Results Reporting I Enable RS 232 Runtir Save Runtime Results to a File 7 Enable OCV Failure Tracking IV Report RS 232 ERROR when Inspection Result IV Enable Failed Image Queue I Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Number of Images in Queue Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second Maximum 2 4 Cc 8 Training and Results General r Training V AutoSave Product Definition after Re Training IV Reset Statistics after re training V Auto Step Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout Go directly between RunMode and Training OCY Training I Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontT ools I Automatic Training for Multiple OC VFontlessT ools T External Input of Mat External Communications Timeout 60 Seconds Match String Mismatch Action T Keyboard Input of Match String
318. stalling Il PAK VH Software A 5 Starting the Il PAK VH Program A 5 Uninterruptible Power Supply Software A 6 Installing UPS Hardware A 6 Installing UPS Software A 6 Configuring PowerChute Software A 8 CD RW Support A 10 Il PAK VH User Manual APPENDIX B APPENDIX C APPENDIX D Contents Connecting Smart Cameras to a PC B 1 Setting the PC to Use a Static IP Address B 2 Setting the Vision HAWK to Use a Different Static IP Address B 4 Verifying the Setup Using Network Overview B 6 Demo Mode C 1 Copying Job Font and Image Files C 2 Check Jobs Before Running Demo Mode C 2 Demo Mode Jobs C 3 Enabling Demo Mode C 4 Running in Demo Mode C 5 Disabling Demo Mode C 6 Perl Gems Tips and Techniques D 1 Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool D 2 Properties Pages D 2 Custom Step D 2 Custom Vision Tool D 5 Il PAK VH User Manual Contents x Il PAK VH User Manual Preface PREFACE Welcome Purpose of this Manual The I PAK VH User Manual provides a foundation for successful Il PAK VH operation It guides you through the application of Il PAK VH vision tools for training and inspection Important The images in this manual may contain a different version number than the current release but the functionality remains the same Manual Conventions The following typographical conventions are used throughout this manual Items emphasizing important information are bolded e Menu selections menu
319. stalling Visionscape Software Download the current version of Visionscape from the Download Center on the Microscan website and copy it to a USB drive Note AutoVISION Software and Visionscape Software are contained in the same installer 1 To install Visionscape software place the USB drive into the USB port Double click setup html at the root of the USB drive 2 Click Install Visionscape Software The InstallShield Wizard starts and displays the following screens Several messages about Run or Save click Run Welcome screen click Next License Agreement screen select the I accept radio button and then click Next Select Destination screen we suggest you accept the default location C Microscan Vscape and click Next Il PAK VH User Manual A 3 Appendix AW installation and Software Start Copying Files screen click Next The installer displays the ReadMe wri file which you can read as the installer finishes The install process takes a couple of minutes It may appear that nothing is happening but that is not the case Don t try to do anything until you are prompted to reboot your PC All required components are automatically installed to your hard disk The default location is C Microscan Vscape Camera definition files are stored under C Microscan Vscape Drivers Camdefs 3 When the InstallShield Wizard prompts you to reboot your PC select the Yes want to re
320. start my computer now radio button and then click Finish 4 Wait for your PC to reboot 5 Go to the next section to install the Il PAK VH software Installing Il PAK VH Software 1 After your PC reboots double click Setup html at the root of the USB drive 2 Click Install Il PAK VH Software The InstallShield Wizard starts and displays the following screens Several messages about Run or Save click Run Welcome screen click Next License Agreement screen select the I accept radio button and then click Next Select Destination screen we suggest you accept the default location C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH and click Next Start Copying Files screen click Next The InstallShield Wizard Complete screen click Finish 3 Close the web browser The I PAK VH software is installed and ready for you to use A 4 Il PAK VH User Manual Software Upgrades 21 CFR Part 11 Usage Software Upgrades 21 CFR Part 11 Usage The Part 11 user names their encrypted passwords and the original time datestamp when a user was created or last changed his or her password are stored in a data file called ipak usr When you upgrade the I PAK VH software you must manually move the ipak usr data file to the current version of Il PAK VH These paths can be determined quickly by looking at the Compatibility section of the Il PAK VH ReadMe file or product information Uninstalling Il PAK VH Software 1
321. stead of PE Keyboard Observe the default settings All options must be available for training and tryout during this tutorial 16 Make sure Show All Menu Options Advanced Users Figure 2 33 is selected Click OK This displays the Acquire1 window as shown in Figure 2 34 FIGURE 2 34 Product Creation Acquire 1 IPAKVH1 Acquire 1 Cami 2 28 Il PAK VH User Manual Tutorial 2 OCVRuntimeTool N N 17 Right click on Acquire 1 This displays the Insert A Step dialog box 5 as shown in Figure 2 35 s a FIGURE 2 35 Product Creation Insert A Step Dialog Box nsert A Ste x i 4 Annular Unwrap Warp BinaryMorph Filter IntersectLines Meas VYardssign Step BisectLines Meas LeastS quaresCircle Fit Vector Tool Blob Tool LeastSquaresLine Fit VectorGroup Tool Color Thresholding Filter Loop Step Verify AIMDPM ISO29158 Custom Step MeanLP Filter Verify 15015415 Tool Custom ision Tool OCR Tool Verify ISO15416 Tool Digitallnputs Step OCRTrainableFont Tool Wait Step DigitalOutputs Step OC Font Tool Step 19 Dist2Pts Meas OC Fontless Tool DynamMask Tool OCVRuntimeT ool DynamThresh Tool OnePt Locator Step 18 Edge Tool Projection Tool Fast Edge Pt to Line Distance Fast Edge Group Rect Warp Flaw Tool RobustCircle Fit Formatted Output RobustLine Fit GainOffset Filter Sequence Step GrayHistogram Tool Sobel Filter GrayMorph Filter Symbology T
322. sting user s account via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your employees leaves the company FIGURE 5 10 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Suspend an Existing User Configure Users x Suspend an Existing User UserName BadUser Are You Sure C No Yes OK Reason for Change User left department OK Cancel Il PAK VH User Manual 5 15 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 e Add a New User The I PAK Administrator can create new accounts This might be useful when a new employee joins your company FIGURE 5 11 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Add a New User Configure Users x m Define New User UserName Neff Password C Operator Ta Supervisor Security Access Level Programmer Vv User Has Signature Training Authority can approve training Reason for Change New Hire 3 11 2013 OK Cancel e Restore A User Account The I PAK Administrator can restore a suspended user s account via this dialog box This might be useful if one of your former employees returns to the company FIGURE 5 12 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users Restore a User Account Configure Users x m Restore a User Account Enter the existing user name then assign a new password and access rights UserName BadUser New p Password Operator Security Access Level Supervisor Reason for Change User Came Back to Dept OK Cancel
323. stom Vision Tool Running Dynamic_Binarize Perl Script Custom zion Top 231 002700 L2AQ633 ANO 9811 AA CHOS9S0U 8 KOREA Il PAK VH User Manual D 11 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques FIGURE D 8 Output Buffer produced by Dynamic_Binarize Perl Script 231 002700 L2A0693 NND 9811 AA CHO3980 KOREA Description The Dynamic Binarize script will calculate either the average or median gray value of all the pixels within its ROI and this value will be used as the binarize threshold When calculating the average you can choose to ignore the very lowest and highest gray values You may also apply an offset to the calculated threshold Il PAK VH User Manual w Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool Settings FIGURE D 9 Dynamic Binarize Script CustomVision Tool Inputs rs InputBuffer Snapshot SnapOutputBufter Avail Package Scripts Dynamic_Binarize ReParse Package Scnpt eetieg to executes Recreate Step Datums eclick to execute gt xe c oO nw 20 rs 2E SS Or T a g Histogram Low Clip 20 g Histogram High Clip 220 fq Threshold Offset 10 S Polarity Bright ER Method Average e Histogram Low Clip Pixels below this gray value will be left out of the calculation of the average or median gray value e Histogram High Clip Pixels above this gray value will be left out of the calculation of the average or median gr
324. symbols decoded adhere to the GS1 format checking Symbol Count Indicates the number of symbols decoded within the ROI Symbology Type String containing text for the symbology type s decoded in the ROI Decoded Text String containing the decoded text of the symbols decoded When multiple symbols are decoded enumerated output datums are also provided for each symbol Center Point This is the value of the center location of the decoded symbol When multiple symbols are decoded enumerated output datums are also provided for each symbol Angle This is the value of the center location of the decoded symbol When multiple symbols are decoded enumerated output datums are also provided for each symbol Height This is the value of the height of the decoded symbol When multiple symbols are decoded enumerated output datums are also provided for each symbol Width This is the value of the width of the decoded symbol When multiple symbols are decoded enumerated output datums are also provided for each symbol Symbol Results This is a structure containing additional symbology decode details Il PAK VH User Manual 6 5 oe I o Eg Pe 25 lt 5 Chapter Automatic Identification Advanced Symbology Settings BC412 e Check Character Output Status When enabled the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is s
325. t gt OCVFontless Tool Wait Step The Training and Tryout functions are grouped into one and utilize the same display The Supervisor Programmer can train retrain and tryout the tools from this display The concept of wizard mode exists in this menu much like the Create a Product wizard mode First you want to train your tools AutoStep guides you through the training process Il PAK VH User Manual 3 17 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference This remainder of this section describes the following e AutoStep or Wizard Training Method starting on page 3 18 e AutoStep Off starting on page 3 19 e Train and Tryout Mode starting on page 3 19 e Train and Tryout Toolbar starting on page 3 19 e Automatically Setting Tool Settings starting on page 3 25 e Special Training of Tools starting on page 3 25 AutoStep or Wizard Training Method The AutoStep or Wizard method of training walks the Supervisor or Programmer through each step of the training sequence Note The I PAK VH interface uses the term AutoStep rather than Wizard By default AutoStep training is invoked automatically when you first enter this window but can be changed via a system setting For more information see AutoStep Mode On Automatically in Train and Tryout on page 3 85 Image The image will display the last runtime or acquired image associated with that snapshot with the tool graph
326. t Unassigned gt w lt Unassigned gt FalCode Re Pares Packags Script ener i executes cich to executes D 4 Il PAK VH User Manual w Il PAK VH Custom Step and CustomVision Tool Each of these inputs can be connected to any Status datum in your Job Typically you would connect the Statuses of all of the Steps whose pass fail state you care about In the example here we have connected the statuses of the Snapshot step to Bit 0 a Blob Step to Bit 1 a Flaw Tool to Bit 2 and an OCVFontless Tool to Bit 3 If all of these Steps should pass the FailCode script will produce an output value of 0 If any of these Steps should fail the corresponding Bit in the output integer value will be set toa 1 So for example if the Blob tool and the OCVFontless tool should fail this would mean that bits 1 and 3 would be set to 1 producing an output value of 10 Any Bits that are left Unassigned are ignored and will not effect the output value xe c oO nN 20 rs ef S Or T a Settings e BitO Bit31 Each of these input datums can be connected to any Status Datum in the Job If the Status is False then the corresponding bit of the output word is set to 1 Results e Output Value This integer value holds the failure code The bits of this word correspond to the 32 input datum values Custom Vision Tool The CustomVision Tool consists of an input image required optional input datums option
327. t shape over a symbol in the image Select the name of the symbol in the symbol list Click the AutoFont Button to allow the best matching font scaled if needed to be automatically selected for the current tool Automatic Font Selection The AutoFont Button The automatic font selection and scaling feature allows the system to scan through all of the OCVFonts in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder to determine which one will work best with the current image data When scaling an OCVFont is required to make it the best match the system determines the proper scaling factors to use to create a scaled version of the OCVFont This scaled version of the OCVFont will be created at the end of the automatic selection process The name of the scaled OCVFont will reflect the change in width and height used to perform the scaling By default scaled OCVFonts are stored in the Job file as part of the associated font based tool These scaled OCVFonts can be stored on the disk using the Save Scaled Font button Il PAK VH User Manual 7 15 Chapter T OCV Reference The Automatic Font Selection and Scaling dialog box has two lists The left hand list is a font list containing the names of all the OCVFonts in the Microscan Vscape Jobs Fonts folder e The right hand list is a symbol list containing the names of all the FontSymbols found in the OCVFont that is currently selected in the font list Choosing a Symbol Select a sym
328. t to either RS 232 or Ethernet OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool Training The I PAK VH OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool use the External Input of Match String and Transmit Final Inspection String features when enabled in the training sequence When External Input of Match String and or Transmit Final Inspection String is enabled OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool training is unchanged until the Approve Inspect Characters window is displayed Il PAK VH User Manual 7 83 a rt 3 Z D i X gt O Chapter OCV Reference This window displays only one button Input Match String as shown in Figure 7 60 FIGURE 7 60 Input Match String Button On Input Match String Current Tool OCVRuntimeTool Font Selected NewFont Partl1 Disabled 27 11 2007 15 22 When Input Match String is clicked Il PAK VH sends a header line to the external device to indicate which tool needs the inspection string Then for each line of characters found during training Il PAK VH does the following e Displays a Waiting for Input Match String Line N message where N is replaced by the number of the line being waited for FIGURE 7 61 Waiting For Input of Match String Message Waiting For Input Match String Line 1 e Prompts the external device for the input string by sending a message with the following format Input Line N where N is the line number for the string to be received e Waits for a response
329. t x used by another program or not available and the Input fields are hidden see Figure 3 46 on page 3 66 If a COM Port is not available Hardware it is displayed inside the frame of the port COM Port x used by another program or not available and the Input fields are hidden see Figure 3 46 on page 3 66 This dialog box is driven by the type of Protocol being used 3 64 Il PAK VH User Manual e Protocol Defines which RS 232 protocol scheme is used 25 Advanced Settings Il PAK VH Enclosure Standard This is the default it means that RS 232 COM Port 1 is used for all RS 232 Communications When this protocol is used you cannot use the other ports or change their settings Lo o9 c g Q sv w Q vy Il PAK VH Selectable Main Port I PAK VH expects the RS 232 communications to be made through the COM Port indicated by the Main COM Port item on the RS 232 Configuration screen RS 232 Settings You can define the RS 232 Settings as follows Baud Rate Default of 9600 Range is 110 to 115200 Parity Default of None Range includes None Even Odd Data Bits Default of 8 Range includes 4 5 6 7 8 Stop Bits Default of 1 Range includes 1 1 5 2 Timeout Seconds Default of 15 seconds Range is 1 to 99 Field Delimiter Char Default of Range of and Main Comm Port This setting selects between the two availab
330. tep Datums lt click to execute g Minimum Search Angle 15 000 g Maximum Search Angle 15 000 g Angle Step Size 5 000 g Accept Threshold 0 700 xe c oO nw 20 rs 2E SS Or T a e Minimum Search Angle The minimum warp angle that the step should start searching at e Maximum Search Angle The maximum warp angle that the step should search at e Angle Step Size This is the amount in degrees that the angle should be incremented by for each search iteration e Accept Threshold This is the minimum correlation match percentage Results e Point of Best Match This is the X Y location and angle of the best match found Il PAK VH User Manual D 17 Appendix Perl Gems Tips and Techniques D 18 Il PAK VH User Manual
331. th the provided name e Delete When clicked this button deletes the font that is selected in the Available Fonts lists from the fonts folder e Cancel When clicked this button returns you to the Main Custom Properties dialog box with no change to the selected font Training Fonts FIGURE 7 6 OCVFont Tool Properties Dialog Box Properties OC Font Tool Font DefaultFont LayoutStep AutoT hreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Selected Font DefaultFont Training Debug Delay fo ms Apply Automatic Min Sharpness ne Symbols Trained in This Font I Apply Automatic Min Contrast JV Show Trained Symbol Shapes ID Test Determination Pct so Symbol Names For Training LoS OE Revert Save Font IV Always Ask To Save Font IV Use Selected Font on Exit 7 10 Il PAK VH User Manual as Custom Properties Create Modify OCVFonts When a new font is added and selected for training using the Font Manager dialog box it needs to be trained before it can be used by a font based OCV tool First the OCVFont shape needs to be positioned over the symbols to be trained Second select the LayoutStep tab and enable the Automatic Segmentation property as shown in Figure 5 7 rt O Z D im O x gt O 0 FIGURE 7 7 LayoutStep Properties Page OCVFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb Clicking Train Symbol on the Cus
332. the AutoFind uses symbol positions from the OCV tool s trained layout to automatically train templates for the locator When set to User Defined Templates you must manually position and size the locator template and search boxes Default OCV Symbols As Templates OCV Font Tool An OCVFont Tool uses an OCVFont to learn the layout and determine which characters from the OCVFont are in which locations in the ROI Once the layout is learned the OCVFont Tool expects to find these symbols at the same locations in the ROI during inspection It uses the data from the FontSymbols in the OCVFont to verify the quality and correctness of the characters being inspected Il PAK VH User Manual Training Training of the OCVFont Tool involves placing and sizing the OCVFont Tool box around the area containing the symbols to be inspected When Train is clicked the ROI is scanned for symbol candidates Symbol candidates are determined by searching for each symbol that is in the selected OCVFont chosen through the LayoutStep Then the OCVFont Tool box is reset based on the bounding rectangle of OCVFont Tool as rt 3 D i X gt O all symbols found and the values of the search extra properties The AutoFind is trained automatically whenever the OCVFont Tool is trained When the AutoFind Search Area Box is moved and or sized it is retrained automatically without requiring retraining of the OCVFont Tool
333. the IP address that TCP IP clients will need to use when trying to connect to I PAK VH Il PAK VH User Manual 3 67 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference Note I PAK VH acts as a TCP IP Server meaning that it waits for TCP IP clients to connect to it in order to handle Ethernet communications Remote Commands Supported by RS 232 and Ethernet Remote commands allow an external device or computer to perform a limited set of functions on I PAK VH These functions can be accomplished through either RS 232 or Ethernet depending on the selected Input Channel The commands are accepted by I PAK VH in either Run Mode or Setup Mode Using remote commands you can clear statistics retrieve statistics enter Setup Mode enter Run Mode and change product The syntax of these commands is e Retrieve Statistics RETRIEVESTATS lt EOT gt e Clear Statistics CLEARSTATISTICS lt EOT gt e Go To Setup Mode ENTERSETUPMODE lt EOT gt e GoTo Run Mode ENTERRUNMODE lt EOT gt e Change Product CHANGEPRODUCT lt sp gt newproductname lt EOT gt e Lot Change CHANGELAYOUT path newstring lt EOT gt Where e The commands themselves are in ALL CAPS e lt EOT gt is an end of text character chr 4 or Ctrl D in HyperTerminal e lt gsp gt is a space character e newproductname is the name of a valid product definition in the PAK VH Jobs folder e path is the unique path to the tool e newstring is the new layout or match string See
334. the characters in the new string are not defined in the OCVFont used by the tool When no errors are encountered Il PAK VH displays a success message If a Job has multiple tools that have identical match or layout strings you can change them all at once by editing the code for any one and then clicking Change all Tool s Code Then I PAK VH will go through the Job and change the match or layout string to the contents you just specified for all tools that had the same code Note The Font Tool IGNORE character and Data Matrix Tool IGNORE character are allowed in this dialog box This feature supports up to 99 Font Data Matrix and Barcode tools total in any one Job Location of Jobs Folder The Jobs folder is created in the directory in which I PAK VH was installed and from which you run Il PAK VH For example if you install the Il PAK VH software in C Microscan Vscape then when you first run Il PAK VH it automatically creates the Jobs folder as follows C Microscan Vscape l PAK_VH Jobs Using Windows Explorer you can back up your Job definitions in your choice of format Il PAK VH User Manual 3 13 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference Automatic Backup of Jobs Il PAK VH performs an automatic backup of the current product definition to help you recover in the event of a PC disk error Every time that a product definition is about to be saved an automatic copy of the Job is created in a
335. the contrast value calculated using the trained grayscale template of the FontSymbol Default Disabled e Show Trained Symbol Shapes When enabled the shapes of all FontSymbols that are part of this OCVFont are displayed whenever the shape for this OCVFont is selected in the buffer view Default Enabled e ID Test Determination Pct When a FontSymbol is trained as part of an OCVFont it is compared against all of the FontSymbols already in the OCVFont When FontSymbols are found to be similar special tests are set up to check for the presence of the correct symbol at runtime Default 90 Range 10 to 100 Il PAK VH User Manual 7 23 Chapter T OCV Reference ID Test Determination Pct adjusts the level at which symbols are similar enough to require special runtime tests Smaller percentages cause more symbols to be flagged as similar while larger percentages cause less symbols to be flagged as similar Examples When two symbols are found to be 75 similar and the value of this property is 85 no special tests are set up for runtime ID checking if two symbols are found to be 90 similar and the value of the property is 85 a special test is set up for runtime ID checking 7 24 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFont LayoutStep Tab The LayoutStep tab of the OCVFont is used for automatic segmentation of the image when enabled When an OCVFont is selected in the Custom Properties dialog box the LayoutStep
336. the current Product s Job definition and its essential data to a file Il PAK VH prompts for a name The data saved includes Product date time counters Inspected Character String and Fail Counters When Part 11 is enabled the configuration file is read only Note When there is more than one OCVFont Tool OCVRuntimeTool Symbology Tool or Data Matrix Tool only the last inspected tool s string is saved Save Images Save Images is lossless it saves every image of the type you specify in Part Image Storage Mode see page 3 35 After you click Save Images the Retrieve and Save Image As dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 21 Filling in the Retrieve and Save Image As dialog box is a two step process Il PAK VH User Manual 3 33 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference e Before you enter Run Mode fill in the Part Image Storage information top half e After you exit Run Mode fill in the Image File Name information bottom half FIGURE 3 21 Retrieve and Save Image As Dialog Box isionDevice Part Image Storage Inspection 1 Specify this information before Part Image Storage Mode Store No Images ou enter Run Mode Part Image Queue Size jo m Image File Name Images saved to C Vscape l Pak Failedimages r Inspection 1 Base File Path Name Specify this information after Base File Number f you exit Run Mode Upload Images from Part
337. the mouse is not positioned over a particular symbol area the Step Tip displays the currently trained Layout Characters or just the name of the OCVRuntimeTool when it is not trained as shown in Figure 7 38 7 52 Il PAK VH User Manual FIGURE 7 38 Step Tip Example 2 OCVRuntimeTool a 38 rt O D i 2 x gt O 0 When the OCVRuntimeTool has been run using Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key when the mouse is positioned over the symbol area as shown in Figure 7 39 FIGURE 7 39 Step Tip Example 3 oe 9041 Inspection information includes The Area of the symbol the number of On pixels in the trained binary template The X and Y position upper left corner of the symbol relative to the OCVRuntimeTool shape The X and Y allowed movement of the symbol The Legibility Percentage and the Legibility Tolerance The Sharpness Contrast and number of Breaks found along with the associated tolerances The Initial and Final Residue percentages along with the associated tolerances Il PAK VH User Manual 7 53 Chapter T OCV Reference e The Largest Final Residue Blob Percentage and its associated tolerance Note A 1 for any value above except the X and Y allowed movement indicates the test is disabled e The bitmap representation of the binary runtime symbol area When the
338. thod and comparing the Match Test String with the configured Match String Il PAK VH User Manual 6 39 Chapter Automatic Identification Process Default Fonts This enables disables processing of default fonts that may exist in the font file selected Detected characters are run against any default fonts provided to find the best character match This can significantly impact speed and error rates It is recommended that users train fonts for their application and disable this during application deployment to achieve best performance Binarization Mean Factor See the IntelliText Binarization section for details about this parameter Binarization Dynamic Range See the IntelliText Binarization section for details about this parameter Discard Boundary Characters This mode eliminates any binary objects that are touching the boundary ROI This is needed in certain applications where items may extend into the ROI This is true for UPC symbols that have bars extending into the human readable area Optimization Examples Binarization Usage Consider the following low contrast image image In this example binarization parameters will be adjusted to optimize performance for this type of exposed mark It is worth noting that in this example the characters are quite tall around 80 pixels but because they are generally continuous a reasonable segmentation is achieved This is an ideal binariza
339. til the font is trained and saved The most recently included characters are displayed in the status bar as shown in Figure 6 8 FIGURE 6 8 Recently Included Characters Highlighted Properties OCRTrainableFont Tool xi r Font BB lui 5 ol Font Name Sample_Font r Characters Not trained Created 6 13 2017 allele foe Ee KEM sector niio Pie R is Text or Character to Include barn ee p o Elele ee 7 ea elelee eb ranns KARRKEcATHANA Aa Timeout Number of Trained Characters 4 A 4 A A A 0 1 5 10 Included Not In Font Included 12345 5 samples included Il PAK VH User Manual 6 23 S e 1o o F F lt 5 Chapter Automatic Identification Ifthe characters do not train well right click and select Undo Include To undo the inclusion of the last set of characters right click somewhere in the dialog box and select Undo Include characters There is one level of undo Undo is available even after a font is trained If fewer characters than expected are found a message box appears as shown in Figure 6 9 Resize the ROI or make adjustments to the OCRTF tool FIGURE 6 9 Fewer Characters Found Difference in character coun t x Input characters FGHIJ 5 characters Found characters FGH 3 characters Samples will nat be included If more characters are found that expected only th
340. tion example because it is easy to visualize the effects Reducing the scaling will also work well on this mark as ahown in the Scaling Usage example For optimal performance the mark should be scaled to around 30 pixels in height and be optimized as shown below Urinen Character g Match String amp Binary Threshold Mode Auto 6 gt B B PP gt a Scateg Factor E Character Polarty Dari Characters ja String Matching Method Onabied jg Ducard Boundary Characters 7 g 6 40 Il PAK VH User Manual The first step is to change Threshold Mode to Fixed Threshold This will show the binary buffer used for processing as an overlay on the ROI It will use the current fixed template parameter settings If you immediately click back to Auto you will see the result of the current Auto settings i Pa or eam f Bie a iif SU IPTA IntelliText OCR 6 Match String Binary Threshold Mode Scaling Factor Character Polarity String Matching Method Discard Boundary Characters c SEke ee O 6 g2 oe z 55 wto a lt ko 1 000 a Disabled v The above segmentation is close but the characters are a bit eroded Improvements can be made by switching to Fixed Template and tuning the binarazation parameters Initially the default parameter values 0 5 0 5 provide a completely blank binarization image Match String Binary Thresh
341. titute the term CD with your choice of media When you click Archive PDFs the Reports that are selected checkboxes to the right of the description and to the left of the display and that have PDFs created will be archived to your archive device Also you can archive to every path selected in System Settings independent from the device type This can also be a USB Stick or any device that is connected to the PC and ready to store data Note You need to set up the archive path via the System Settings Menu You need to put a blank CD into the CD R W drive and format it using Direct CD format it to allow multiple file writes from a program such as Windows Explorer Format the media before trying to use this feature When creating these archives on CD several things are happening for top security First a folder is created on the CD using the current time date stamp concatenated with the current product s name The PDFs are written to the CD using the previous names with the time date stamp This ensures that the files are not modified as the file date times themselves MUST be consistent with the file and folder names A few seconds differences in these is all that can be expected to be different Note You should create an SOP to verify these date times on the folder and file names and inside the files themselves to ensure no one is corrupting your data A message box Figure 5 6 is displayed after the PDFs are written so t
342. tom Properties dialog box initiates the training You are prompted to name each symbol found in the train ROI FIGURE 7 8 Prompt to Enter Unique Name for the Symbol Symbol Name az DATE neor Enter a Unique Name For This Symbol aS T 6MAG282 i SO mnM e Cancel Skip Properties OC Font Tool __ Font Selected Font NewFont NewFont L4 Training Debug Delay fo ms IV Automa pae Symbols Trained in This Font Min Symbq When training is complete the right hand side of the Custom Properties dialog box is modified to contain a tab for each symbol that was added to the OCVFont Il PAK VH User Manual Chapter OCV Reference FIGURE 7 9 Tabs for Each Added Symbol NewFont LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity DefaultSymb 6 M Apply Automatic Min Sharpness Apply Automatic Min Contrast Note There are many options for training OCVFonts The example above is the quickest way to train a font For more details on training OCVFonts and the properties and settings involved see OCVFont on page 7 20 Training the OCVFont Tool First to train the OCVFont Tool the Custom Properties dialog box must be closed If changes have not been saved you are asked whether the changes should be saved e Click Yes to save changes e Click No to lose any changes that were made To train the OCVFont Tool the tool shape
343. trained binary template The X and Y position upper left corner of the symbol relative to the OCVRuntimeTool shape The X and Y allowed movement of the symbol e The Legibility Percentage and the Legibility Tolerance Il PAK VH User Manual 7 65 Chapter T OCV Reference e The Sharpness Contrast and number of Breaks found along with the associated tolerances e The Initial and Final Residue percentages along with the associated tolerances e The Largest Final Residue Blob Percentage and its associated tolerance Note A 1 for any value above except the X and Y allowed movement indicates the test is disabled e The bitmap representation of the binary runtime symbol area When the OCVFontless Tool has been run doing a Tryout additional runtime information is available by holding down the Shift key and moving the mouse inside the OCVFontless Tool ROI but not over the symbols as shown in Figure 7 48 FIGURE 7 48 Step Tip Example 4 IRe7AOC Wi a NI I bai OCVSymbolStep An OCVSymbolStep is a collection of template images settings and tolerances that inspect a character or logo at runtime OCVSymbolSteps are created during the training of an OCVFontless Tool They are used by the OCVFontless Tool to inspect the print at runtime 7 66 Il PAK VH User Manual OCVFontless Tool a FIGURE 7 49 Symb1 Properties Page Tool Settings Symb2 Symb3 Symb4 Sy
344. tring is not the same as the string of characters found during training an error message is displayed as shown in Figure 7 57 and only the Disapprove button is displayed forcing you to retrain FIGURE 7 57 Match String Error Message Strings Are Different Input Match String X Mismatch Strings Are Different If all lines of input are received successfully I PAK VH displays a message as shown in Figure 7 58 7 80 Il PAK VH User Manual a External Input of Match String FIGURE 7 58 Successful Match String Input Message Successful Input When a string is successfully input the layout is automatically approved and the training sequence ends rt O D i X gt O Keyboard Input Protocol The I PAK VH OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool uses a standard protocol in receiving the inspection string from you Inspection String Protocol The input inspection string is of the following form 1 lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt 2 lt sp gt lt sp gt 0 lt sp gt 2 The lt sp gt is a space character which is the separator between symbol names External Input of Match String Match String allows an external device computer etc to specify the intended inspection string for an OCVFont Tool or OCVRuntimeTool External Input of Match String is accomplished by creating a communications handshake between I PAK VH and an external device The necessary information is s
345. trol Pane P Control Panel Home ips i Make it easier to read what s on your screen You can change the size of tet and other items on your screen by choosing one of these options To Adjust resolution temporarily enlarge just part of the screen use the Magnifier tool Adjust brightness Calibrate color Smaller 100 default Preview I Change display settings Connect to a projector ji Oy Adjust ClearType text Medium 125 Set custom text size DPI Personalization Devices and Printers A 2 Il PAK VH User Manual gt Installing the Software Installing the Software This section describes how to install the Il PAK VH software its driver and its support software The installation is allowed on PCs with the Windows 7 operating system Visionscape must be installed before you install PAK VH xe c co os BE BM 7 Before installing any software ensure that you log into the computer with an account that has administrator privileges Be sure to disable any virus protection software you are running The I PAK VH installer contains the following folders PAK VH Setup Contains the I PAK VH software e Visionscape Contains the Visionscape installer Note Adobe Reader version 8 or higher is required to view PDFs conaining Microscan documentation You can install the current version of Adobe Reader from http get adobe com reader In
346. tup Mode Reference and Run Mode see Chapter 7 Run Mode Reference in a tri level access scheme c 2 _ iS 3 Q el I gt lt p Note I PAK VH supports Windows 7 The following is a summary of the I PAK VH functional specifications e Inspection Program Creation Acquiring images for the purpose of testing and setting up your vision inspections Selecting positioning and sizing the regions of interest ROI for each vision tool Training vision tools Entering a match string for a Data Matrix Symbology Tool Font Tool or OCRTrainable Font Tool Specifying a font style for training of the Font Tool Adjusting vision inspection properties Saving and restoring Inspection Program Job definitions These are also referred to as Products e Test Inspection Program in Tryout Mode Setting tryout inspection criteria Performing a tryout inspection on a single vision tool or on all vision tools within a Job Modifying inspection criteria to retool tryout results Il PAK VH User Manual 1 5 Chapter Il PAK VH Inspection Product ChangeOver Quick restoration of pre programmed Job definitions for ease of batch changeover Automated resetting of Statistics Connecting to the smart camera and downloading an I PAK VH program to the smart camera Viewing of the executing inspections in runtime Automatic uploading of inspection
347. u have several PAK VH systems dumping Configuration files to a central PC and you need a way to identify uniquely each I PAK VH system 3 94 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings Edit Tool Set This is a Programmer level function Edit Tool Set allows the Programmer to add delete or edit all the tools in the current product Job definition in a tree like structure as shown in Figure 3 63 You can print the Tree View of your Job and you can save the Tree View data of the Job to a file So o9 o Q 52 i oY N Important Edit Tool output labels are intended to match settings in the hardware itself and in the hardware manual and therefore appear as they would in Visionscape Note Edit is intended to give the advanced Programmer a chance to tune an inspection When inserting steps here you should understand that not all parameters will be automatically set up for you as they are when you create a Job via the Create Product option FIGURE 3 63 Edit Tool Set Menu Job Hawk10028 Wait Step Il PAK VH User Manual 3 95 Chapter KE Setup Mode Reference Tool Settings This is a Programmer level function Tool Settings displays the Tool Settings menu as shown in Figure 3 64 The Tool Settings dialog box contains training and inspection parameters relative to the selected tool and allows the Programmer to edit the individual tool sett
348. ual Threshold 135 Edge Energy Threshold 20 Character Expansions 0 J Filter Bright Defects Bright Defect Range 0 Output Mask Type Mask Template 7 Apply To All FontSymbols Apply To Default Symbol Num of ON Pixels in Template Displays the number of foreground pixels in the trained binary template e Polarity Allows the step to always train with polarity Light_On_Dark always train with polarity Dark_On_Light or train using an automatically calculated polarity Default Automatic 7 28 Il PAK VH User Manual FontSymbol as e Legibility Passes fails the symbol based on this minimum correlation percentage The symbol fails inspection when the correlation percentage is less than this value Default 25 typical for pharmaceutical applications Range 0 to 100 rt 3 D i X gt O e Allowed Movement in X Sets the maximum number of pixels that a symbol can move in the X axis relative to other symbols from its trained position Default 50 pixels any movement is allowed Range 0 to 50 pixels The maximum of 50 pixels comes from the parent OCVTool setting Individual Symbol Search X which limits the search range in X to a maximum of 50 pixels in either direction Allowed Movement in Y Set the maximum number of pixels that a symbol can move in the Y axis relative to other symbols from its trained position
349. unrelated requirements making high resolution necessary Scaling may also provide some speed enhancements when using larger ROls and relatively low character counts Il PAK VH User Manual IntelliText OCR Minimum Character Width This datum defines the minimum width of detected characters in pixels Maximum Character Width ome we a8 ce 25 lt 5 This datum defines the maximum width of detected characters in pixels Minimum Character Height This datum defines the minimum height of detected characters in pixels Maximum Character Height This datum defines the maximum height of detected characters in pixels Binary Threshold Mode This datum defines the threshold mode of operation used in detecting characters Auto This mode uses threshold parameters that are automatically determined for detection For optimal consistency under challenging environments use Fixed Template with application determined parameters Fixed Template This mode uses fixed binarization parameters defined by the Binary Mean Factor datum and the Binary Dynamic Range datum for processing Refer to the IntelliText Binarization section for further detail Match Test String This datum is a test datum that is useful in evaluating match strings Il PAK VH will update the Match Test String Result datum when this datum is modified This result is the match result using the current String Matching Me
350. upload and an Individual Results dialog box is created for the tool The OCV Tracking screen is updated to reflect the OCV tools that are in the currently loaded Job So O9 c o a 52 i vy 9 e Report RS 232 ERROR when inspection Result is Empty I PAK VH has a System Setting to enable disable the RS 232 Error codes from being sent during any tool failure By default this setting is enabled and allows I PAK VH to report ERROR when the RS 232 result data is empty You can disable this setting so that when the data is empty Il PAK VH does not report anything This only affects data sent out RS 232 and not what you see on the I PAK VH display e Enable Failed Image Queue When you check Enable Failed Image Queue the Failed Image Queue button on the Camera View becomes active All images from inspections that fail that can be saved are saved to the Failed Image Queue The Failed Image Queue is lossy For more information see Show Hide Failed Image Queue on page 7 4 To save every failed image lossless see Save Images on page 3 33 e Save Failure Queue Images on Return to Setup Enables and disables default the saving of the failure queue images when you return to Setup Mode You can view a queue of the last 1 to 20 failures per smart camera When the user settable maximum number of images is reached a new failed image overwrites the image in the first image frame Only images that are successfully
351. uploaded to the I PAK VH interface from the smart camera are entered into the queue Not all images get uploaded to the I PAK VH interface to avoid compromising inspection throughput For that reason when failures occur in rapid succession the failed images may not be entered into the queue e Number of Images In Queue Specifies the number of failed images to save in the Failed Image Queue Default 10 failed images Range 1 to 20 failed images Il PAK VH User Manual 3 81 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference Using the Failed Image Queue at Runtime Failed Image Queue Button The camera view contains the Failed Image Queue button as shown in Figure 3 58 FIGURE 3 58 Failed Image Queue Button nadie Sample data matrix Change Lot After you click Failed Image Queue the display changes so that you can cycle through the failed images as shown in Figure 3 59 FIGURE 3 59 Screen to Cycle Through Failed Images etal seo sample data matrix Change Lot Date Time 13 30 59 9 Jul Clicking the right and left arrow buttons cycles the display through the available image frames If no failed image has been assigned to a frame that frame will appear gray Zoom the failed image to display it at the desired magnification level 3 82 Il PAK VH User Manual Advanced Settings 25 Notice the counters and buttons in the two images below Current Product PREA Operator
352. urn to Setup Number of Images in Queue as I Keyboard Input of Match String r Set the Image Upload Max Rate Per Second C Maximum 2 4 C8 The Training and Results Tab window contains the following sections e Product ChangeOver Activities on page 3 72 e Results Reporting on page 3 74 Il PAK VH User Manual 3 71 Chapter 3 Setup Mode Reference Training on page 3 85 OCV Training on page 3 87 Product ChangeOver Activities This section allows you to set the automated reset of statistics and failure upon Product ChangeOver Reset Statistics on Product ChangeOver Enabling this setting automatically resets the Runtime statistics to zero when you perform a Product ChangeOver and when you create a new product This makes Il PAK VH ready to go On line with counters set to zero Default Selected Archive Path Enabling this setting enables the Archive Restore button on the Product ChangeOver dialog box Through this feature you can archive and restore products from a CD RW or any other valid path such as a directory or across a network I PAK VH Job files are typically very large and require a storage device with adequate space You ll always need to archive and restore both the avp and avpsys files for a product to run in Il PAK VH You can select the Archive Path using a browser by clicking on the ellipsis to the right of the Edit field Default Left Blank Show Onl
353. utput binary image can be viewed as an output buffer by double Clicking the tool The segmentation results are also drawn in the output buffer hf Inspection Wf Snapshot nf OCRX Tool Il PAK VH User Manual IntelliText OCR IntelliText OCR Tool Inputs Selected Font ome we a8 ce F lt 5 This datum is the currently selected font for character identification Character Polarity This field selects the polarity type of the characters to detect in the ROI where Dark Characters refers to black characters on white background and Light Characters refers the white characters on a black background String Matching Method This datum selects the method of string matching to apply to the Output String during tool execution Basic When matching method is set to Basic the tool will perform basic matching on the result Regular Expression TRE When set to Regular Expression TRE matching the tool will test the result string against the TRE regular expression provided in the match string field Regular expression syntax used can be found on the TRE website http laurikari net tre documentation regex syntax Examples Example expiration date string matching regex EXP JUN FEB 0 9 2 0 K4 EXP JUN 12 1998 match EXP JUN 30 1999 match EXP FEB 12 1998 match EXP JVN 12 1998 fail Il PAK VH User Manual 6 37 Chapter
354. utton saves all OCV Tracking data to a file The file is named SymbolTracking concatenated with the current time date stamp The Done button closes the OCV Failure Tracking dialog box The center of the dialog box displays the names of the OCV Tools and the number of failures for the tools The number of failures is based only on Symbol failures locator failures will not be included in these counts Next to the number of failures is a Details button When you click one of the Details buttons an Individual Symbol Results dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3 25 For each OCV tool in your Job the Individual Symbol Results dialog box displays the breakdown of the types of failures that can occur for each character in the trained string Il PAK VH User Manual 3 41 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference FIGURE 3 25 Individual Symbol Results Dialog Box Individual Symbol Results Symbol Results For Insp1 Snapshot1 FontT coll Symbol Correlation Sharpness Contrast Appearance Breaks Initial Residue Final Residue Max Blob Residue B8 ID Test Quad ID Test Break ID Test gt Offset Y Offset 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 3 12 16 14 18 18 15 32 32 30 30 32 30 22 22 27 39 44 46 30 33 33 31 34 35 35 Close Statistics This is a Supervisor level function Close Statistics quits this Statistics and Data Toolbar and returns you to the I PAK VH Setup Mode window Ad
355. vanced Settings Advanced Settings displays the Advanced Settings Toolbar as shown in Figure 3 26 The Advanced Settings Toolbar is accessed only via Programmer Mode FIGURE 3 26 Advanced Settings Toolbar Create a Product Tool Settings System Edit Tool Settings Save Product Product Settings Windows Close Explorer Advanced 3 42 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings The remainder of this section describes the following e Create a Product starting on page 3 43 e Save Product starting on page 3 54 So o9 c o Q 52 i vy e Product Settings starting on page 3 56 e System Settings starting on page 3 62 e Edit Tool Set starting on page 3 95 e Tool Settings starting on page 3 96 e Windows Explorer starting on page 3 97 e Close Advanced starting on page 3 97 Create a Product This is a Programmer level function The Create A Product button allows the Programmer to define a new product The Create A Product wizard is a series of interconnected dialog boxes that navigate the Programmer from the Product Settings to the System Settings to a flowchart like interface for Step Program creation After defining all the tools the Programmer is taken into Wizard Training mode in order to train the tools After you successfully train all the tools you can perform a tryout in Tryout Mode For cons
356. ver can occur Il PAK VH User Manual 7 103 as o 5 Z D pe X gt O Chapter T OCV Reference OCV Tips The OCV tools found in Il PAK VH have many settings and adjustments to allow for maximum flexibility However most applications require attention to only a few of these settings and adjustments OCVFont e ID Test Determination Pct Lowering the default value of 85 to 80 or 75 causes more characters to be flagged as similar Layout Step e Automatic Segmentation By default this property is off which allows the font library creation box to be sized manually around each character as it is entered into the library Il PAK VH is designed such that you perform this individual training of characters to activate runtime ID checking of special characters like O 0 B 8 D etc ID checking requires that these symbol boxes be the same size Note Whenever possible use the same size box to train all font library characters You can enable the automatic segmentation property and Il PAK VH automatically locates and places a box around all characters in the FOV DefaultSymbol e Final Residue Limit Increasing the default value of 15 to a higher number allows characters to vary more and still be accepted Increasing this value has a gradual effect e Max Flaw Size Increasing the default value of 1 pixel to a higher value allows characters to vary more and still
357. view Config File 3 39 Preview Statistics 3 40 OCV Tracking 3 40 Close Statistics 3 42 Il PAK VH User Manual CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 5 Contents Advanced Settings 3 42 Create a Product 3 43 Save Product 3 54 Product Settings 3 56 System Settings 3 62 Edit Tool Set 3 95 Tool Settings 3 96 Windows Explorer 3 97 Close Advanced 3 97 Run Mode 3 97 Troubleshooting 3 97 Shutting Down I PAK VH 3 97 Run Mode Reference 4 1 Overview 4 2 Run Mode Window 4 2 Run Mode Buttons and Border 4 2 Camera Results 4 7 Runtime Change Lot 4 9 Overruns 4 12 Exiting Run Mode and Entering Setup Mode 4 13 Default Passwords 4 13 Forgotten Passwords 4 13 Forgotten Passwords 21 CFR Part 11 4 14 End Batch 4 14 21 CFR Part 11 5 1 Components 5 2 Access Levels 5 3 Enabling 21 CFR Part 11 5 3 The I PAK Administrator 5 4 Customer Responsibilities 5 6 Starting PAK VH Using Part 11 and Adding I PAK VH Users 5 6 21 CFR Part 11 Functions 5 8 End of Batch Reports 5 8 Reconciliation of Configuration Files 5 12 Configure 21 CFR Part 11 Users 5 13 Il PAK VH User Manual Contents CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 7 Common 21 CFR Part 11 Areas of Concern 5 19 How do activate 21 CFR Part 11 5 19 What are the Password Schemes and Restrictions 5 19 How can prevent my users from getting to the desktop 5 20 How safe is the Audit Trail from being compromised 5 21 How safe are the Jobs files from being compromised 5 21 How safe are the Co
358. visor can change e The match string for a Symbology Tool a Data Matrix Tool and an OCRTrainableFont Tool after the tool has been trained initially using the Change Lot feature e The expected Font Tool layout after the tool has been trained initially Note You must ensure that the Font Tool has already been trained its number of layout characters is not changing its AutoFind characters are not changing and its character symbols are well defined in the font library Il PAK VH provides a unique default password 1101 for Operators this password allows Operators to perform a Change Lot function but does not allow them to enter Setup Mode When 21 CFR Part 11 user control is enabled Operators can perform a Change Lot function Il PAK VH User Manual 3 11 Chapter K Setup Mode Reference When you click Change Lot a dialog box is displayed similar to the dialog boxes in Figure 3 10 and Figure 3 11 It displays the full path of all tool names and their associated match strings or layouts for the Data Matrix Barcode and Font Tools respectively for all the tools in the Job available for Lot ChangeOver It will display five strings at a time Use the Next and Previous buttons to display all the tools in the Job FIGURE 3 10 Lot ChangeOver Edit Code Lot ChangeOver z Tool Path SQA2 Inspection1 Snapshotl My OCVFont Tool 1 SEP2008 EditCode Change This Tool s Code Change all Tool s
359. whether or not that user is authorized to do retraining By default this setting is disabled no signature authority Existing users will be set to NOT have this Signature Authority feature and therefore will NOT be able to approve training Any existing users in your user group must get a new user name and enable this Signature Authority feature to approve training The Signature Authority function has been expanded so that when person 1 trains the OCV tools or match strings for the Barcode or Data Matrix tools Il PAK VH checks to make sure that user has signature authority in addition to continuing to check for a valid user name password and security level Il PAK VH User Manual 5 5 Chapter 21 CFR Part 11 Customer Responsibilities Microscan has made every attempt to provide an off the shelf software solution for your vision needs Working with I PAK VH you need to provide Standard Operating Procedures SOPs at your company to further safeguard your data and comply to 21 CFR Part 11 Microscan has the following suggestions and recommendations Starting Il PAK VH Using Part 11 and Adding Il PAK VH Users 1 Determine who in your company will be the Il PAK Administrator Remember the Il PAK Administrator creates user accounts but does not have any programming rights the Il PAK Administrator is neither an I PAK VH Operator Supervisor nor Programmer Determine who will be a Programmer Microscan reco
360. width 3 Cancel Note DO NOT check Send line ends with line feeds This causes the match string to include this line feed as an actual character in the match string e TCP IP To enter the new Match String via TCP IP you need to define the Input Channel on the System Settings menu to be TCP IP and define its TCP IP protocol Once the Match String dialog box is displayed you will need to click Input Channel I PAK VH acts as a Server application and is in Listen Mode until the Client machine connects to it Before sending data the client has to request a connection Once the connection has been made I PAK VH can receive the match string If the connection is broken the application resets and places itself in Listen Mode In this case the client needs to reconnect When I PAK VH does receive the match string the string is displayed in the Match String dialog box Click OK to accept this new string or Cancel to revert to the old string 3 30 Il PAK VH User Manual Train and Tryout 25 Note The TCP IP input of match string must be terminated with a NULL 0 character Note I PAK expects the entire match string to be contained within one packet This means that you cannot type the match string in from a terminal program such as HyperTerminal Lo o9 c o 2 0 N Masking Tool When a vision tool that uses an input mask is selected the Masking Tool menu option becomes available Clicking on this m
361. width from 1 to 15 pixels Il PAK VH User Manual 6 45 Chapter Automatic Identification If threshold is set too high there is a risk of combining characters as shown below Example 2 In this example touching characters can be segmented by properly reducing the maximum width to a value closely matching the nominal width of the wide characters AERD ad Gobir vie 6 46 Il PAK VH User Manual IntelliText OCR Tool Outputs IntelliText OCR Status This output datum is true if the tool has run properly oe we Eg w 25 lt 5 Output String The output datum represents the output string of the detected characters Characters below the Unknown Confidence Threshold are replaced by the Unknown Character Number of Characters Found The output datum represents the number of characters detected Match Status This is the result of the matching of the Output String against the Match String when the tool is run using the methodology defined by String Matching Method Minimum Character Confidence The minimum confidence seen in the characters detected for the font selected Maximum Character Confidence The maximum confidence seen in the characters detected for the font selected Mean Character Confidence The mean confidence of all characters detected for the font selected Match String Test Result This datum is
362. windows camera views runtime stats etc For complete information about Run Mode see Chapter 7 Run Mode Reference Il PAK VH User Manual N Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool In this tutorial you will create a simple I PAK VH product that uses an OCVFontless Tool It is assumed that all System Settings are set to their default values If you have modified any System Settings the figures and descriptions in this tutorial may vary from the results you experience 2 i fe a mm gt lt a 1 From Windows select Start gt Microscan Visionscape gt Visionscape I PAK_VH I PAK VH displays its Welcome screen as shown in Figure 2 1 FIGURE 2 1 Select a Device for Il PAK VH Dialog Box e l Select a Device to get started Note This screen only comes up the first time you launch I PAK VH or if the last loaded product cannot be found 2 Click OK I PAK VH displays the Select a Visionscape Device dialog box as shown in Figure 2 2 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 3 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 2 Select a Visionscape Device Dialog Box elect a Visionscape Device Hardware Selection Select any Smart Camera from the List Below and Click Here Available Emulators Available Smart Cameras a amp Computer H 4B Network Cancel 3 Select a device Then click the Select an
363. x and AutoFind Pin2 Index properties of the OCV Tool select which characters to use as the find pins These characters are trained as templates for the pins The AutoFindSearchArea box sets up the search regions of the find pins This box can be moved and sized anywhere in the image independently of the OCV Tool box The size of the individual pin search areas is determined by comparing the OCV Tool box to the AutoFindSearchArea box The position of the individual search areas is determined by the position of the AutoFindSearchArea box rt 3 D i X gt O Il PAK VH User Manual 7 35 m Chapter T OCV Reference FIGURE 7 26 AutoFind Properties Page Tool Settings OCVRuntimeT ool nePt Locator LayoutStep AutoThreshold ComputePolarity a i Fy amp zg Default Datum Order v AutoFind Inputs Registration Method OnePt Locator ER Template Method OCV Symbols As Templates e Registration Method Selects between a 1 Pin Find and a 2 Pin Find Default 1 Pin OCVFont Tool and OCVRuntimeTool 2 Pin OCVFontless Tool When set to 1 Pin the locator will not handle any rotation of the characters being inspected Switching between the registration methods requires retraining the OCV Tool so that the appropriate templates can be set up e Template Method Sets the method for training the templates used by the AutoFind When set to OCV Symbols As Templates
364. xel count in the inspected image that will make the symbol fail the inspection When Residue Limit Units is set to Pixels Default symbol size Range 0 to symbol size The value of this property is the smallest count of residue pixels in the inspected image that will make the symbol fail the inspection This property is good for catching smudges that are poor aesthetically but would pass after all inspection operations are performed on it A property value of 100 or symbol size means initial residue is ignored Final Residue Method Selects between three algorithms for final residue analysis Total Residue Area This is the default This choice counts all On pixels in the residue image and use the value in Final Residue Limit pixel or percent as the tolerance Max Residue Blob Only counts the pixels in the largest blob of the residue image and use the value in Final Residue Max Blob Size as the tolerance Both Performs both methods Final Residue Limit Sets the amount of objectionable residue that is to be deemed passable when Final Residue Method is set to Total Residue Area or Both Final residue calculation is done after the image processing on the residue image that is associated with Maximum Flaw Size An assignment of 0 residue pixel count 0 means that no residue is passable An assignment of 100 residue pixel count symbol size means that objectionable residue as large as the are
365. xels Range 0 to 20 pixels e Appearance Flaw Break Test Determines whether the FontSymbol is to inspect for character breaks in the symbol When enabled the inspection fails if a break is found in the symbol When disabled the inspection ignores breaks in the symbol Default Enabled e Min Appear Flaw Break Size Is the smallest size break that causes a character break failure Default 2 pixels Range 1 to 10 pixels e Sharpness Limit Units Sets the units for the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property Il PAK VH User Manual 7 31 Chapter 7 OCV Reference When set to Gray Level the value of the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated sharpness value must be in order for the inspection to pass When set to Percentage the value of the Minimum Allowed Sharpness is used to calculate a percentage of the trained sharpness value which is then used as an absolute minimum value that the calculated sharpness value must be in order for the inspection to pass When switched from Gray Level to Percentage the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is updated to be the percentage value that corresponds to the gray level value that it previously held When switched from Percentage to Gray Level the Minimum Allowed Sharpness property is updated to be the gray level value that corresponds to the percentage value that it previously held De
366. y Smart Camera button Note If the smart camera is connected directly to a PC no network involved Il PAK VH automatically chooses the smart camera and you will not see the screen in Figure 2 2 This starts Il PAK VH the I PAK VH Run Mode window is displayed as shown in Figure 2 3 2 4 Il PAK VH User Manual N Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool FIGURE 2 3 I PAK VH Run Mode Window MICROSCAN a ented Fontes Failure Report z Change Lot SeA Operator View auto fit ff ie e m I gt lt a Note Steps 1 2 and 3 are only seen the first time that Il PAK VH starts or if the device that should be used in the start up Job cannot be detected 4 Click the Key icon see Figure 2 3 This displays the Password dialog box as shown in Figure 2 4 Il PAK VH User Manual 2 5 Chapter Il PAK VH Tutorials FIGURE 2 4 Password Dialog Box Password Input the Programmer or Supervisor Mode Password Backspace 5 Type 0101 and click Enter This places you in Programmer Mode and displays the Setup Mode window as shown in Figure 2 5 2 6 Il PAK VH User Manual Tutorial 1 OCVFontless Tool N FIGURE 2 5 I PAK VH Setup Mode Window File Access Level Calibration Menu Image Help MICROSCAN Sipe t oee Praa i Meor 0207 PM Change Product l Irain and Tryout Advanced Settings Bun Mode Please click button for des
367. y Unique Codes in Change Lot Setting Enables and disables the display of only unique codes in the Lot ChangeOver dialog box FIGURE 3 49 Lot ChangeOver Dialog Box Lot ChangeOver Tool Path J VisionSystem Inspection Snapshot OCVFont Tool 6MAD222 Edt Code J VisionSystem Inspection SnapshotT OCVFont Tool BMA0282 Edt Code I Show Full Path Status ___ al 3 72 Il PAK VH User Manual 25 Advanced Settings With Show Only Unique Codes in Change Lot enabled The list of tools on the Lot ChangeOver dialog box only shows tools with unique codes When the Job is scanned looking for OCV Tools to display Il PAK VH also checks to see if a tool with the same code is already displayed If a tool with the same code is found the new tool is not added to the list Lo O9 g Q sv ee oY Clicking Change all Tool s Code initiates a scan of the Job to find all tools with the associated code using the old code When a tool is found it is updated to have the new code The Change This Tool s Code buttons are not displayed You must change all tools that share the same code e Ignore Extra Layout Symbols When Input is Smaller Enables and disables the automatic ignore feature of Lot ChangeOver FIGURE 3 50 Lot ChangeOver Dialog Box Lot ChangeOver Tool Path VisionSystem Inspection Snapshotl OCVFont Tool GhMA0222 Edit Code V Show Full Path
368. yed on the left 2 Click Demo Mode The Demo Mode Products dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure C 2 FIGURE C 2 Demonstration Mode Products Dialog Box Demonstration Mode Parameters Enable Demonstration Mode Demonstration Time for Each Product 30 30000 J 60 Seconds Available Products Selected Products 3 Click to enable Enable Demonstration Mode 4 To the right of Demonstration Time for Each Product specify the amount of time you want each product to run in Demo Mode Default 60 seconds Range 30 seconds to 30 000 seconds 30 000 seconds 500 minutes approx 8 hours and 20 minutes 5 Inthe left pane Available Products highlight at least two products Note You cannot highlight more than 20 products C 4 Il PAK VH User Manual Running in Demo Mode C 6 Click Select Products and then click OK 7 Click Close Advanced This returns you to the main Setup Mode screen v oO o D m Il PAK VH checks the number of products selected to make sure that you did not select too many more than 20 or too few less than 2 products If the Enable Demonstration Mode checkbox is not checked Demo Mode is disabled Running in Demo Mode If Demo Mode is enabled when you return to the main Setup Mode screen the I PAK VH title bar will display Il PAK VH 4 0 0 Setup Mode Demonstration Mode After you click Run Mode I PAK VH enters Demo Mode I P
369. ymbol name in the list also selects it Clicking on the scroll bar to the right of the list scrolls through the list The FONT box contains the name of all symbols in the selected OCVFont The first item in the list is IGN which ignores characters The Up and Down buttons scroll through the list to select a symbol name Clicking on a symbol name in the list also selects it Clicking on the scroll bar scrolls through the list 7 76 Il PAK VH User Manual Keyboard Input of Match String a Character Substitution To substitute one symbol for another select the layout character in the layout list that you want to replace Select the symbol from the Font box that you want to use to replace the layout symbol and click Substitute The layout list will update as well as the Inspect Chars string rt 3 D i X gt O Ignoring a Character To ignore one of the symbols in the layout and exclude it from being inspected at runtime select the symbol to be ignored from the layout list Select the IGN symbol from the Font box Then click Substitute The symbol is removed from both the layout list and the Inspect Chars string Finishing Up If you are not satisfied with the layout and wish to retrain the tool click Disapprove in the Setup Mode Train window with the OCVRuntimeTool still selected You can adjust the properties of the tool and retrain until you achieve the desired layout string When you are sati

I-PAK VH User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents